FCC ID: PY77130501 Licensed portable

 

P800_UM.book Page 1 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM P800 Users manual 1 P800_UM.book Page 2 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Sony Ericsson P800 Users Manual First edition (September 2002) This manual is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equipment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however, be incorporated into new editions of this manual. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2002. All rights reserved. Publication number:

Users Manual EN/LZT 108 6039 P1A The Bluetooth trademarks are owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Symbian and all Symbian-based marks and logos are trademarks of Symbian Limited. Memory Stick is a trademark of Sony Corporation. Beatnik is a trademark of Beatnik, Inc. 2 Java and all Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners. Copyright SyncML initiative Ltd. (1999-2002). All rights reserved. Men In Black 2 (2002) Columbia Pictures Industries, Inc. All rights reserved. This product contains software copyright Beatnik, Inc. 1996-

2002. The user is granted non-exclusive, non-sublicensable rights to use a single copy of the Licensed Software solely in conjunction with the Licensee Product [i.e. the P800]. The user may not alter, transfer, modify, incorporate into or with other software or create a derivative work of any part of the Licensed Software. No ownership rights to the Licensed Software and Documentation are transferred to the user. The user may not use the Licensed Software otherwise than as a part of the equipment or software in which the Licensed Software has been incorporated or for which they have been delivered. The user may not remove any proprietary, copyrights, trade secret or warning legend from the Licensed Software or Documentation or copies thereof. The user may not copy any Licensed Software, except for archival purposes. The user may not decompile or reverse engineer Licensed Software except to the extent permitted by compulsory law. The user may not furnish P800_UM.book Page 3 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM any Licensed Programs or Documentation into any country in vioEnd-user license agreement for Sun Java J2ME:

1. Restrictions: Software is confidential copyrighted information of Sun and title to all copies is retained by Sun and/

or its licensors. Customer shall not modify, decompile, disassemble, decrypt, extract, or otherwise reverse engineer Software. Software may not be leased, assigned, or sublicensed, in whole or in part. 2. Export Regulations: Software, including technical data, is subject to U.S. export control laws, including the U.S. Export Administration Act and its associated regulations, and may be subject to export or import regulations in other countries. Customer agrees to comply strictly with all such regulations and acknowledges that it has the responsibility to obtain licenses to export, re-export, or import Software. Software may not be downloaded, or otherwise exported or re-exported (i) into, or to a national or resident of, Cuba, Irak, Iran, North Korea, Libya, Sudan, Syria (as such listing may be revised from time to time) or any country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially Designated Nations or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders. 3. Restricted Rights: Use, duplication or disclosure by the United States government is subject to the restrictions as set forth in the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Preliminary Clauses in DFARS 252.227-7013(c) (1) (ii) and FAR 52.227-

19(c) (2) as applicable. Any rights not expressly granted herein are reserved. Note Some of the services in this manual are not supported by all networks. This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use a particular service or not. Important Your mobile phone has the capability to load, store and forward additional content, e.g. ring tone melodies. The use of such content may be restricted or prohibited by rights of third parties, including but not limited to restriction under applicable copyright laws. You, and not Sony Ericsson, are entirely responsible for additional content that you download to or forward from your mobile phone. Prior to your use of any additional content, please verify that your intended use is properly licensed or is otherwise authorised. Sony Ericsson does not guarantee the accuracy, integrity or quality of any additional content or any other third party content. Under no circumstances will Sony Ericsson be liable in any way for your improper use of additional content or other third party content. 3 P800_UM.book Page 4 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Contents Overview ....................................................................... 6 Online services.......................................................... 114 Getting started ............................................................... 7 Time .......................................................................... 116 General functions ........................................................ 18 Calculator.................................................................. 120 Phone........................................................................... 36 Personalizing your P800 ........................................... 121 Contacts....................................................................... 50 Control panel............................................................. 124 Messages ..................................................................... 59 Installing applications ............................................... 147 Internet ........................................................................ 70 Connecting to other devices...................................... 150 Calendar ...................................................................... 79 Synchronization and backup..................................... 154 Tasks............................................................................ 83 Getting started with Internet and Messages.............. 159 Jotter ............................................................................ 86 Troubleshooting ........................................................ 168 Games.......................................................................... 89 Guidelines for safe and efficient use......................... 172 Voice memo ................................................................ 92 Terms and definitions ............................................... 179 CommuniCam and Pictures......................................... 94 Technical data ........................................................... 187 Audio player................................................................ 99 Video player .............................................................. 104 Viewer ....................................................................... 108 4 P800_UM.book Page 5 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 5 P800_UM.book Page 6 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Overview You have bought a very advanced smartphone. To learn to use the features, you should start by reading Getting started. The complete P800 documentation consists of the following parts:

The P800 is a full-featured mobile phone, fully integrated with the other functions of the device, including third party applications. Like a computer, the P800 has a flexible and simple way of organizing applications and data. The built-in memory is available for photos, music, messages or applications. When space becomes limited, you can move files to a Memory Stick. You can also send data to another P800, e-

mail, upload it to a website, or transfer it to a PC. The P800 includes useful features such as:

Audio player

Contacts

Personalized ring signals

Picture phone book

Voice dialling and voice answer

Office handsfree

Flight mode PDA use

Games

CommuniCam

Video player 6

Users manual.

Help texts in the P800.

Complementary information on the Internet, refer to www.sonyericsson.com. Information on the PC suite and Multimedia CDs. This manual contains the following information:

What you need to know to get started using your P800.

A presentation of the P800s general functions.

A detailed description of each application in the P800.

How to personalize and set up the functions of the P800, and how to install applications.

How to connect the P800 to other devices, and synchronize its data.

How to set up the browser and messaging functions.

How to solve problems that might occur during use.

Guidelines for safe and efficient use.

Description of terms and abbreviations used in the manual. Important technical information. Overview

P800_UM.book Page 7 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Getting started The P800 package F L A SmartPhoneP800 F B G J D K H M E C Preliminary A P800 with stylus B Battery C Travel charger D Syncstation with USB cable E Stereo headset F Protective bag and strap G 3 extra styli H Cover - flip replacement J Memory Stick Duo K Memory Stick Duo adapter L Users Manual package M 2 CDs, PC Suite for P800 and Multimedia for P800 Note If your package does not include all the listed items above, please contact your retailer. Note Before you can use your P800 you need to insert the SIM card, and insert and charge the battery. Always detach the charger and turn off the phone before you insert or remove the SIM card. Getting started 7 P800_UM.book Page 8 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary P800 outline A B C D E A B C D E F G H I F A Connector for stereo headphones B Jog Dial for navigating through menus and more C Infrared port for communication D On/Off button E Flip with Keypad (in closed position) F Connector for accessories A External antenna connector (on the rear side) B CommuniCam lens (on the rear side) C Battery compartment (on the rear side) D Touchscreen E Flip (in open position) F Shutter release for the CommuniCam G Internet button for activation of the browser H Slot for Sony Memory Stick Duo (under the stylus) I Stylus for writing on the screen 8 Getting started P800_UM.book Page 9 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Applications - Flip closed C B A D E Preliminary Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 CommuniCam Messages Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Applications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 CommuniCam Messages Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter Voice memo Online services Connections A Shortcut to the Messages application B Shortcut to the Contacts application C Shortcut to the Call list application D Shortcut to the Calendar application E Shows all Flip closed applications The P800 works in different operational modes. With the Keypad Flip closed, the P800 can be used like a conventional mobile telephone with the added benefit of the Jog Dial. You can select between the four most important applications by rotating the Jog Dial. You start the selected application by pressing the Jog Dial inward or pressing the key. If you select the Applications icon, all applications that can be used with the Flip closed are shown in a list. Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application, and press the Jog Dial or press the key to start the application. At any time you can open the Flip to continue working in the more comprehensive flip open mode. Closing the flip generally ends an activity. (Multimedia will however continue playing.) Getting started 9 P800_UM.book Page 10 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Applications - Flip open C D E F B A Applications View All CommuniCam Pictures Video Audio Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Voice Memo Calculator CommuniCam Pictures Video Audio Internet Messages Contacts Phone Calendar Tasks Jotter Voice Memo Calculator Time Viewer Remote Sync Online services Control panel Demo GPRS data log Chess Solitaire A Shortcut to the Messages application B Shortcut to the Contacts application C Shortcut to the Call list application D Shortcut to the Calendar application E Shortcut to the Internet application F Shows all Flip open applications When the Flip is opened, the large touch-screen is revealed. In this mode, the stylus can be used to navigate and enter data. The Jog Dial provides further navigation and selection capability. Text can be entered using natural handwriting on the screen. An on-screen keyboard is also available at all times. Symbol and special character keyboards can be selected when required. With the Flip open, you can select between the five most important applications, either by tapping the icon with the stylus, or by rotating and pressing the Jog Dial. If you select the Applications icon, all applications are shown in a list. Tap the application with the stylus, or rotate and press the Jog Dial to start the application. The Flip can also be removed. A virtual flip is then available, making it possible to work in both operational modes. 10 Getting started P800_UM.book Page 11 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Jog Dial Action Rotate the Jog Dial (up) Rotate the Jog Dial (down) Press the Jog Dial (inward) Press the Jog Dial (away)

(select/action). Function Scrolls up items in a list;

Adjusts volume during a call;

moves back a page when playing a multimedia message. Scrolls down items in a list;

Adjusts volume during a call;

moves forward a page when playing a multimedia message. Flip closed: Generally the same as Flip open: Selects a highlighted item. Dials selected phone number. Flip closed: This always has the same action as

. Goes back to the previous screen, dismisses dialogues, and sends a busy signal to the calling party when you receive a call. It will not end a call. Flip open: Scrolls to the left across the main Application tabs at the top. Action Press the Jog Dial (toward) Preliminary Function Flip closed: Always brings up the Options menu. Flip open: Scrolls to the right across the main Application tabs at the top. Up Down Inward Away Toward Getting started 11 P800_UM.book Page 12 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary The SIM card When you register as a subscriber with a network operator, you get a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card contains a computer chip that keeps track of your phone number, the services included in your subscription, and your phone book information, among other things. A PIN (Personal Identity Number) code is supplied with the SIM card from your operator and must be entered when switching on your P800. The SIM card is placed under the battery. Tip You can also store SIM card data, such as contacts, in the phone's own memory. It is possible to export/import data between these media. Battery The battery that comes with your P800 may not be charged. You should charge the battery for at least 4 hours before you use it for the first time. Should you need to discharge the battery, simply use your P800 as usual until the battery runs out of power. Charge the battery by using the charger supplied with your P800. You can also use other battery chargers that have been supplied with other Ericsson mobile phones using the same connector plug, for example T28, R320s. Warning! Avoid direct sunlight. Extremely high temperatures reduce the capacity of the battery permanently. Battery insertion and removal To insert the battery 1. Ensure that the flip is closed. 2. Place the battery into the battery compartment and close the lid. To remove the battery 1. Ensure that your P800 is turned off. Note It is important that you always turn off your P800 before removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of information. 12 Getting started P800_UM.book Page 13 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM 2. Remove the battery lid by pulling down the release catch. 3. Take out the battery. Charging the battery Warning! The mains (power) supply plug may look different depending on the mains socket in your country. Do not connect the AC-plug-in unit to any other item than your Sony Ericsson Travel Charger or other compatible Sony Ericsson / Ericsson chargers with the same plug.

When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard, the indicator light (on the top of your P800) blinks red and a battery low message appears on the screen.

The battery can be charged whenever you want without affecting its performance. However, using your P800 while charging lengthens the charging time. To charge the battery The P800 can be charged either switched on or off. 1. Make sure the battery is attached to your P800 and the lid is closed. Preliminary 2. Connect the charger to the P800 at the flash symbol on the P800s connector.The flash symbol on the charger plug must face upwards. Warning! If the guidance-

pins on the charger plug are damaged, do not try to connect the charger. If you do, you might damage the P800. 3. Connect the charger to the mains Charging is indicated by the battery meter on the screen pulsing continuously, and the indicator on top of the P800, showing a steady red light (or green, if the P800 is turned on). Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may take up to 30 minutes before the battery charging icon appears in the screen. 4. Wait approximately 4 hours or until the battery meter on the screen is full and the indicator on the top of the P800 shows a steady green light. 5. Remove the charger by tilting the plug upwards. Getting started 13 P800_UM.book Page 14 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Memory Stick Duo With the Sony Memory Stick Duo you can easily save still images, music, voice and computer data and applications. If your phone memory runs low, you can transfer the content from the phone memory to the Memory Stick Duo. You can then move the Memory Stick Duo to another P800 to share the information. When your P800 is connected to a PC, you can use the P800 to read from and write to a Memory Stick Duo. LOCK For more information on how to move data to and from the Memory Stick, refer to Folders on page 18. To insert the Memory Stick Duo 1. Remove the stylus by pushing it upwards. 2. Insert the Memory Stick Duo in the slot, with the connector side facing you (see picture). Make sure it is securely inserted. A click should be heard. Warning! Improper insertion may damage your P800 and the Memory Stick Duo. To remove the Memory Stick Duo 1. Remove the stylus. 2. Press the edge of the Memory Stick Duo using your fingernail or the stylus to release it.You will hear a click as it is pushed out of the slot. Note Take care when removing the the Memory Stick Duo to avoid dropping it. Memory Stick Duo Adapter Your P800 uses the shorter memory stick variant, Memory Stick Duo. Memory Stick Duo is around a third the size and half the weight of a regular sized Memory Stick Use the Memory Stick Duo Adapter when using your Memory Stick Duo in a device (camera, MP3 player, for example) equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick. Insert your Memory Stick Duo according to the picture on the adapter. Warning! Do not insert a Memory Stick Duo adapter into a Memory Stick slot without Memory Stick Duo. This may damage the product. Please ensure that the adapter's connector side is inserted first. For more information about Sony Memory Sticks, visit www.memorystick.com. 14 Getting started P800_UM.book Page 15 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Connecting the accessories C E B D A Preliminary A The travel charger is connected to the desk stand or to the P800. B The USB cable from the desk stand is connected to a PC. C The headset is connected to the P800. D Other accessories can be connected to the connector at the bottom. E An external antenna can be connected to the connector at the rear. The wrist strap is placed in the holder beneath the battery and routed out through the slot in the battery compartment lid. Warning! If the guidance-pins on the charger plug are damaged, do not try to connect the charger. If you do, you might damage the P800. Services You need the following services to use the functions of the P800:

You need... GSM subscription GSM subscription To use... telephony text messaging (SMS) multimedia messaging (MMS) MMS account, GSM data subscription e-mail account, GSM data subscription e-mail Internet account, WAP account, GSM Internet data subscription GSM data subscription data communication Getting started 15 P800_UM.book Page 16 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Although the manual covers the modes of operation in detail, it is very important to remember that many of the functions described are dependent on them being available from your network operator and Internet service provider. Please consult your network operator and Internet service provider for more information about the services that are available to you. Note To keep track of the cost using data connections, a GPRS data log is available. See GPRS - data logs on page 166. First time start-up 1. Press the On/Off button to turn on your P800, keeping the flip closed. 2. Enter your PIN when the dialogue box appears and press

, press to delete a digit. When the P800 is turned on for the first time, the Setup Wizard will be started automatically, and guide you through the essential settings. Follow the instructions on the screen. The different steps in the Setup Wizard 1. You will be prompted to open the flip. 2. Information on the wizard. 3. Calibrating the screen. 4. Setting the location. 5. Setting date, time and formats. 6. More information about the Jog Dial, text entry and status bar. 7. Setup complete. Demo application The Demo application demonstrates some of the most common functions in your P800. To start the Demo 1. Select the Applications icon 2. Select the demo icon The demo is started. To stop the Demo

Tap the screen or rotate the Jog Dial to stop the demo. The demo is also stopped at:

An incoming call. An incoming text or multimedia message. Making and receiving calls To make a call

Enter the area code and phone number, and press the Jog Dial inward or press to make the call. 16 Getting started Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 17 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To end a call

Press the Jog Dial inward or press To receive a call

Press the Jog Dial inward or press incoming call. to end the call. to answer an Care instructions Your P800 is a highly sophisticated electronic device. To get the most out of it, please make sure that you follow this advice:

Keep the P800 in its protective bag when not using it.

Use a commercial glass screen cleaner sprayed on a cloth, when you clean the screen.

Use only the stylus to tap on the screen. See chapter Guidelines for safe and efficient use on page 172 for more information how to take care of your P800. Getting started 17 P800_UM.book Page 18 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary General functions This chapter describes a number of general functions that are the same for many applications in your P800. Icon views The P800 can present the applications in two ways:

List view (small icons appears in one column) Icon view (large icons in two columns) Folders On the right of the menu bar is the folders menu. Folders are used to organize user data, for example contacts, jotter entries, or task lists, into user definable sets. Each application has its own set of folders: a folder created in one application is not visible in another. In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of the current item. Every item created in an application is always assigned to a single folder, by default the same folder as displayed in list (or detailed view). There are three recommended folders for most applications: Unfiled, Personal, and Business. In list view, there is a super-folder called All, which, when selected, displays items from all folders. All is the default value in list views and when an application is first launched. You can add folders or change the names of existing folders through the Edit Folders menu item. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all folders can be deleted. You use folders to move items to and from the Memory Stick. When a Memory Stick is available in the P800, the folders on it are shown in the folders menu. Common functions Zooming You can change the size of the screen fonts between Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, select Edit > Zoom. Find The Find function searches through all the items stored in an application. The standard Find dialogue contains a single text edit box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Selecting Find starts the search, Cancel closes the Find dialogue. 18 General functions

P800_UM.book Page 19 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM In some applications, for example Messaging, Find may be more complicated:

the size of each message is so large that you may want to restrict the search to the current message only. folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to restrict the search to the current folder only. Sorting your files You can sort the files you have stored in your P800. By sorting your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be displayed on the screen. You can choose between four different ways:

Type: The different file types are sorted together in the list. Size: The largest file (size in kB) is displayed at the top of the list, and the smallest at the bottom of the list. Date: The latest file you saved in your P800 is displayed at the top of the list. Preliminary Beaming It is very convenient to be able to exchange data using infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology when beaming between two devices that support the exchange standards. For example, one user selects an item in the Pictures application and then enters the menu Pictures > Send as > IR, and the two users align their devices. The receiving user usually does not have to initiate anything provided that the infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology is enabled. As a precaution, however, the recipient does have the opportunity to accept or reject the item sent and has the option to view it after saving. Save saves the item into the destination application and then optionally opens the application to show the item just saved. Methods for storing data Your P800 can store data in three different ways:

Name: The files are displayed in alphabetical order, from top to bottom.

SIM card (Only for phone numbers and associated names). See Managing the SIM phone book on page 56. Note Sort is not valid for all applications.

Phone memory (12 MB of capacity for storing pictures, messages, music, applications and so on).

Memory Stick (Expansion memory. There are several alternatives with different amounts of memory on the market). See Folders on page 18. General functions 19

P800_UM.book Page 20 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Getting help From the menu bar select Edit > Help or View > Help to get to the inbuilt help system. The help system uses two views:

The Topics view shows all available topics, for example both the topics connected to a specific application and general topics.

The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic. The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the detail view/text view and displays the selected topic. You can also set the zoom level and exit the Help system. Also, in many dialogue boxes it is possible to select the help icon in the upper right corner to get help. Icons Application icons An application icon starts its application when you select it. Below are the default application icons that you can see in the screen when the flip is closed, or in the application picker when the flip is open. A list of more application icons is available in the application launcher. Phone Call list Application launcher Calendar Contacts Internet Messages 20 General functions P800_UM.book Page 21 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Indicators and status bar icons These icons appear in the flip closed standby screen or in the status bar when the flip is open. They indicate status for several functions or that something has happened, for example, the P800 has received a text message. Battery strength Bluetooth on Calls screened Divert all calls notification GPRS

Help Held call Incoming call Speed dial entry Preliminary When the flip is open, you can often select the icons to get more detailed information or start an application. Infrared port active Keyboard Missed call Ongoing data call Signal strength, GPRS active SMS notification SMS overflow Status Time, alarm set General functions 21 P800_UM.book Page 22 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Flip closed - overview This chapter describes how your P800 works with the flip closed. With the flip closed the P800 behaves very much like an ordinary mobile telephone. The screen is not touch sensitive when the flip is closed; therefore you operate the P800 by pressing the keys. Keypad Key Function OK Enter selected function. B AC K

Return to previous menu.

Press and hold to return to Standby. C L EA R

Delete entered characters/digits from the screen one by one.

Press and hold to delete an entire row of entered characters/digits.

Delete an entry from Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, Voice memo, and Messaging.

Press and hold to disconnect the microphone

(mute function) when a call is in progress.

Mute the ring signal during an incoming call.

Press and hold to put the P800 into silent mode, when in the standby mode. O PT ION S

Open the menu with different options for different applications.

Press and hold to open Applications. A S TE RIS K

Enter the character *.

Press and hold to enter a p (pause) character.

Press and hold to switch between different input modes (Abc, 123 ... ). 22 General functions P800_UM.book Page 23 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Key Function H A SH / @

Enter the character #.

Press and hold to see a list with special characters.

Terminate the input of PIN and security codes.

Retrieve a phone number from the SIM card phone book (enter the number of the memory position and then press

N U ME RIC K EY S

Enter the digits 0 to 9.

Enter associated characters or perform

, to enter the international associated functions, for example:

Press and hold character '+'. Press and hold

Press and hold any of the keys

, to dial your voice mail. to reach a contact beginning with a specific letter.

Preliminary Standby view When you switch your P800 on, the standby view is displayed. This view is displayed only in flip closed mode and contains configurable shortcuts (see the section Application shortcuts below) to other applications. Also, when closing the flip, you always return to the standby view. There are five application shortcuts in the standby view. The selected application is highlighted and its name is shown at the key. Press Jog Dial or bottom left of the screen above the to start the application. There are also 6 icon positions, 3 at each side of the screen, for temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread messages. Options menu Press standby options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, missed calls and more. or press the Jog Dial towards you to open the Application shortcuts It is very convenient to have shortcuts to the applications you use most frequently in the standby view. Change the shortcuts in the following menu in flip open mode:

General functions 23 P800_UM.book Page 24 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Control panel > Device > Flip closed shortcuts Background Image You can change the background image (wallpaper) in flip open mode, go to Control panel > Device > Display. Tip More background images can be found on the Multimedia for P800 CD, delivered with your P800. Status bar The status bar on top of the screen displays:

Signal strength. Varies from very low to full signal. Indicates also the status of your GPRS connection. 12:02 pm Time. Shows the current time and indicates activated alarms. Battery. Indicates current battery level (zero to four units) and charging status. Note More information about battery status and GPRS can be found in Options menu > Status Applications in flip closed mode Select flip closed. to list all the applications that can be started with the Call list The Call List displays the latest calls either outgoing, incoming or missed. Press the Jog Dial or Activated from the standby view only. to call selected entry. Contacts Displays a list of your contacts. Select a contact to view associated contact data. Then press the Jog Dial or a call. to make Messages You can read, create, send and delete text (SMS), multimedia

(MMS) and e-mail messages in this view. Calendar The Calendar view displays entries, if any, for the current day. Use the Jog Dial to get more information about a selected entry or to change day. Example Tuesday 29 January 11:00 Lunch with A. Eriksson 14:00 Project meeting Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority, and so on, for all your tasks and let your P800 remind you on time. 24 General functions P800_UM.book Page 25 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Jotter Connections Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view, the whole entry can be seen. With

, it is possible to edit or make a new entry via the keypad. It is not possible to make, edit or view a drawing in this mode. Set the way you communicate with your PC or other device. Select between infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology and cable. In the cable menu, you also select whether the P800 is going to operate as a modem or not. Preliminary Voice Memo Your P800 can be used like a voice recorder. Use create a new or delete an old memo. to play, CommuniCam In CommuniCam view the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the CommuniCam button or the Jog Dial to take a photo. Tip The CommuniCam button is also a shortcut to the CommuniCam application. Online services Your service provider might offer different services reachable from your P800. For example: weather forecasts, financial information or newsletters. Contact your service provider for more information. Selecting and starting applications Rotate the Jog Dial to select an application. In the standby view, the selected application becomes coloured and slightly enlarged and the name is shown down to the left of the screen, just above the keypad to start the selected application. key on the keypad. Press the Jog Dial or on the Tip In pressing its specific number. view, it is also possible to start an application by Closing applications The current application automatically closes and the data is saved when you return to the standby view or switch to another application. Entering text in flip closed mode When you press a key, a pre-edit box with different characters is shown on the toolbar:

wxyz9 If the same key is pressed again, the next character in the pre-

edit box will be selected. General functions 25 P800_UM.book Page 26 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary The continuously pressed, the and then whole words. key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If key deletes several characters Inserting text There are four text entry types:

Abc initial uppercase letter, the rest lowercase. Default for each new text edit field.

123 numeric entry only.

ABC uppercase entry. abc lowercase entry In text edit mode, press to select text entry type. and choose Text Options > Input type A short press on toggles the input types in text edit mode. Inserting symbols In text edit mode, press and choose Text Options > Add symbol to select an item from the symbol selector table. Use Jog Dial to select the row and press select a symbol and press

. Then scroll within the row to

. Virtual flip The virtual flip is to be used when you have physically removed the flip and want to use your P800 in flip closed mode. The virtual flip gives you the same functionality as the real flip keypad. Enter numbers and characters using your stylus. Select flip. Select virtual flip. to open the virtual to close the See the chapter Removing and attaching the flip keypad on page 32 on how to remove the flip and activate the virtual flip. 26 General functions

P800_UM.book Page 27 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Flip open This chapter describes what functions are available with the flip open. Preliminary Screen areas In the flip open mode the screen is touch sensitive. The screen is divided into a number of areas, see the figure and table below.. Internet Edit P800 WEB/WAP P800 WEB/WAP Internet Browser Internet Browser A B C D E Item A Application picker Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the most common applications, customizable. Description General functions 27 P800_UM.book Page 28 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary B Menu bar Usually, contains two menus on the left, and a folder menu on the right. The two left-hand menus always have the same form:

the application menu, whose name is always the same as the application, and which contains the system services used by most applications, such as Find, Send as, and Delete.

the edit menu, with editing items such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Zoom, Preferences and Help D Button bar C Application space Applications use this central area of the screen in a way that is appropriate to the information that they display. Many of the built-in applications are based on two standard view layouts: a list view and a detail view Optionally, an application view displays a button bar at the bottom of the application space, containing useful controls and shortcuts. Not all application views require a button bar. Displays device status information such as signal strength, battery and device information. Settings for sounds and time. On-screen keyboard. Temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread messages. E Status bar Navigation In flip open mode navigation is carried out using the stylus and tapping selected items and by using the Jog Dial, see the chapter Jog Dial on page 11. Calibration The screen is pre-calibrated to factory settings. However, this may not necessarily agree with how you use the stylus. Calibration is calculated by the average stylus tap speed and the location of the stylus tap on selection. To recalibrate the screen 1. Select Applications > Control panel > Device > Display. 2. Tap Calibrate and the calibrate screen appears. 3. Tap once at the centre of each of the three calibration points in numerical order. 4. Tap Yes or No to accept or reject the new settings. To restore the factory settings 1. Select Applications > Control panel > Device > Display. 2. Tap Calibrate and the calibrate screen appears. 3. Press Jog Dial - the text Factory settings restored is shown and you are taken back to the screen. 28 General functions P800_UM.book Page 29 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Entering text - Flip open This section describes how to enter text in flip open mode. See Entering text in flip closed mode on page 25 on how to enter text in flip closed mode. There are two ways of entering text with the flip open:

Use the on-screen keyboard found at the bottom of the screen.

Write directly on the screen using the stylus. On-screen keyboard In text edit mode, select the keyboard icon and then select characters. Select Done when ready. Preliminary Calendar Edit Unfiled Weekly meeting Type Appointment Date 08/01/2002 Description The agenda for... Done t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 q w e r y u i o p l cap s d f g h j a k z x c v b n m . aeo 123 abc

At the bottom left of the keyboard you can choose between three keyboard layouts with different character sets. Tap one of the following keys:

abc - standard characters

- international characters 123 - numeric characters and currencies General functions 29 P800_UM.book Page 30 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary The current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the keyboard. Tap the arrows or rotate the Jog Dial to change input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down menu with Cut, Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting, the text must be selected first. Handwriting recognition Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters, numbers or other characters, and displays these characters as text. Handwriting recognition is only active when needed, that is, when focus is currently on a text input field in an application view or in a dialogue that needs an text entry. Contacts Edit Unfiled First name Jane Last name Jones Job title Graphic Desi Phone (w) Phone (h) Mobile (w) Ring tone Default Melody Email (w) Fax (w) Web The text mode screen is split into an upper and a lower part, by an arrow in the middle of the right edge. Write lowercase letters below the arrow and uppercase in line with it. Write numbers above the arrow. Note Most letters can be written in different stroke styles, see the tables below. The style itself does not matter when making letters upper- or lowercase, this depends only on the position on the screen. 30 General functions P800_UM.book Page 31 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Letters Lowercase letters are written below the arrow and uppercase letters in line with the arrow. full stop comma apostrophe question exclamation 1 2 ampersand at double quote tab space backspace carriage return a b c d e f g h i j k l m 2 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 2 n o p q r s t u v w x 1 y z 2 1 2 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. General functions Preliminary Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent above the arrow. Note Start each stroke at the dotted end. 8 9

Numbers Numbers are written above the arrow. 0 1

2 3 4 5 6 7 Note Start each stroke at the dotted end.

full stop or

comma dash tilde backspace tab 31 P800_UM.book Page 32 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Extended characters Write the character above the arrow, then insert the character l

(written from bottom to top) before writing the extended character. See the Handwriting recognition help topic for information on how to write these characters. Removing and attaching the flip keypad To remove the Flip 1. Use your fingernail to gently lift up and push the cover plate under and away from the keypad, see picture below. Note Be careful with the touch-sensitive screen. Never use a sharp object like a screwdriver. 2 1 2. Unlock the catch and lift away the keypad. 3. Attach the flip replacement by first placing the small hooks by the screen and then press on the curved front part until it is securely fixed. To attach the Flip 1. Use your fingernail to gently lift up and push the flip replacement. 2. If needed, turn the hinge on the keypad to the correct position, see the figure below. 32 General functions P800_UM.book Page 33 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM 3. Attach the keypad to the P800. 4. Secure the flip by pressing the catch until you hear a click. Click 5. Attach the cover plate by first placing the small hooks by the screen and then press on the curved front part until it is securely fixed. Preliminary Virtual flip open mode The virtual flip is to be used when you physically have removed the flip. Activate this function in Control Panel > Device > Flip removed. activated. Tap it to get to virtual flip closed mode. is shown on the status bar when virtual flip is P800 locks You can lock your P800 to prevent other people from using it. Use the SIM card lock and the device lock to protect your SIM card and your P800 from unauthorized use. The P800 will ask you to enter the codes when necessary. You release the locks by entering codes that will be displayed as asterisks (*) when you enter them. Note You can usually make an emergency call without unlocking the P800. General functions 33 P800_UM.book Page 34 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary

Locks Device lock:

At power on Off When SIM changed SIM card lock:

At power on Off Automatic key lock Locks Change Codes Cancel Done SIM card lock The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the P800, against unauthorized use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK codes. You can find your PIN code and sometimes your PUK code in the documentation you received with your SIM card. If required, contact your service provider to obtain your PUK code. (PIN stands for Personal Identification Number and PUK for Personal Unblock Key.) Your PIN code consists of four to eight digits. If the PIN code is enabled, the P800 will ask for the PIN code when you start it. To activate the SIM card lock 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences > Locks 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. You can choose to have the SIM card locked every time you turn the P800 on, or to have the SIM card unlocked. An error message informs you if a wrong PIN code has been entered. Usually after three wrong attempts (SIM card dependent) the SIM card will be blocked and you need to enter the PUK code to unlock it. The PUK code consists of eight digits. When you have entered the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail, the SIM card will be disabled and you need to contact your network operator. You cannot change the PUK code. PIN2 Some functions on the SIM card can be protected by a secondary code feature. 34 General functions P800_UM.book Page 35 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The PIN2 lock cannot be deactivated. The code can be changed by a user who knows the old code. Some SIM cards do not have a PIN2 lock. Device lock The device lock protects your P800 against unauthorized use. If the device lock is set to When SIM changed, it means that normally the P800 is not locked. However, if the SIM is changed, the P800 asks you to enter the code to unlock the P800 before you can use it. Thus, if someone steals your P800 and puts another SIM card into it, they will not be able to use it. To activate the device lock 1. Select 2. Select a lock option. 3. Select Done. Phone > Edit > Preferences > Locks You can choose to have the P800 locked every time you turn it on, locked when the SIM card has been changed, or unlocked. It is also possible to use the device lock in combination with the screen saver. Just mark the checkbox Control panel > Device >

Display > Phone lock protected to have the device lock activated when the screen saver goes on. Preliminary Change code To change a code 1. Select Phone> Edit> Preferences> Locks. 2. Select Change Codes. 3. Select the code you want to change. 4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (To ensure that you have typed the new code correctly you have to enter it twice.) Key lock This option locks the keys on your P800. This is to protect the device if the keys are being accidentally pressed. To activate or change the key lock

Select Phone > Edit > Preferences > Locks. To unlock the keys

Select

. General functions 35 P800_UM.book Page 36 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Phone This chapter describes how to use your P800 as a telephone. Different possibilities are available:

In flip closed mode you can call using the keypad. In flip open mode you can call using the virtual keypad on the screen. In flip closed as well as flip open mode you can make a call from the contact list. In flip open mode you can speed dial any of the 9 speed dial numbers using the Speed Dial view. In flip closed you can press the number representing the speed dial entry on the keypad. In flip closed as well as flip open mode you can call any previously called numbers using the call list.

You can even call by selecting a number included in a text message or listed in an application. Options in flip closed mode The following options, available by pressing available during or after a call:

, are

End call.

Hold call/retrieve call/switch calls.

Add to contacts (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and not found in the contacts database).

Show contact (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and appears in the contacts database).

Transfer sound (to a Bluetooth wireless technology headset).

Turn On/Off tones.

Microphone mute On/Off.

Copy number (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known).

Paste number (displayed if the clipboard contains a number).

Speakerphone On/Off.

Transfer calls. Join calls.

Call list. The following options, available by pressing available in the call list:

, are Incoming calls.

Outgoing calls.

Missed calls.

SIM last dialled. 36 Phone

P800_UM.book Page 37 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM

Zoom in/out.

All calls.

Applications. Note The currently selected filter is not shown in the options list, for example if the call list is currently showing Incoming calls, then this option is not shown in the options list. Call handling To call in flip closed mode, you can use either the keypad or the Jog Dial. To make a call

Enter the telephone number on the keypad and press

. To delete a typed character - press characters - press and hold

. To delete all To make a call using Speed Dial Speed Dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Speed dial numbers on page 44 1. Select the key corresponding to the desired number. 2. Press

. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select 2. Press the Jog Dial inward or press

. Phone Preliminary 3. Scroll with the Jog Dial to select an entry. 4. Press the Jog Dial inward or press

. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select 2. Press the Jog Dial inward or press 3. Scroll with the Jog Dial to select a contact and number. 4. If more telephone numbers are shown, scroll with the Jog

. Dial to select a number. 5. Press the Jog Dial inward or press

. To answer a call The P800 rings when you receive a call. If the calling party is found in contacts, the name of the caller will be displayed. If there is a picture, it will also be shown.

Press to answer the call. To make a new call during a call 1. Make a call or answer a call. 37 P800_UM.book Page 38 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 2. Make a second call, or answer a call. The first call is put on hold. The held call is shown with a grey background.

To switch between the

, then calls, press select Switch calls (could be network dependent). 11:03 John Smith

+4613244500

(w) Ann Jones End active call

(h)

To end the active call and continue with the held call, press and select End active call.

To join the calls to a conference, press calls. See Conference calls on page 42 and select Join To end a call

Press

, or press the Jog Dial. To reject a call

Press

, or press

, and select Reject. To silence the ring signal This does not affect the call. It just silences the ring signal. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call.

Press

, or press

, and select Mute. To make a call using voice control

Say the magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the P800 will connect you. For more information on, see Voice control on page 46. Note This option requires that the number of the calling party is provided with a voice recording. SeeTo record a voice command on page 46 Tip The magic word is not needed if you use a portable handsfree or a Bluetooth wireless technology headset. Press the headset call button and say the name of the person you want to call. Options in flip open mode The following options are available during or after a call:

End call.

Hold call.

Add to contacts (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and not found in the contacts database).

Show contact (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and appears in the contacts database).

Transfer sound (Only when Bluetooth wireless technology headset has audio).

Show cost / Hide cost. 38 Phone P800_UM.book Page 39 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Call handling To make a call in flip open mode, you use the stylus and the virtual keyboard. To make a call

. 1. Select 2. Select

. 3. Call the number with the virtual keyboard and select

. Preliminary 2. Scroll with the Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select a contact. 3. Scroll with the Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select a number. To answer a call The P800 rings when you receive a call. If the calling party is found in contacts, the name of the calling party will be displayed. If there is a picture, it will also be shown. To remove a typed character - select

Select Answer to answer the call. To make a new call during a call 1. While making or answering a call, select Hold call. To make a call using Speed Dial Speed Dial is a fast way to call one of your special speed dial numbers. See Speed dial numbers on page 44 1. Select the speed dial icon 2. Use the Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select an entry. To make a call using the Call list 1. Select the call list icon 2. Scroll with the Jog Dial or tap with the stylus to select an from the button bar. entry. 3. Select the phone icon

. To make a call using the Contact list 1. Select the contacts icon

. Phone 39 P800_UM.book Page 40 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 2. Make a second call, or answer a call. The held call is shown with a grey background.

To switch between the calls, select the call with the grey background and select Switch calls (can be network dependent).

To end the active call and continue with the held call, select End active call.

To join the calls to a conference, select Join calls. See Conference calls on page 42 Phone Edit John Smith

+4613244500

(w) 11:03 Ann Jones

(h) End active call Switch calls Join calls To end a call

Select End call, or press the Jog Dial. To reject a call

Select Send busy. To silence the ring signal This does not affect the call. It just silences the signal. The calling party will not notice that you have silenced the call.

Rotate the Jog Dial and select Mute. To make a call using voice control

Say the magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the P800 will connect you. For more details see To make a call using voice control on page 38. General functions Copying/pasting number A highlighted telephone number may be copied and pasted for exchange with other text fields or in applications.

Copy number - if a number has been entered.

Paste number - if there is a copied number stored on the clipboard. To copy/paste a number (flip open)

Select Telephone > Edit > Copy/Paste number To copy/paste a number (flip closed) 1. Press and select copy number or paste number. 40 Phone P800_UM.book Page 41 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Displaying calls During call setup, a progress window shows the current status. Calling is displayed until a line has been allocated. When the line has been allocated, Connecting is displayed. If an incoming call matches an entry in contacts, the corresponding information will be displayed. If the number is not found in Contacts, only the telephone number will be displayed. At the top of the window, the call timer for the call is displayed. The cost meter is also displayed, if available. Missed calls When a call has been missed, a message is displayed. Preliminary Call log The call log allows you to check the P800's data on calls made, received, rejected, or missed. The log keeps track of date, time, length, and cost information (if available) of each call. The List view of the call log shows the calls in order with the most recent call at the top. In flip open:

1. Select 2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it. from the button bar. In flip closed:

1. Press 2. Select Call list or Missed calls, depending on what you are and select Calls.

Select View to display information on the missed call. looking for. Network indication The area at the top of the screen contains network indication (in standby view in flip closed), which can be:

Network/service provider name.

No network.

Emergency calls only.

Searching. Tip In flip closed mode you may press last number used in the P800. twice to call the Advice of Charge (AoC) Advice of charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls and to stop the device from making chargeable calls when a certain credit limit has been exceeded. This option is only available if Advice of Charge is supported by the SIM subscription. Phone 41 P800_UM.book Page 42 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary If the credit is limited, a warning Low credit is displayed, when there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. When the credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing, chargeable calls are stopped. Auto retrying If a call attempt is not successfully connected, the P800 can be set to automatically retry the call after a while. When retry has been initiated, the P800 will continue to retry a number of times or until you invoke any other action. While the time between retry attempts is elapsing, the dialogue Retrying is shown. When a retry is successful, the P800 alerts you with a single ring signal. Remote party notifications When a remote party carries out certain operations, the P800 may notify you of the operation. An alarm is sounded and one of these messages is shown.

Call held by other party.

Call retrieved by other party.

Call transferred by other party.

Calls joined by other party.

Call is waiting at other party. 42 Ending a call when another call is on hold When the active call is ended, you are asked to retrieve the held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds, the held call will also be ended. Receiving a call when another call is on hold If someone calls when a call is on hold, you will be asked if you want to release the held call and answer the incoming call. Conference calls A conference call can be started when you have an active call and a held call. The conference call view is automatically displayed whenever a member has been added to the conference. The conference call view is displayed when selecting the Show parties button, from the standard call control view. You return to the standard call control view by pressing the Hide parties button. Phone Edit 11:03 1 2 3 John Smith Tom Clark Ann Jones

(w)

(w)

(h) End conference Hold conference Hide parties Phone P800_UM.book Page 43 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM If an incoming call is answered during a conference call, the conference call will be put on hold. To start a conference call

Select the Join calls button, or select Phone > Join calls from the menu. To extract a party

Tap the required party and choose Extract from the pop up menu. This causes the conference call to be put on hold, the selected party is then removed from the conference and becomes the active call. To release a party

Tap the required party and choose Release from the pop up menu. This ends the call to the selected party. Note If you have set up the conference, you still have to pay for the total time. Emergency calls If you initiate a call to a number which is identified as an emergency number, Emergency call will be shown. Preliminary An emergency call can be made without PIN or PUK codes. You can end the call using the menu key. Note Emergency calls are not confined to the network of your operator; they can be made as long as you have coverage from any GSM network. Hints and smart functions Speakerphone If you open the flip during a call, the speaker phone function is activated and the volume will increase. This lets you continue the conversation while using other functions of the P800. Silent mode Press and hold phone in silent mode. Press in standby view, flip closed, to put the again to turn off silent mode. Note When silent mode is on, this will also silence personal handsfree. Voice mail In flip closed, you can call the voice mail number if you press and hold

. Phone 43 P800_UM.book Page 44 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Special characters The P800 provides different ways of sending tones during a call:

Press and hold to insert a pause (represented by the

Pressing keypad keys during an active call, like on most character p) in a DTMF (Dual Tone Multi Frequency) sequence.

Press and hold to insert the international call prefix +. Change phone volume During a call you can use the Jog Dial to change the phone volume. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing.

During an active call, pressing and holding mutes the microphone. Pressing reactivates the microphone.

When entering text in flip closed mode, pressing the last entered letter. Pressing and holding text in the active field. erases deletes all

When in stand by mode, pressing and holding puts the phone in silent mode. Banking services You can use your telephone banking services or other tone based services. landline phones. Including tone digits already in the call set up. After the phone number, but before the digits, press and hold to insert a p. Then insert your digits. Finally send away the call by pressing

Program digit sequences into your Contact card for the bank. Each digit sequence to be sent as tones must begin with a p. Once your call to the bank has been established and you want to send your pre-programmed digit sequences, choose Show contact on the menu to get to the Contact card with the tone sequences. Warning! Never program any personal codes into your P800. Set-up Speed dial numbers from the button bar. To set a speed dial number 1. Select 2. Select an empty position. 3. Select the desired contact. 4. Select Done. 44 Phone

P800_UM.book Page 45 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To remove a speed dial number 1. Select

, on the status bar. 2. Select Edit > Remove speed dial. 3. Select the contact to remove. 4. Select Done. Flight mode Turns off the radio function so it does not disturb sensitive equipment, for instance in an aeroplane or in a hospital. Note The phone and other communication functions must never be used in an aircraft unless otherwise instructed by the aircraft personnel. If the use of equipment without a radio transmitter is permitted you can turn on the flight mode on the product. Doing so turns off the radio function. When the flight mode option is set, you have the possibility to start the P800 in normal or flight mode each time the power is turned on. To use the power menu This menu is activated when pressing the On/Off button if the menu has been activated. See Flight mode on page 47 on how to activate the menu.

Select the Phone on alternative to start the P800 in the normal way. Phone Preliminary

Select the Flight mode alternative to start the P800 in flight mode.

Select the Power off alternative to turn the P800 off. To set flight mode on without restarting the P800 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences. 2. Select Fight mode. 3. Select Flight mode now > Done To set flight mode off 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences. 2. Select Flight mode. 3. Select Phone on now > Done. Preferences In this menu you may change the settings for a number of telephony options. To set the telephony preferences 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the item to setup. 45 P800_UM.book Page 46 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Incoming call alert This option lets you choose individual ring melodies for voice and data calls. You may use any sound recording or audio file. You may also set individual volume levels for Handheld, Handsfree and Car, or let the P800 vibrate. You may personalize the ring melodies further for individual contacts, see Contacts. 1. Use the stylus to point and drag the bar lever to the preferred sound level. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. 2. Select the list view and highlight the signal of your choice. 3. Select Done to activate the changes. Incoming call picture

Select the option to automatically show the picture saved in contacts at incoming calls. Voice control The voice control option lets you handle calls using your voice. Say a magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the P800 will try to call the person. The magic word is used to ensure that the P800 will not call somebody whose name has just been mentioned by chance. To enter settings for voice commands

Select Phone > Edit > Preferences > Voice control. In this menu you can:

Turn Voice dialing on/off Set when to use the Magic word (Handheld, Handsfree or Car). Turn Voice answer on/off Select if the P800 should Play caller name at incoming calls. Record voice commands for Magic word, Answer and Busy. To record a voice command 1. Select one of the options, Magic word, Answer, or Busy and select Record. 2. Say the magic word after the tone Be sure to use a word that you can remember. For example Calling. 3. Select Play if you want listen to your recording. 4. Select the voice message options for each P800 profile. 5. Select Done to exit. To record voice tags for individual contacts, see Contacts. 46 Phone P800_UM.book Page 47 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Flight mode Here you select if you want to turn the flight mode on or off and also if you want the Power menu activated. To access flight mode settings

Select Phone > Edit > Preferences > Flight mode. To turn on the Power menu 1. Select Phone > Edit > Preferences > Flight mode 2. Select the Prompt me... check box and tap Done. Locks Locks contains options for:

Activating the lock on the device, the SIM card or the keys on the keypad.

Changing the lock codes. The device lock option appears when powering on the P800. Key lock blocks your keys from being pressed by mistake, for instance when the P800 is in your pocket. The SIM card lock demands your code when the phone is turned on or when a new SIM card is installed. Note For more information see P800 locks on page 33. Preliminary Add to contacts This option enables the function for adding called and calling parties to Contacts. After a call has ended, if the telephone number is not already stored in the Contacts, you are asked if you would like to add it. Handsfree Handsfree lets you choose how to answer the P800 when it is used with a handsfree kit connected. You may also select preferred Bluetooth wireless technology device from this menu. To set handsfree options 1 ring means that the P800 answer automatically after one signal. Any key means that the you answer by pressing any key. Note Using 1 ring as the automatic answering mode may violate your privacy (for instance passengers in your car can hear who is calling if the phone is used with a car kit). To set Bluetooth wireless technology options

Select the preferred sound device; Phone or Headset. Forward calls Forward calls lets you choose how to forward incoming calls to another number, on:

Phone 47

P800_UM.book Page 48 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary

Busy

Not reachable

No reply

All calls

Data calls

Fax calls To forward calls 1. Enter the telephone number you want to forward to. 2. Select Done. Tip Normally the data/fax options should not be changed. Accepted callers Accepted callers allows you to set up a filter for incoming calls. All calls except from persons on your list of Accepted callers will be rejected. To add an accepted caller 1. Select Add new. 2. Select Lookup and chose a contact, or write the name and number of the contact. 3. Select Done. Call waiting This option sets the call waiting option on or off. Restrict calls You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your P800. You may for example protect it from being used for long distance calls. To restrict incoming calls 1. Select the Incoming calls tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All incoming calls. Incoming calls when roaming. To restrict outgoing calls 1. Select the Outgoing calls tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All outgoing calls. Outgoing international calls. Outgoing international calls except to home PLMN. To change the password 1. Select Change password. 2. Enter the old code. 3. Enter the new code. 4. Confirm the new code. 48 Phone Preliminary Unlimited there is no credit limit. Not all networks provide charging information to the phone during a call. If your network provides this service and your subscription is for AoC Charging, you cannot make or receive any chargeable calls if you are roaming in a network that does not provide charging information. This restriction does not apply when your subscription is for AoC Information. You cannot change the type of subscription from your phone settings. Please consult your operator for more details. P800_UM.book Page 49 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Voice mail For easy voice mail access, enter the number to the voice mail of your operator. GSM Networks This option lets you choose what net to use when you are outside your operators area. Choose if you want to search for a new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of preferred networks. Note Your operator may not allow you to access all available networks, depending on your operators policy. Calling cards This option is used to handle calling cards. AoC - Call meter settings This option is only available if Advice of Charge (AoC) is supported by the SIM subscription. PIN2 is required for storing any changes you make to the Call meter settings. Limited the limit is preset by the user. When the credit is set to limited, chargeable calls should only be made if the credit is larger than 0. The option is, however, useful if you want to restrict the call cost for yourself or another person that uses the P800. Phone 49

P800_UM.book Page 50 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Contacts Contacts is like an address book, in which you can store names, phone numbers, e-mail addresses and other useful information. The information stored in the SIM phone book is also accessible. SIM phone book entries can be imported to Contacts and Contacts entries can be exported to the SIM phone book. Flip closed mode With the flip closed, you can place calls and send text or multimedia messages. Contacts has two views in flip closed mode:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Menus In both views, you can use contact functions. to access some of the P800s Menu options in list view Description Zoom the screen in or out. Option Zoom in/out SIM phone book Display the contacts of the SIM card. Send owner card Send your owner card via IR or Bluetooth wireless Find Undo delete Applications technology. Search for a specific contact. Restore the last deleted contact. Return to the application launcher. 50 Contacts P800_UM.book Page 51 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Menu options in SIM phone book Option Zoom in/out View all Information numbers Description Zoom the screen in or out. Switch to Contacts list. Display the Information numbers on the SIM card. This option is only displayed if there are Information numbers stored on the SIM card. Service numbers Display the Service numbers on the SIM card.This option is only displayed if there are Service numbers stored on the SIM card. Return to the application launcher. Applications Menu options in detail view Option Call Send SMS Send MMS Send as Delete contact Applications Description Call the active contact. Send a text message to the active contact. Send a multimedia message to the active contact. Send the active contact via text message, IR or Bluetooth wireless technology. Delete the active contact. Start other applications. Preliminary Making a call with the flip closed To select a contact 1. Select 2. To place a call to a contact in the SIM phone book, select SIM

. phone book from the options menu. If there are information numbers or service numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them. 3. Scroll down to the desired contact or select Find from the menu and search for the contact. To use the quick index 1. Press and hold a number key. The first contact, corresponding to the first letter of the key, appears. 2. To search further, continue to enter the letters with the keys. To make a call 1. Select a phone number. 2. Press the Jog Dial inward or press

. or 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Call from the options menu. Contacts 51 P800_UM.book Page 52 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To send a text message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send SMS from the options menu. To send a multimedia message 1. Select an e-mail address. 2. Select Send MMS from the options menu. To add a contact You can create a new contact using information from a recently received voice call or message. 1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts. 2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required.

To access the full edit view, open the flip. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Delete contact from the options menu.

To restore a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the options menu. Contacts has three views in flip open mode:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Edit view Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you to add and change the information. Tabs at the bottom of the list view provide a fast way to locate information. To highlight the first entry that begins with the first letter on a tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins with the next letter on the tab, select the tab again. abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z Menus In all views there is a menu bar from which you can access some of the contact functions. Flip open mode Open the flip and tap launcher to open Contacts. or select Contacts in the Application 52 Contacts P800_UM.book Page 53 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Menu options in list view Option Menus Contacts New Find Description Create a new contact. Search contacts containing a specific text. Send owner card Send your business card via Bluetooth Preliminary Menu options in SIM phone book list view Menus Contacts New Option Description Create a new contact. Display the information numbers on the SIM card. Information numbers Service numbers Display the service numbers on the wireless technology, e-mail, text message, IR or multimedia message. View your personal business card. Restore the last deleted contact. Paste a received or copied contact into Contacts. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if telephone numbers should be displayed in the list. Open the help application. Show all contacts in the list. Show the contacts that are not in a folder. Categorize your contacts in folders. View owner card Undo delete Paste contact Zoom Preferences Help All Unfiled Edit folders Own numbers Edit Paste contact SIM card. Display speech, fax and data numbers on the SIM card. Paste a received or copied contact into Contacts. Copy to contacts Copy the shown SIM card entry into Copy all to contacts Sort by SIM position Zoom Preferences Help Contacts. Copy all SIM card entries into Contacts. Sort the list according to SIM position. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if telephone numbers should be displayed in the list. Open the help application. 53 Edit Folders Contacts P800_UM.book Page 54 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Menu options in detail view and edit view Description Create a new contact. Search contacts containing a specific text. Send a contact via Bluetooth wireless technology, e-mail, text message, IR or multimedia message. Set the active contact as your owner card. Delete the active contact. Change the details of the active contact. Copy the active contact entry. Cut out the marked text. Copy the marked text. Paste the copied text into the selected field. Add an extra field to the active contact. Specify the phone number to be displayed next to the contact in the list view. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Option Menus Contacts New Find Send as Set as owner card Delete contact Edit contact Copy contact Cut Copy Paste Add field (in Edit view only) Show in list Zoom Edit 54 Menus Option Preferences Description Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if the telephone number should be displayed in the list. Export to SIM Export the contact to SIM. Folders Help Unfiled Edit folders Open the help application Show the contacts that are not in a folder. Categorize your contacts in folders (for eample business, personal and so on.) Personal details The first time you use your P800 you are advised to enter your personal details. You create an electronic business card, containing your contact details, including notes and a photo. You can attach this card to e-mails, or beam it to another device. To create your owner card 1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details. 2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card. Making a call with the flip open To open Contacts

Tap or select Contacts in the Application launcher

. Contacts P800_UM.book Page 55 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To search for an entry containing specific text 1. Select Contacts > Find. 2. Enter the text string you wish to search for. 3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and tap Find. 4. When search is completed, all results are displayed. Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to enter an entire word to locate a matching entry. To make a call 1. If required, change category from the Folders menu. 2. Scroll down to the desired contact. If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the at the bottom of the view. 3. Select the contact to display the information. 4. Depending on what you want to do, select according to the following:

Tap Select Select Select Select or or the phone number to place a call. or the e-mail address to send an e-mail. or URL to open a web page. to send a multimedia message. to send a text message. Preliminary Managing contacts You can sort the contacts according to first name, last name or company. The contact entries can also be filtered by category, such as business or personal. To create a new contact 1. Select Contacts > New. 2. Enter the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To add a voice dialling command Voice dialling commands can be added when you create or change a contact. at the bottom of the screen. 1. Select 2. Select a number. 3. Select the Record button. 4. Record a new voice command after the tone.

To play a recorded voice command, select the Play button.

To remove a voice command, select the Del button. To add a note to a contact 1. Select 2. Enter the text. Contacts 55 P800_UM.book Page 56 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send, beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private check box. To add a photo or other picture to a contact 1. Select the photo view tab 2. Select the picture space. 3. If required, change folder. 4. Select the picture to use. 5. Select the Select button.

To change a picture, select the old picture and select Replace image.

To remove a picture, select the old picture and select Delete image. To change the details of a contact 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select from the drop-down menus. To add a field to a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Add field. 56 4. Select the field to be added from the drop-down list. 5. Select Add. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Contacts > Delete contact. Managing the SIM phone book You manage the SIM phone book the same way as the Contacts. You may also sort the SIM phone book according to SIM position. You can also copy information between the P800 and the SIM card. To import contacts from SIM 1. Select SIM phone book in the folders menu to the right in the menu bar. 2. Select Edit > Copy all to Contacts for importing all SIM entries or Tap a SIM entry to open it and select Edit > Copy to Contacts for importing the selected SIM entry. To export contacts to SIM 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Export to SIM. 3. If the contact has multiple telephone numbers, select the number to export. Contacts P800_UM.book Page 57 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM 4. Select Done. Sending a contact You can send contact details to others: by text message, multimedia message, infrared, or Bluetooth wireless technology. To send contact details 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Contacts > Send as. 3. Select the message type. 4. Select Done. To send your own contact details 1. In list view, select Contacts > Send owner card. 2. Select the message type. 3. Select Done. Settings To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or company) and click Done. Preliminary 3. If you want a telephone number to be shown next to the name in list view, select Show preferred phone number. If no number is selected, the first telephone number will be used. 4. Select Done. To change the preferred phone number 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Show in list. 4. Select the number to be shown from the list. 5. Click Done. Note If no numbers appears, ensure that Show preferred phone number is checked in preferences. Phone book manager On the CD, there is an application called Phone book manager. This application is used to manage the SIM card information from a PC. To use the Phone book manager 1. Connect the P800 to the PC. See Connecting to other devices on page 150 for more information. 2. Start the Phone book manager on the PC. Contacts 57 P800_UM.book Page 58 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 3. For instructions on the Phone book manager, refer to the application help information. 58 Contacts P800_UM.book Page 59 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Messages With types of messages:

Messages you can create, send, and receive different E-mail messages. Your P800s mail client supports POP3 and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and SMTP for sending mail. SMS (Short Message Service) messages are text messages sent and received via the network operator's message centre. EMS (Enhanced Message Service) messages also allow pictures, sounds, melodies and animations to be inserted. MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages. A multimedia message can contain text, graphics, animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring melodies. You also use Messages to receive:

Area Information messages.These are text messages broadcast to all subscribers in a network area for example local road reports or local taxi phone numbers (Area Information services are not available from all operators).

BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are different types of BIO messages:

Setup (e-mail, Internet, WAP accounts) E-mail notifications. Preliminary Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard) and calendar information (vCal).

Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air configuration).

Beamed messages. These are files received via Infrared or Bluetooth. The different types of messages, e-mail, text messages, and multimedia messages are handled by separate messaging accounts. Select accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts on your P800. Control panel > Connections > Messaging You can have any number of e-mail accounts - a typical configuration will be one business and one personal account. When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized e-mails is automatically created on your P800. Accounts are automatically created for storing received:

Text messages

Multimedia messages

Area information messages

Auto setup messages

Beamed messages Messages 59 P800_UM.book Page 60 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Before using Messages Before you can send and receive any messages you need to set up the necessary accounts.See Getting started with Internet and Messages on page 159 Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet or e-mail account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P800. Folders in Messages There are four folders for each messaging account: Inbox, Outbox, Draft and Sent. Inbox Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward, and delete messages, but not edit them. Received auto configuration messages are stored in the Auto setup account Inbox. Outbox Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. Saving a message to Outbox is useful if you have several to send: you reduce connection time by sending them all at the same time. To save an e-mail message to Outbox 1. After composing your message, select Send. 2. Select Save to Outbox. You cannot save text messages to Outbox unless the phone fails to connect. Messages that you send from an e-mail synchronization account are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your next synchronization. Draft Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent. To store a new message in Draft

Create the message and exit without selecting Send. To move a message from Outbox to Draft

Open the Outbox message list and select Message > Move to Draft. Sent Sent contains messages you have sent from your P800. Tip To avoid running out of storage space on your P800, make it a habit to clear out unneeded messages from your Sent folder. 60 Messages Preliminary Text messages can be sent to one person, or to a group of recipients that you have saved in Contacts. To write and send a text message 1. In Messages select Create SMS. (You can also select SMS >

Message > New. 2. Enter the recipients number or select To and select recipient or recipients from your contact list and select Done. 3. Write your message and select Send. To add EMS features to your text message 1. Select Edit > Insert Object. 2. Select the type of media you wish to import and select Done 3. Select the item you want to insert and tap Select. P800_UM.book Page 61 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The accounts in Messages When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears. The top item in the list, Create SMS, is a shortcut for directly creating a new text message An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox. Messages Edit Accounts Unread Out Create SMS SMS MMS Personal e-mail Area Info Auto setup Beamed 2 3 3 1 1 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 How to use Messages Text messages including EMS features SMS text message is a short message that you can send and receive on a mobile telephone. It can contain up to 160 characters. If you create a longer message it will be sent as two

(or more) separate messages, but received (if the receiving telephone supports this) as one message. If you add pictures, animations, melodies and sounds to your message it becomes an EMS (Enhanced Message Service) message. Messages 61 P800_UM.book Page 62 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Here you can see an example of an text message with inserted EMS features. Messages Edit Inbox To:

+46 13 244500 Size: 29 Hello Tom I'll see you at... Send Multimedia messages A MMS (Multi Media Service) messages can include real pictures, animations and sound, organized like a slide presentation with time-based control of the playback. Composing a multimedia message is like building a small slide presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text and sound. 2. From the Select template dialog, tap on the name of the template you want and tap Select. The Blank template will open a blank message. 3. The first page of the new message is now displayed. To add a picture, text, audio, voice or scribble select To insert an item 1. Select 2. Select the type of item you want to insert from the list. Message Edit Draft 1/1 2 Add image Add scribble Add text Add audio Add voice Send A picture taken with the integrated CommuniCam can be quickly and conveniently be sent via multimedia message using the Send as command from the viewer. Multimedia messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an e-mail account. To create a new multimedia message 1. Select your multimedia message account and then select Message > New or open an existing message and select Message > New. 62 Messages P800_UM.book Page 63 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Here you can see the first page with an inserted picture. To delete, replace or edit an inserted item

Select the inserted item and choose an action. Message Edit Draft 1/1 5 Add text above New image Edit image Edit time Delete Copy Send Preliminary To add a new page to your multimedia message

Select

.You now have a completely new page to insert items onto. To edit an inserted picture 1. Select the picture so that it is highlighted. 2. Select Edit image. While editing your picture you can add scribble, resize, crop or rotate your picture. To undo your changes, select Edit > Undo all. Note If you have accepted changes by selecting Done, you will not be able to undo them. Message Edit Draft 2/2 5 Add text Add audio Add voice Send To insert an attachment 1. While creating your multimedia message, select the tab with the attachment icon, Select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 3. Select the attachment. Messages 63 P800_UM.book Page 64 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To play a received multimedia message

The first time a MMS is opened it plays automatically. The next time you open the MMS you can play it by pressing the Play Button (flip open) or choosing Play from the menu (flip closed) To set the download method for receiving multimedia messages, manual or automatic 1. In Control panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

MMS > Download method. Manual means that only headers will be downloaded and can be viewed. The full message will be downloaded to your P800 when you select Receive. Automatic means that the MMS is downloaded and can be read like any other message. There is no intermediate step. E-mail Writing e-mails To write a new e-mail

Select an e-mail account and select Message > New or open an existing e-mail and select Message > New. If you leave the message before sending it, it will automatically be stored in the Draft folder (unless it was created from Outbox). To mark an e-mail as urgent

On the address tab, select High in the Priority list. Tip If you are creating several e-mails, you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and send them all at the same time. To save an e-mail to Outbox 1. Select Send. 2. Select Save to Outbox > Done. To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an e-mail 1. Select To:

2. In the Find contact dialogue select the check box for each entry you want to send the e-mail to. 3. Select Done. Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using Contacts) in a text message or e-mail: enter a comma between each address. Sending e-mail To send an e-mail message

Select Send > Send immediately. 64 Messages P800_UM.book Page 65 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Note If your P800 is connected to the Internet when you send an e-mail, it will be sent immediately and your P800 will remain connected to the Internet when it is finished. If not, your P800 will connect to the Internet, send the e-mail and then disconnect. To save an e-mail message and send it later

Select Send > Save to Outbox. To move an e-mail message from Outbox to Draft In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the e-mail

(a tick appears), and select Message > Move to draft. Sending attachments To attach an entry to an e-mail message 1. On the attachment tab, select Add. 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 3. Select the item. You can attach entries to e-mails directly from the following Jotter, applications:

and Voice and Contacts, Calendar, Pictures. Tasks, To attach a Calendar entry to an e-mail message 1. Open the entry in Calendar and select Calendar > Send As. 2. Select e-mail > Done. 3. Create the e-mail and select Send. Preliminary To attach a Contact to an e-mail message 1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and select Contacts > Send as. 2. Select e-mail > Done. 3. Create the e-mail and select Send. Note When you forward an e-mail, you can choose whether or not you wish to forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of an e-mail and consequently the connection time needed to send it. Receiving attachments Any attachments to an e-mail message are displayed on the tab. The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the type of attachment. To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of file.Your P800 comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files. Many more are available from the Multimedia for P800 CD. Downloading You can choose not to download large e-mails and receive just a header instead. A header contains the subject line, senders details, and date, but not the full message. Messages 65

P800_UM.book Page 66 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To specify a size limit for e-mail, above which you only receive a header 1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts > E-

mail

(select the e-mail account) > Edit. 2. Select Inbox. 3. Select an option from the Download list. In your list of messages, headers are denoted by

. To download the full message In your list of messages: Select the header. To download a series of messages 1. In your list of messages: select the check box to the left of each entry (a tick appears). 2. Select Get & Send. Note If you delete a header the message will no longer be visible in your message list, but the actual message will not be deleted until your P800 has connected to the mail server. Downloading e-mails automatically You can schedule your e-mail messages to be downloaded automatically at certain times. To download your e-mails automatically 1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts > E-

mail. 66 2. Select the required e-mail account and select Edit 3. Select Inbox > Schedule. 4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and select Done. Synchronized e-mails When you set up a synchronization with your PC, an account for synchronized e-mail messages is automatically created on you P800 and indicated by for synchronized e-mails. You can have more than one account If you set up an account to call in for messages that you also receive using e-mail synchronisation, the two accounts will contain the same messages. Note that there is no connection between the accounts; the copies in each account are separate. Disconnecting and connecting If your P800 is already connected to the Internet when you send an e-mail, it will remain connected after sending it. If your P800 is not connected before sending an e-mail, it will connect and send the message and then disconnect. Note You can send text messages while connected to the Internet. If your connection is CSD or HSCSD it must be disconnected before you can make or receive a phone call. If your connection is GPRS, it may be suspended to enable a phone call to be made or received. You may need to repeat the data activity (web page fetch, get e-mail) after the call has ended. Messages

P800_UM.book Page 67 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM If your P800 cannot connect to the e-mail account, automatic download will fail, and account. Check, if downloads are scheduled to occur from the same location each time, that the reception in that location is good enough. will be displayed next to the e-mail A scheduled download will fail if your P800 is engaged in a voice call. It may fail if it is connected to another ISP that is, through a different Internet account than specified for the e-mail account. If e-mail messages are not downloaded because a scheduled download fails, they will be downloaded during the next successful connection. You can select an e-mail account that uses Dial-Up rather than a GPRS account but automatic download will fail if your P800 is not connected to the Internet when downloads are scheduled. Area information Area information messages are text messages that are sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic report. When you receive an area information message, the message automatically appears on the screen. When you dismiss the information, it will be stored in the Area Info Inbox until it is written over by a new message received on the same channel. Please consult your service provider for more information about availability of area information services and area information channel numbering. Preliminary To add an area information channel 1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

CBS. 2. Check the Area information check box. 3. Select New. 4. Enter the desired Channel number and check the Subscription active check box. 5. Select Done. To remove an area information channel 1. In Control Panel, select Connections > Messaging accounts >

CBS. 2. Select the channel to be deleted. 3. Select Delete and confirm the removal by selecting Yes in the subsequent dialog. Any messages belonging to that channel will also be deleted. Get and send To get and send messages for one specific account 1. Select 2. Select the desired account (text message, multimedia Messages. message or e-mail for example). 3. Select Get&send. Messages 67 P800_UM.book Page 68 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To get and send messages for all your accounts 1. Select 2. Select Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your Messages. Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet downloaded will be downloaded to your P800. Connecting and disconnecting from the Internet To disconnect from the Internet 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD or GPRS

) in the status bar. 2. The dialog Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 3. Select Yes. Finding messages In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches through the subject lines, senders details and dates. In an open message, Find searches through the text of the message and highlights the text it finds. You can only search through e-mail messages that have that have been fully downloaded. Saving contact details When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of the person who sent you the message. To save the senders details In the message select From. Note If you save an address from an e-mail synchronized from your company PC, the corporate version of the address rather than the full Internet e-mail address, will be saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not an Internet address

(an X.400 address, or just the sender's name, for example), you can use it to send e-mails from your synchronized account, but you cannot use it in e-mails that you send directly from your P800. If your service provider or network is unavailable Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your P800 cannot connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account and Internet Account information in the Control Panel is correct. If you have both GPRS and Dial-Up Internet accounts, try sending the e-mail message using an account of the other type. This works when only the GPRS or the GSM network is available (but not both), because the two account types use different networks. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network. 68 Messages

P800_UM.book Page 69 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM If your e-mail service provider is unavailable and you have access to another account, you can copy and paste the text from the unsent e-mail in Outbox into a new one created with the other account and send it. You can cancel sending an e-mail. The message will remain in Outbox and you can send it later. Preliminary Messages 69 P800_UM.book Page 70 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Internet You use the browser to:

To start the browser

Connect to the Internet to view and access Web and WAP

Start the browser by:

pages.

View HTML and WML e-mail attachments.

Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service provider.

Download Java applications, images and audio. The browser can open web pages that do not use Java script or frames. You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access them easily. You can also save pages in the P800 for off-line viewing. The browser uses folders for categorizing the information. The folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents, and Push messages. Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the Control panel as well. pressing the browser button (the home page is shown). selecting in the application picker (the start page is shown). selecting in the application launcher

(the start page is shown). selecting a URL in another application. Note If required, you have to enter your ID and password to log in to your Internet account. The application has two views:

Browser view Bookmarks view The base view of the application, where you can view Web and WAP pages. A list view where you can save shortcuts:

to Web and WAP sites on the Internet to locally stored pages to documents digitally signed by you. 70 Internet

Preliminary E Select to see the bookmarks view. F Select to close or get information about the connection. G Select to go to the home page. H Select to stop loading the page. J A secure connection is established. K Progress bar, shows the loading progress. P800_UM.book Page 71 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Browser view Screen Internet Edit P800 WEB/WAP P800 WEB/WAP Internet Browser Internet Browser Edit 0:03 K J H G A B C D E F A Internet menu. B Edit menu. C Select to change to the next page. D Select to change to the previous page. Internet 71 P800_UM.book Page 72 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Menus Menus Internet Option Open page Add to bookmarks Save page Send as Find Find next Description Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. Enter the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Enter the name of the page and select the folder to save it in. Send the current URL via text message, IR or Bluetooth wireless technology. Enter a text and search for the text in the page. Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Reload the page. Reload page Load all images Load all images of the page. Show the page information. Page information Cut Cut out the marked information from an input field. Copy the marked information. Copy all information on the page. Paste the copied text into the selected field. Set zoom level. Copy Copy all Paste Zoom Edit 72 Menus Option Preferences Help Description Set the preferences of the browser. Open the help application. Context sensitive menus The context sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus pressed on a link or a picture. Link/picture Option Text link and picture link Open link Description Open the active link. Link information Add to bookmarks Save image Show information on the link. Add the active link URL to the bookmark list. Save the picture in the P800. Loaded picture

(with or without link) View image Copy image Send image as Not loaded picture (with or without link) Load image View the picture adopted to the screen (enlarged or reduced). Copy the picture to the clipboard. Send the picture as text message, IR or Bluetooth wireless technology. Load the picture. Internet P800_UM.book Page 73 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Link/picture Option Voice call link Call New SMS New MMS New contact Mailto link New e-mail New MMS New contact Description Place a call according to the link. Send an SMS according to the link. Send an MMS message according to the link. Create a contact with the link information. Send an e-mail according to the link. Place an MMS message according to the link. Create a contact with the link information. Icons within a page Picture not loaded (can be loaded manually). Damaged picture (not possible to load). To open a specific web page 1. Select Internet > Open page. 2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from the drop-down list. 3. Select Open. Note If images are not loaded, select the picture icons or select Internet > Load all images. Preliminary To navigate through recently opened pages 1. Select 2. Select to move back to previously viewed pages. to move forward. To save a page for off-line browsing 1. Select Internet > Save page. 2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To create a bookmark to the open page 1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks. 2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To download and upload files

When you select a link to a downloadable file, information on the file is displayed. Select Yes to start the download.

When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for submitting the file is displayed. Select the file and select Yes to start the upload. Internet 73 User authentication request Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the possibility either to select a certificate and confirm the user authentication, to select to continue anonymous or to cancel the connection. If Always connect anonymous has been set, the browser will instead automatically try to connect anonymous. P800_UM.book Page 74 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To view information on the open page 1. Select Internet > Page information. 2. Select the Content tab to view the page information. 3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the connection. 4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:

Server User To disconnect the connection 1. Select the connection icon (HSCSD/CSD or GPRS

) in the status bar. 2. Select Disconnect. 3. Select Yes. WIM Access When the Browser requires access to the WIM card, for example when establishing a secure connection, you have to enter the correct PIN. Signing documents You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation is going to be performed. 74 Internet P800_UM.book Page 75 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Bookmark view Screen Preliminary F Select to see the browser view. G Folder menu. H Select to go to the home page. B A C D E F Internet Edit All Ericsson Mobile Organiser LinneaTest SonyEricsson SvD Meny TV4 Yahoo 711 time table CSS fonts G H A Internet menu. B Edit menu. C Select an icon to view information on the bookmark. D Checked bookmarks can be deleted from the Internet menu. E Select the bookmark text to view the page. Internet 75 P800_UM.book Page 76 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Menus Menus Internet Option Open page New bookmark View Folders Edit Delete Zoom Preferences Help All Bookmarks Description Enter the URL, or select from the drop-down list. Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Edit the selected bookmark. Remove the selected bookmark. Set zoom level. Set the preferences of the browser. Open the help application. Show all contacts in the list. Show all bookmarks. Saved pages Show all saved pages. Unfiled Edit folders Show the bookmarks that are not in a folder. Categorize your contacts in folders

(business, personal and so on). Icons Bookmark Saved page Push message from the WAP service provider Signed document To open a bookmark

Select the bookmark text. The bookmarked item is opened. To view bookmark information

Select the bookmark icon. Information on the bookmark is shown. From the information screen you can:

Edit the bookmark. Delete the bookmark. Send the bookmark as e-mail, SMS message, Bluetooth wireless technology, IR, or MMS message. To delete several bookmarks 1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete. 2. Select Internet > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. 76 Internet P800_UM.book Page 77 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM WAP and OTA provisioning messages WAP Provisioning and OTA messages are received by the browser application and stored within the messaging store. These messages are then accessed and managed by Auto setup account in Messages. When you select a provisioning or OTA message, dialogues are shown to aid the provisioning process. Settings You must set up the account for the application to work. Refer to the Control Panel section for more information. The browser is initially set up to work. However, you can change these settings, if required. The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask your Internet service provider to send you an auto setup message containing the required setup information. The accounts will then be set up automatically on your P800. To guarantee the integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. Refer to the Control panel section for more information. Note Proxy settings for MMS message and for a WAP gateway should be set in the WAP account. Other proxy settings should be set in the Internet account. Preliminary To set up the browser 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Perform the setup according to the following:

Basic settings Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser is started from the application picker; either a page in the P800 or a page on the Internet. Select the WAP account to be used when the home page is loaded. The accounts are set up in the control panel. Select if images should be loaded. If images are not loaded, the page will be loaded faster. Non-loaded images can be loaded manually when viewing the page. Select if sounds should be played when the page is opened. Select if animations should be played when the page is opened. Security settings Select if you want to save signed documents. Select if you want to connect without giving away your identity. Select if you want to connect using the WIM card. Select if you want to allow cookies. Advanced settings Internet 77 P800_UM.book Page 78 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Select if you want to be able to receive messages from your WAP service provider. Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP Push messages. Select if you want to remove out-of-date messages automatically. Set the size of memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages will load faster when you visit them again. Select Clear memory to empty the list of pages visited. Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory. 78 Internet P800_UM.book Page 79 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Calendar The Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries. There are three types of entries in the calendar:

Appointments - An entry with start and end time (for example, a meeting).

Reminders - An entry that does not need a specified time (for example, a birthday). However, you can specify a time if you, for example, want to set an alarm. A reminder is denoted by a

All day events - An entry with start and end dates but no specific times. An appointment can overlap an All Day Event. Different views You can see your Calendar entries in three views with the flip open: Day, Week and Month. To change view

Select

Select

Select to display the Day view. to display the Week view. to display the Month view. The icon places itself over the selected view. Preliminary With the flip closed you will see the Day view. Using the calendar To create a new calendar entry 1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the entry. This is the description you see in the calendar. 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the entry in. 3. Continue to enter information to the items on the detail page. Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or all day event. Date - Select the date to get a calendar where you can set a date for the entry. Time - Set start and end time for the entry. Location - Specify a location or select a location you have used before. Alarm - Select the check box if you want your telephone to alert you about the entry with a sound. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not. Read more about this below. Calendar 79 P800_UM.book Page 80 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Private - Select the check box to prevent the task from being viewed by others than yourself if you synchronize your calendar with, for example, your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note to this entry. 5. Select to save and close the entry. You should delete old entries regularly to release memory in the P800. To repeat re-occurring entries 1. When the entry is open, select Repeat. Set repeating to Daily, Weekly, Monthly by date, Monthly by day, Yearly by day or Yearly by date. Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the event will go off every two weeks on the specified day. Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select forever. 2. Select days - Weekly repeated events can be set to occur twice or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend Tuesday and Friday every week. Note You cannot repeat All Day Events To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the calendar. 2. Make the changes in accordance with the instructions above. Managing entries To find a certain entry 1. Select Calendar > Find. 2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears. 3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past). 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To delete an entry

Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry. A deleted entry may be restored with Edit > Undo delete. To delete all entries in a period of time 1. Select Calendar > Remove entries. 2. Select the time period and select Done. All entries from that time period are deleted from the Calendar. Note Repeated entries will not be deleted. To copy, cut or paste an entry 1. Open the entry. 2. Select Edit > Copy entry/ Cut entry. 3. Go to the day where you want to place the entry. 4. Select Paste entry. 80 Calendar P800_UM.book Page 81 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To move a Calendar item to Tasks

Open the entry and select Calendar > Move to Tasks. The entry is moved, not copied. Preliminary To customize the alarm settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the Alarm tab. If you move an entry with an alarm, it will also sound in Tasks. Now you can change the following settings:

To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry. 2. Open Tasks. 3. Select Edit > Paste entry. Customize the calendar You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit your own needs. To customize the calendar view, General tab 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the General tab. Now you can change the following settings:

The hours to be shown in a day.

Standard time intervals in the day view. How detailed the time is shown in the calendar day view.

Standard entry length.

View hours in week from/to. Alarm precedes event by - how long before an entry the alarm goes off. Alarm sound - select sound for the alarm. To customize the screen 1. In calendar, select Edit > Preferences. 2. On the General tab you change the hours displayed in one day, one week, standard time intervals or standard entry length. 3. On the Alarm tab you set the alarm to proceed an entry in the calendar. To set colours to your entries using the folders 1. In Calendar, select the folders menu to the right in the menu bar and select Edit folders. 2. Select a folder and select Edit or create a new folder by selecting Add. 3. Select the colour box and select colour for that folder and select Done. Calendar 81

P800_UM.book Page 82 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can see the pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as whatever the folder colour. Saving changes If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes will be saved automatically. 82 Calendar P800_UM.book Page 83 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Tasks With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need to do. The folders help you to separate different types of activities. You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also send an entry via text message, IR, Bluetooth wireless technology, multimedia message or e-mail. Using Tasks When opening Tasks you will have a task list of entered tasks. In this list you can only see a short description of the task. Select a task to see its full information. A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add notes. To create a new task entry 1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task. This is the description you see in the task list. 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the task in. 3. Continue to enter information to the items on the detail page. Preliminary Completed Select the check box when task is done.This can also be done directly in the tasks list. Priority Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks by priority. Due date Select the check box to set a deadline to the task. Select the date that appears to get a calendar where you can set a due date. Alarm Select the check box if you want your telephone to alert you about the task. Select the time and date that appears for your settings. Private Select the check box to prevent the task from being visible when synchronized with tasks in other devices, for example your PC. 4. Select the note page tab to write a note to this entry. 5. Select to save and close the task. Note Delete will delete the whole task entry. To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the tasks list. 2. Make the changes according to the instructions above. Tasks 83 P800_UM.book Page 84 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Managing task entries To open an existing entry

Select the entry in the tasks list To mark an entry as completed

Select the check box to the left of the entry in the tasks list. To sort the entries

Select Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date. To find a certain entry 1. Select Tasks > Find. 2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears. 3. Select in which folder to search or use the default value All folders. 4. Select Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Select an entry on the result list to open it. To make a copy of an entry 1. Select Edit > Copy entry. 2. Select Edit > Paste entry. To delete an entry

Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete. To restore a deleted entry

Select Edit > Undo delete. To delete all completed entries In your task list, select Tasks > Delete completed. Note Unlike individual entries; when you delete All Completed Entries, they are removed permanently and cannot be restored. Sending and moving task entries To send an entry to another device 1. Open the entry and select Tasks > Send as. 2. Select how to send entry (text message, infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology or multimedia message) and then select Done. To move an entry to the Calendar

Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is moved, not copied. To copy a task entry to Calendar 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. Open Calendar. 3. Enter the day you wish the task to appear. 4. Select Edit > Paste Entry in Calendar. 84 Tasks

Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 85 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar, it will lose the priority it was assigned in Tasks. If you do not set a due date for the tasks entry, the current date will be used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the Calendar. Settings

Select Edit > Preferences to do the settings. The following settings are available. Display due dates Select whether or not to display them in the tasks list. Display completed Select whether or not to display them in the tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks. Alarm sound Select an alarm sound from the list. You can tap the trumpet symbol to hear it. Tasks 85 P800_UM.book Page 86 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Jotter The Jotter works as a notebook where you can write notes and draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of notes. You can read the notes with the flip closed but you should have the flip open when you work with them. A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one drawing page. When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes. In this list you can only see the first words of the text note. Select a note to see its full information. Writing text notes Open Jotter and select Jotter >New. The new note will automatically start as a text note. Note You write text notes on the text page by using the keys or the handwriting recognition. See the Getting Started chapter to get more information. Select A to get bold text and to create a bullet list. Drawing pictures The drawing mode gives you several options to draw in different styles or colours. The main window is the paper where you may draw with your stylus in the same way as you draw with an ordinary pen. Jotter Edit Unfiled to change colour. Select A colour scheme will be displayed. Select the colour you prefer. Select to change the virtual nib. A list of nibs representing different pen widths appears. Select the nib you want to use. to activate the Select eraser. The eraser is either on or off and it works like the pen. Tap the eraser again to re-activate the pen. 86 Jotter P800_UM.book Page 87 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM All jotter files (both text and drawings) are automatically stored in the telephone. The list view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter application. Creating and editing notes To create a new note 1. Select Jotter > New and enter a note on the text page. The first words will name the note in the jotter list. 2. Select Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the jotter in. 3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch to this note. 4. Select to save and close the note. To edit a note while working with it

For text, select Edit > Revert The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost.

For sketches, select Edit > Undo This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your mind, select Edit > Redo. To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another application 1. Open the list of notes and select Edit > Paste. Preliminary Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing sketch will be deleted. Create a note from the flip closed mode 1. Select Applications >Jotter from the flip closed mode. 2. If you have previous notes stored, these will now be listed. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. 3. Press the menu key if you want to create a new note. Select New. Insert your text by using the keypad. Managing notes To delete a note 1. Select the note in the notes list. The note opens. 2. Select Jotter > Delete note. Sending a note You can send a Jotter note by e-mail, text message, multimedia message, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. To send a note

Open the note and select Jotter > Send as. The note will be sent as text and/or with the picture depending on message type:

Jotter 87 P800_UM.book Page 88 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary text message: text only. e-mail: text as body and picture as an attachment. multimedia message: text and picture on first slide. Bluetooth wireless technology and infrared: complete jotter entry, text only or picture only. 88 Jotter P800_UM.book Page 89 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Games There are two pre-installed games in your P800. Traditional Chess and the card game Solitaire. You will find both games in the flip open modes list view. There are more games available for the P800. You will find these games on a disc in your original P800 box. Games from third-party developers might be installed in the P800. Games which are not certified by Sony Ericsson or their partners are not guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them at their own risk. Chess You can play Chess against the P800 or against another P800 user. In the latter mode, Chess communicates with the other player through SMS text messaging. On completion of a move, the move data is transmitted in text message form to the other player. After transmission, the game waits for an incoming text message from your opponent and uses its contents to determine the next move on the board, at which point control reverts to you. To start a new game 1. Select Chess > New game to initiate a game. Preliminary 2. Enter details as desired in the New game dialogue. You can return to these details later. Name Give the game a name so you can return to it later if you have to interrupt it. Notes Write a note about the game. You play Choose to play white or black. Against Select the level of your opponent. If you end up winning all the games, it may be time to select a more difficult level. Choosing a higher level may, however, force the P800 to take longer to select a move. Locally Select if you want to play against your P800 or against another P800 user. 3. Tap Play to start the game. To play Chess 1. Select the piece you want to move. The square where it is standing will now be highlighted. 2. Select the square to where you want to move the piece. The square will flash and the selected piece will move to it. Selecting a square that is not allowed for a piece is not possible. Games 89 P800_UM.book Page 90 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Switching to flip closed mode closes the game temporarily and saves the session status. In multi-player mode, an end-game text message is sent to the remote player. Solitaire Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards and up to 4 Jokers. Understand the game The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles to the layout card whilst scoring as many points as possible. Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or more rank cards. When you cannot play any more cards and cards still remain in the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed, bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then challenged to play a Hi/Low game to acquire more bonus points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand is dealt with one less Joker. Rules When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into 7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up to from the layout card.

Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles.

To play a pile card it must have a face value of one or more or one less than the layout card.

Aces are low and may not be played onto Kings. Jokers can be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a Joker. Settings To restart the game during a game

Select Solitaire > New. To undo/redo a move

Select Edit > Undo/Redo. To change card backs and playing background

Select Edit >Preferences. If your result is one of the sixth best it will be placed in the high score table. You can also watch individual player statistics. Play Solitaire Solitaire is only available in the flip open mode. 1. Select the icon for Solitaire. 90 Games P800_UM.book Page 91 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The game will either start with a new game or with the layout for an earlier, interrupted game. (The game data is saved on return to desktop, when the flip is closed or when the battery is low.) 2. Select the card you want to move and it will be higlighted. 3. Select the card where you would like to move the higlighted card. Preliminary Games 91 P800_UM.book Page 92 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Voice memo In Voice Memo you can record and listen to your own sound recordings. You can also exchange sound recordings between phones via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-mail or multimedia message, and use a sound recording as a ring signal. You cannot name a sound recording that you have recorded. Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded and by its position in the list of sound recordings. For example, the third of five sound recordings is identified as 3 of 5 on the screen. Making sound recordings You can record and listen to your own sound recordings, as well as save and listen to sound recordings that others have sent to you. You can add a new recording to the end of an existing sound recording. When you do this, the position of the sound recording in the list does not change and the original date and time of the recording are retained. 2. Select 3. Select and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. The new sound recording is automatically saved in the list of sound recordings with the current date and time. Key functions Select... To... start recording a sound. listen to the current sound recording. stop the current sound recording. go to the previous sound recording, in the list of sound recordings. go to the next sound recording, in the list of sound recordings. To delete a sound recording 1. Select a sound recording you want to delete. 2. Select Delete > Yes. To record and save a sound recording 1. Select

> New.

A new sound recording is created. 92 Voice memo Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 93 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Using sound recordings as ring signals You can set a sound recording as a ring signal. Choose between a recording you have made yourself, and a recording you may have received via e-mail or in a multimedia message.

To set a sound recording as ring signal see Incoming call alert on page 46. Exchanging sound recordings You can send and receive sound recordings by Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-mail or multimedia message. To send a sound recording 1. Select Voice Memo > Send as. 2. Select how you want to send the sound recording. See the chapter Messages on page 59 for further details on how to send and receive sound recordings. Voice memo 93 P800_UM.book Page 94 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary CommuniCam and Pictures Using the camera With the built-in camera CommuniCam you can take pictures, view them in your phone screen and send them to friends or colleagues via multimedia messaging. You can also send the pictures you have saved in your P800 to any other PC device via infrared communication or Bluetooth wireless technology. It is also possible to exchange pictures between the P800 and the web. The pictures in your P800 can be set as background pictures or they can be added to the contacts in your phone book. See chapter Personalizing your P800 on page 121 to find out more about using pictures. To take a picture 1. Press the camera button to activate the CommuniCam application. 2. Press the camera button again to capture the image on the screen.The picture is automatically saved in Pictures. To send the picture via multimedia message, select Send as MMS from the flip closed context menu. Open the flip to access the full range of CommuniCam settings. With the flip open, the CommuniCam is activated by selecting

. To view, edit or send the picture, select directly to Pictures. which takes you Delay timer You can take a picture with a 15-second delay before the actual picture is taken. This is a useful function if you want to be in the picture yourself. To take a picture with delay timer 1. Select 2. Select CommuniCam > Delay Timer. 3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for 15 seconds and

. a timer icon is shown before the picture is taken. Select CommuniCam > Delay Timer again to deactivate the delay timer. 94 CommuniCam and Pictures P800_UM.book Page 95 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preferences You may want to change some of these settings if, for example you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You can also choose what resolution (size and quality) you want for each separate picture. To change preferences for the camera 1. Select 2. Select CommuniCam > Preferences. 3. Select the setting you want to change:

. Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture. Move the slider to change the contrast. Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is brighter than the light in front of the subject. Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of flicker from, for example, fluorescent light. Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions you are in when taking the picture. Choose quality and size for the picture. High picture quality means larger file size and larger memory size than low picture quality. The picture sizes are displayed in pixels. To restore default camera preferences 1. Select CommuniCam > Restore defaults. 2. Select Yes. CommuniCam and Pictures Preliminary Pictures In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your P800. The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCam, received via e-

mail, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared communication, downloaded via the browser or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your P800 supports JPEG, GIF, PNG, WBPM and BMP picture formats. The pictures can be sent in multimedia messages, added to the contacts in your phone book, or used as background image and screensaver. 95 Tip To take a new picture, select the CommuniCam. which takes you directly to Tip Use the Find function to locate a certain picture, and the Zoom function to change the size of the screen fonts. To sort the pictures

Select Edit > to choose how you want to sort the pictures in your folders. P800_UM.book Page 96 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary List view Picture Edit Photos Brioney Mer de glace Mont Blanc Wakeboard 4 pictures In the list view, you get an overview of all the pictures in your P800. You can search for specific pictures, zoom the picture names and sort your pictures by name, date, size or type. Change between a thumbnail view and a list view of the pictures by selecting and

. At the bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have saved in your P800. 96 CommuniCam and Pictures P800_UM.book Page 97 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Detail view Pictures Edit Photos Preliminary Tip Use the Folder function to organize all your pictures. Read more about organizing files in the chapter General functions. At the bottom of the screen you can see the picture information, for example, the size of the picture and the date the picture was taken. To change between the actual size of the picture and a size that fits on the screen, select and

. Mont Blanc 21 June 2001 JPG(39 Kb) In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of the pictures in your P800. To rename a picture 1. Select Pictures > Rename picture. 2. Enter a picture name > Done. Note Two or more pictures cannot have the same name. Use folder. and to move between the pictures in the current takes you back to the list view. Sending and receiving pictures You can send pictures to other phones or to a PC via multimedia messaging. You can also save pictures that you have received via e-mail and in multimedia messages. To send a picture

Select Pictures > Send as. See Messages on page 59 for further details. To save a picture from a message

See Messages on page 59 for further details. To delete a picture 1. Select Pictures > Delete picture. 2. Select Yes. CommuniCam and Pictures 97 P800_UM.book Page 98 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary If you want to use one of your pictures in another application you can simply copy it and then paste it into the application of your choice. To copy a picture

Select Edit > Copy picture. A copy of the picture is saved in Pictures. Sony Image Station You can exchange pictures between your P800 and Sony Image Station on the Web. Use the browser in your P800 to go to http:/

/www.imagestation.com and sign up. 98 CommuniCam and Pictures P800_UM.book Page 99 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Audio player Your P800 has mobile music in the form of an audio player. With the audio player you can listen to the latest music tracks, or complete albums. You can download tracks to your P800 from a PC, the Internet or Memory Stick, and create different play lists, using the folder function. Your P800 supports a number of different sound files. Refer to Technical data on page 187 for more information on supported file types. List view In the list view, you can decide what types of sound files to include in your different play lists, and how to play back the play list you are currently in. You can also easily move between the play list view and the file list view for the current folder. To adjust the volume

Move the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. Preliminary Play list view This view is intended for playing entire folders. In the play list view you can Pause, and Play, Stop the playback of the current folder, and see the duration of the track. Selecting a track and tapping will Play the selected track and all the following tracks in the folder. Tap to move directly to the file list view. Audio Edit all Mah Na Mah Na MP3 Sesame Street 1:40 Elmo's Song Mah Na Mah Na Beautiful Day Stuck in a moment You... Elevation Walk on When I look at The Wo... Standing Still Audio player 99 P800_UM.book Page 100 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary File list view This view is intended for playing one file at a time. In the file list view you can see how many tracks you have in the current folder. Tapping a file name will open the Detail View, and allow you to manage that file. to move directly to Tap the play list view Audio Edit all Elmo's Song Mah Na Mah Na Beautiful Day Stuck in a moment You... Elevation Walk on When I look at The Wo... Standing Still Loop With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop them until you manually stop the play-back. 8 tracks To loop a list 1. Select Audio > Loop. 2. Select the check box. Managing play lists You can create your own play lists using the folder function. We recommend that you create folders for play lists on the Memory Stick. In any Audio player view, you can create a new folder using the Edit Folders command in the Folder Menu. Then you move or copy your sound files to the new folder to get your own play list. You can add more playlists as long as there is memory available. Preferences You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be displayed and played in the play lists, or if you want to display and play only a certain type of sound file. The sound files you can choose from are the ones that are supported by the P800. To select sound file types for the play lists 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include in the play lists > Done. Detail view This view is intended for managing one file at a time. You can play and pause the file by tapping and

. 100 Audio player

 

 

P800_UM.book Page 101 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM In the detail view, you can move tracks between your different folders using the folder function, send tracks to other phones or to a PC, using e-mail, multimedia messaging, Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication or cable. Here it is also possible to rename and delete tracks saved in your P800. The detail view displays the name of the track, the artist name, the album title, the track number, the copyright year, the sound file type and the duration of the track. Note The amount of information displayed depends on how much information is available on the sound file. Move between the tracks in the current folder using the buttons. and Audio Edit Unfiled Sony Ericsson theme Artist: Various Album: Autumn 2002 Track: 01 Copyright: Sony Ericsson Filename: SEM.MP3 MP3 1:34/1:40 Preliminary To rename a track 1. Select Audio > Rename track. 2. Enter a track name > Done. Two or more tracks cannot have the same name. To delete a track from the P800 1. Select Audio > Delete track. 2. Select Yes. To send a track

Select Audio > Send as. See Messaging for further details. Note You cannot send MP3 or AU sound files in a multimedia message. WAV and AMR sound files can be sent using multimedia messaging. Audio player 101 P800_UM.book Page 102 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Downloading tracks When you receive sound files in other applications, such as e-mail and multimedia messages, you activate the viewer in your P800. From the viewer you can then save the sound file to your P800. Audio Edit all Mah Na Mah Na To save a track from another application 1. Tap Save or select Audio

> Save. 2. Select what folder you want to save the track in

> Save. WAV 1:34/1:40 Note To create your own melodies, see the information on the CD for your P800. 102 Audio player P800_UM.book Page 103 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Audio player 103 P800_UM.book Page 104 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Video player You can view video clips that you have saved in your P800. The video clips can be downloaded in the P800 from an Internet site or transferred from a PC via cable or from Memory Stick. It is also possible to send these video clips to other phones or PCs, via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology and multimedia messaging. It is not necessary to download the video clips to be able to view them. You can use the streaming function and view the video clip from the website where it is located. The video clip is played with only a short time delay. The video player supports files in the MPEG-4 file format, for example name.mp4. To adjust the volume

Move the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Warning! The volume may be uncomfortably loud at the higher volume levels if the phone is close to your ear. Exposure to excessive volume levels may damage hearing. List view In the list view, you get an overview of all the MPEG-

4 video clips in your P800. You can search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and sort them by name, date, size or type. At the bottom of the screen you can see how many video clips you have saved in your P800. To view a video clip

. 1. Select 2. Select a video clip in the

list. Video Edit Trailers A Beautiful Mind Panic Room Spider Man Diving in the Ocean... The Time Machine 5 clips Tip Use the Find function to locate a certain video clip, and the Zoom function to change the size of the screen fonts. To sort the video clips

Select Edit and choose how you want to sort the video clips in the current folder. 104 Video player P800_UM.book Page 105 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preferences When you download a video clip to your P800, it is saved in the download cache memory. When this memory is full, you have to empty it to be able to download new video clips to your P800. To clear the download cache 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select Clear cache > Done. When you view a video clip from a website, using the streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may improve the play-

back of the video clip. To change the media buffer size 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select Custom setting and move the slider left or right. Detail view This view is intended for managing one clip at a time. You can play and pause the clip by tapping and

. In the detail view you can send, rename, delete or categorize your video clips. Only the video clips saved in you P800 can be handled in the detail view. To handle a video clip saved on a Sony Memory Stick, you first have to save it to your P800. Preliminary Video Edit Trailers Diving in the Ocean... Playing 1:49/2:24 Icon Function Stop the track that is playing. Play/Pause the highlighted track. Rewind the current track. Forward the current track. Takes you back to the previous view. Video player 105 To save a video clip from another application 1. Select the video clip you want to save. 2. Select Video > Save clip. 3. Select what folder you want to save the video clip in > Save. P800_UM.book Page 106 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To rename a video clip 1. Select Video > Rename clip. 2. Enter a video clip name > Done. Two or more video clips cannot have the same name. To send a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to send. 2. Select Video > Send as and choose how you want to send it. Tip Use the Folder function to organize all your video clips. To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >

Copy to, then select a folder from the list. To view the video clip information

Select Video > Clip info. To delete a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to delete. 2. Select Video > Delete clip. Saving video clips When you play video clips that you have received via e-mail or multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your P800 from the web, the viewer detail view is automatically launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the video clip to your P800. 106 Video player P800_UM.book Page 107 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Video player 107 P800_UM.book Page 108 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Viewer Viewer is an application used to view various types of documents:

Word processing documents

Spreadsheets

Drawings

PDF documents

Presentations

Archives Document viewer has two views in flip open mode:

List view An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to view. Detail view The contents of a file, for viewing and manipulating the file. In addition to opening documents from the list view, you can also open a document from another application, for example by selecting an attached document in an e-mail. The functions available differ depending on the document type. General functions are similar between the document types and are therefore described separately. General functions In all views there is a menu bar from where you can access some of the functions. This section describes the functions that are common to all document types. List view Menus Viewer Option Find file Edit Folders Sort by name Sort by size Zoom Zoom in Zoom out Restore All Unfiled Edit folders Description Search files with a name containing a specific text. Sort the file list by name. Sort the file list by file size. Set the zoom level of the file list, small, medium or large. Set the zoom level of the viewed document. Show all files in the list. Show the files that are not in a folder. Categorize your files in folders (for example business or personal). Viewer 108 P800_UM.book Page 109 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Detail view Menus Option Document Rename Send as Save (if opened from another application) Delete Properties Edit Zoom in Zoom out Restore Folders Unfiled Edit folders Description Rename the document. Send a document as e-mail, Bluetooth wireless technology, IR or, multimedia message. Save the document in the P800. Delete the active document. Show information on the active document. Increase the view of the file. Decrease the view of the file. Restore to the original size. Show the contacts that are not in a folder. Categorize your documents in folders

(for example business, personal and so on). To open a document from an e-mail

Select the document link. The document viewer is started, showing the detail view of the document. Preliminary To save the document in the P800 1. Select Document > Save from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. To open a document from the list view 1. Select the Application launcher icon 2. Select the Document viewer icon 3. If required, change folder. 4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name. The document is shown in the Detail view. To save the document to a different location 1. Select Edit > Copy to from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. Functions specific for different document types When you open a document, the document type is indicated by the name of the first menu, for example Spreadsheet. Spreadsheet Edit Unfiled Viewer 109 P800_UM.book Page 110 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Detail view - Document Menus Document Find Option Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Edit Copy Select all Draft view Normal view Page view Copy the selected text or elements of the document. Select the contents of the entire document. Display the document as formatted text without graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document as formatted text including graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document in print preview, showing the complete layout. To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. 110 Viewer P800_UM.book Page 111 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Detail view - Spreadsheets Menus Spread-

sheet Option Find Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Edit Copy Select all Draft view Show gridlines Next sheet Previous sheet Copy the selected text or elements of the document. Select the contents of the entire document. Display the document as formatted text without graphics, adapted to the screen. Turn the gridlines on/off. Open the view of the next sheet in the workbook. Open the previous sheet in the workbook. To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. Preliminary To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. To show/hide the spreadsheet grid lines 1. Select Edit > Show gridlines. To navigate in the workbook 1. To go to the next sheet in the workbook, select Edit > Next sheet. 2. To go to the previous sheet in the workbook, select Edit >

Previous sheet. Viewer 111 P800_UM.book Page 112 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Detail view - Drawing Menus Drawing Option Find Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurrence of the search text. Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Edit Fit to width Fit to window Next slide Previous slide Displays the drawing with a width equal to the screen width. Displays the drawing with a width and height equal to the screen width and height. Open the view of the next slide in multi-page documents. Open the view of the previous slide in multi-page documents. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To navigate in a multi-page drawing 1. To go to the next slide in the drawing, select Edit > Next slide. 2. To go to the previous slide in the drawing, select Edit >

Previous slide. Detail view - Archive Menus Edit Option Open Extract Extract all Sort by Sort order Description Open the selected file for viewing in a Document viewer window. Extract the selected file to be saved in a selected folder. Extract all the archive files to be saved in a selected folder. Allow the user to view files in an archive by name, date, or size. Allow the user to view files in ascending or descending order. To extract documents from an archive 1. To open a file for viewing in the Document viewer, select the file and select Edit > Open. 2. To extract a file and save it in the selected folder, select Edit >

Extract. 3. To extract all files in the archive and save them in the selected folder, select Edit > Extract all. 112 Viewer P800_UM.book Page 113 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To change the archive sort order 1. To sort the documents by name, date or size, select Edit > Sort by and select as desired. 2. To change between ascending and descending order, select Edit > Sort order. Preliminary Viewer 113 P800_UM.book Page 114 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Online services Online services is a customized service offered by a network operator. This symbol or subscription-dependent. indicates that a service or function is network-

On-line services provides a mechanism that allows applications that exist on the SIM to interact and operate with the P800. It may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the latest information from the stock market. Online service are placed on your SIM card by your operator. Note Contact your operator to find out which services are available for your account. Online services 114 P800_UM.book Page 115 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Online services 115 P800_UM.book Page 116 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Time The time and date are always displayed in standby mode. You can customize the display of times and dates throughout your P800. You can set your current location and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set three different alarms. Time 10 9 8 11 12 1 67 5 2 3 4 Stockholm Current city Friday 4th Jan 2003 Current date Fri 11:04:28 Fri 10:04 am Week 01 London Daily 8:00 a... Workday 12:30... Once(Su... 9:00 p... Wak... Lunc... Earl... Other city Alarm slot Time and date To set the current time and date 1. Select 2. Tap the clock to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Tap the Date box, then use the arrows to set the current year and month. Then select the current day. 4. Tap Daylight saving time, then select the check box next to the zone that currently has summer time > Done. This is only required if you are currently in a country with summer time. Time & date

Date:

Time:

04/01/2003 11:04 am Summertime Time & date Format Cancel Done 5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 116 Time P800_UM.book Page 117 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM 6. Use the am/pm box to switch between am and pm >

is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. This 7. Select Done. Format You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time format. Preliminary Workdays You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customize the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. To set the time and date display format 1. Select 2. Tap the clock to view the

. current time and date settings. 3. Select Format. 4. Tap the Date Format box

> choose a format. 5. Tap the Date Separator box > choose a separator. 6. Select a Time format. 7. Tap the Time separator box > choose a separator. 8. Select Done. To specify your workdays 1. Select 2. Tap the clock 3. Tap the right arrow key

. Time & date Date format:

Date separator:

Time format:

Time separator:

icon twice. 4. Tap the check boxes next to the days you normally work. 5. Select First day of week >

choose a day. 6. Select Done.

04/01/2003

12 hour 24 hour Time & date

Monday:

Tuesday:

Wednesday:

Thursday:

Friday:

Saturday:

Sunday:

First day of week:

Format Workdays Monday Time & date Format Cancel Done Cancel Done Time 117 P800_UM.book Page 118 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Locations Specify the country and city you are currently in. The city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time. If you are away from home, for example travelling in another country, it can be useful to know what the time is in your home country as well as the country you are in. The city you select as Other City will be displayed below the clock in Time. Numbers You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers in your P800 to be displayed in all your applications. Distances can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and different punctuation marks can be used as separators.

To set the number details 1. Select 2. Select Time > Set location. 3. Select Numbers. 4. Tap the distance boxes > choose imperial or metric. 5. Choose separators and symbol position in the same way as in

To set the locations 1. Tap 2. Tap Time > Set location. 3. Tap the Current Country box > the country you are in at the moment. International

Current country:

United Ki... Current city:

London 4. 6. Select Done. 4. Tap the Current City box

> the city you are in at the moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city closest to you. 5. Tap the Other Country box > choose a country. 6. Tap the Other City box >

choose a city. 7. Select Done. Other country:

United Ki... Other city:

London Location Numbers Done Alarms You have the possibility to set up to three different alarms in your P800. You can choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm with your own definitions. You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert. To activate an existing alarm

Select the check box in the alarm slot. status bar on the screen. is displayed on the 118 Time Preliminary 8. Make sure the check box next to the alarm is selected. When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off the alarm completely, select Done. P800_UM.book Page 119 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To set a new alarm

. 1. Select 2. Select one of the alarm

slots. 3. Select Time > choose at what time you want the alarm to go off. 4. Select When > choose how often you want the alarm to go off:

Once The alarm will go off at a time more than 24 hours from now but within the next eight days. Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours. Daily Every day at the specified time. Weekly Every week at the specified time. Set alarm

Time:

8:00 am When:

Daily Alarm sound:

Silent Message:

Wake up!

Set alarm Done

8 0 0 am Alarm sound:

Silent Message:

Wake up!

Done Workdays Every workday at the specified time. 5. Select Alarm sound > choose a sound. 6. Select Message > choose a preset message or write a new one. 7. Select Done. Time 119 P800_UM.book Page 120 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Calculator The Calculator is a standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square root and percentage. It also has a memory function. To use the calculator 1. Select 2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.

. All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed as they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30. Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate, for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed when you tap the %-key. Key functions m+

mr m-

C Tap once to store an entered value in the memory. If you already have entered a value in the memory, tap once to add the value on the screen to the value in the memory. Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it into the screen. Tap twice to clear the memory. Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed. Tap once to delete the last digit you entered. Tap once to reset the screen to 0. You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste. Values stored in the memory are retained while using other applications. 120 Calculator P800_UM.book Page 121 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Personalizing your P800 There are a number of ways you can give your P800 a personal touch and change its settings to suit your requirements. Changing your application shortcuts The standby screen displayed when the flip is closed shows five short-cuts to applications. Control panel you From the can change them, rearrange them as you prefer, or even hide them, if you wish. See Application shortcuts on page 23. Displaying the Area Code in the Standby Screen If your network operator provides CBS (Cell Broadcast Services) with cell information you can set your P800 to display the area code below the network name in the standby view. See CBS tab on page 140. Setting a background picture From the the stand-by screen. See Wallpaper on page 127. Control panel you can set a background picture for You can obtain suitable background picture files by downloading, beaming using transferring them from your PC. Bluetooth or Infrared, or Background picture images are 208 x 144 pixels and the picture can be seen in the standby screen.(Any chosen picture will be scaled to fit well on the screen).The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Setting a Screen Saver You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period of inactivity. From the Control panel you can also turn this facility on and off and select the delay period before the screen saver is displayed. See Display on page 127. Key lock and device lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When you press a key or touch the screen, you will be prompted to activate keys and/or enter the device lock code. Personalizing your P800 121 P800_UM.book Page 122 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Picture format for the screen saver is 208 x 320 pixels. Adding images to your Contacts You can store a picture with each entry in Contacts. See Managing contacts on page 55. John Smith

+4613244500 Pictures are easily taken using the CommuniCam (see CommuniCam and Pictures on page 94) though of course other images can be used. End call If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) service, your P800 can display the contact's picture together with the other information when an incoming call is received with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be displayed). The contact's picture is also displayed when making a call. To show the contacts picture when receiving an incoming call 1. Select 2. Select the Show picture for incoming calls check box. 3. Tap Done. Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture Ring signals Your P800 can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring signals (WAV, AU, AMR, and MIDI sound file formats). You can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to available file space. 11:03 A ring signal may be selected for an entry in that the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. Contacts, so You can use a recording as a ring signal. See Voice memo on page 92. Choose between a recording you have made yourself, and a recording you may have downloaded, transferred from your PC, or received via e-mail, EMS message or MMS message. 122 Personalizing your P800 Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 123 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The recommended format for WAV files is PCM, 22,050 Hz, 8 bit, Mono, often called 'radio quality'. This format requires approximately 22 kilobytes of space for each second duration. Many PC audio applications support WAV. Alarm tones and sound notification You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in these applications:

Time Calendar Tasks Messages SeeAlarms on page 118 Set a sound for reminder alerts, see Customize the calendar on page 81) Set a sound for reminder alarms. See Settings on page 85 Set a different sound for each type of message as notification of a new message:

See Alerts on page 141 Master reset In the P800 to the way they were when you originally bought it. See Master reset on page 136 for more details. Control panel you can reset all the settings in your Personalizing your P800 123 P800_UM.book Page 124 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Control panel The Control Panel is the location for all the main settings on your P800 that are system-wide and affect more than one application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your P800, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access it, select Control Panel in Applications. Tip You can find settings that apply to a single appliction in the Preferences menu of the application, for example: Phone > Edit

>Preferences, Communicam > Preferences, Internet > Preferences To make the Control panel settings easier to find, they have been grouped into three groups shown on separate tabs: Device, Connections and General:

General tab International Time & date Connections tab Bluetooth Cable Infrared Internet accounts IP security manager Messaging accounts Secure tokens WAP accounts Device tab Certificate Manager Display Flip closed shortcuts Flip removed Format disk Language Master reset Storage manager System sounds Text input User greeting WIM management Control panel To see a list of all control panel settings and the groups to which they have been assigned, select Control panel > Set groups.

To sort the list of settings by group name: at the top of the list, select Group.

To change the group to which a setting is assigned: select the name of the setting in the list. The sections below, arranged in alphabetical order, describe the settings available for each of the default items in the Control panel. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology uses radio waves to enable wireless connections between your P800 and other Bluetooth-

enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of up to 8-10 metres. Obstructions between the transmitting devices will have an effect on the performance. 124 P800_UM.book Page 125 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:

Devices A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your P800 is paired (bonded) with.

To change the name of a device, select the name in the Settings list.

To remove a device from the list, select the name and select Remove.

A friendly device name for your P800. Security-related settings:

Its Bluetooth wireless technology operation mode.

How it should act when receiving a beamed entry. Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your P800, and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily recognizable. It is a good idea to change these names to something more useful. The name you choose for your P800 appears on any devices you pair it with. To locate other Bluetooth-enabled devices in the vicinity

Select Add. The Available Bluetooth devices dialogue opens:

All enabled devices that are discoverable within range are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example). Paired devices that are within range are shown with regular text. Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with their names in italics. Preliminary Devices that are within range but unknown are shown with a preset name. If a device you want to pair with your P800 does not appear in the list, check that:

It is on and within range.

Bluetooth function on the device has been activated and that it is in discoverable mode. To pair a device to your P800 1. Select the device in the Available Bluetooth devices list. 2. If the device requires a passkey, you will be asked to enter it. 3. Select Done. Note The other device (a PC, for example) may require that you enter the same passkey in its own dialogue. Security On the Settings tab you can make the following security-related settings:

You can set your P800 to different operation modes:

On Auto All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P800 works. Your P800 is connectable, paired devices can access it. All Bluetooth wireless technology functionality from your P800 works. Your P800 is not connectable. Control panel 125

P800_UM.book Page 126 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Off Discoverable Bluetooth wireless technology is turned off. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can find and connect to your P800. To pair with another device, your P800 must be Discoverable.

You can also set how your P800 should act when receiving beamed items:

Always receive Ask first Never receive Receives the entry automatically. You will be shown a Connection request that you can accept or reject. Rejects the item automatically. Cable Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection parameters used when communicating through your P800's cable port. Select Control Panel > Connections and select Cable to:

Choose the cable connection mode: when connecting via cable the P800 must be set in PC connect mode or Modem mode, see table below. PC connect mode

Synchronization

Installation of software

Backup and restore Modem mode

P800 as a modem

Phone Book Manager (PC software)

Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length and type of flow control required for the connection. When connecting your P800 via the desk stand to a USB port on your PC, use the following (default) settings:

Baud rate Parity Stop bits Character length Flow control 460800 None 1 8 CTS/RTS Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the flip is closed by selecting Connections >

Applications>

Cable. Certificate manager Digital certificates ensure that the web or WAP pages you visit, or any software you install, really are created by the person you expect. Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the software that you download. Your P800 compares these certificates with a set of certificates that are stored in Certificate manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the certificates do not match, your P800 informs you, and gives you the following choices:

Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed.

Continue at your own risk. 126 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 127 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The certificates on your P800 have been created and issued by an independent organisation that ensures their authenticity. Security information Security information is displayed when Certificate manager cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For example, security information will be displayed if:

The certificate on a page has expired.

The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified. Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your P800 has:

Expired.

Been revoked by the independent organisation that issued it. Adding and removing certificates Your P800 handles certificates automatically so, most of the time, you can browse the Internet securely without using Certificate manager. If you do need to add or remove a certificate, you will usually be informed by your network operator or system administrator. You should remove a certificate from Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:

The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it. Control panel Preliminary

The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent organisation that created it. Type of certificate The type can be either Certificate Authority or User. Certificate Authority certificates contain server details. This type of certificate is handled by your P800 when the server only requires server authentication. This means that your identity remains anonymous. User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate is used when the server asks for client authentication. The client application requests you to identify yourself by choosing a user certificate. Display Use the Display settings to control the screen and power functions of your P800. Wallpaper You can set a picture to be the background for the standby screen. (SeeFlip closed - overview on page 22 for details on the standby view.) Select Browser from the drop-down list to see picture files available on your P800. Read more about background pictures in Personalizing your P800 on page 121. 127

P800_UM.book Page 128 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Screen saver You can set a screen saver picture to be displayed after a period of inactivity. You can also turn this facility on and off and select a delay period of up to 15 minutes before the screen saver is displayed. Read more about screensaver images in Personalizing your P800 on page 121. If you select the Phone lock protected check box the Device lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about locks and security in P800 locks on page 33. Power save You can set a power saver to switch off the screen after a period of inactivity (2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, or 30 minutes). When the power saver activates, the screen will be switched off. If you set times for both screen saver and power saver, the power saver setting will automatically be set higher. Light You can set the screen light settings for car use and handheld use. Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or receive an incoming call Light is always on Light is always off Auto On Off 128 Lock Select Lock to activate the screen saver immediately. If the Phone lock protected check box has been selected, this will also activate the Device lock. Calibrate Occasionally you may find that you tap one item (for example a button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the screen ensures that the correct item is activated. To restore calibration to the factory settings, press the Jog Dial. Flip closed shortcuts Use this dialogue to configure the application shortcuts shown in the Flip Closed Standby view, see Standby view on page 23. You can change the five shortcuts shown. If you feel that the shortcuts obscure your background image, you can choose to have them hidden when you do not need them. By default these shortcut icons are displayed:

Messages Contacts Call list Calendar Applications Control panel P800_UM.book Page 129 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To change an application shortcut in the Standby view 1. In the Flip closed shortcuts dialogue, select the icon you wish to change. The name of the application is shown in the Set Application pick list. 2. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the list. To hide the application shortcuts when your P800 is inactive 3. Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box. Flip removed When you use your P800 with the hardware flip removed, you can use the keys on the virtual flip instead. Use this setting to turn it on or off (see Virtual flip on page 26). Format disk This dialogue primarily lets you rename and format any Sony Memory Stick Duo that you install in your P800. Your P800 comes with one Memory Stick Duo. When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you may have installed. Your P800s internal ROM drive is also listed in the dialogue, so that you can rename it to give it a more meaningful name if you wish. Preliminary Infrared Use this setting to control the state of the infrared communications port of your P800. You can set it On, Off or On for 10 minutes. Read more about connecting to other devices using infrared in Connection via infrared port on page 151. International Use these settings to set the locations shown in as the units for distances, numerical separators, and how currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Locations and Numbers. Time, as well On the Locations tab

Set Current country and Current city to your current location.

Set Other country and Other city to an alternative location (for example your home location if you are abroad). If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the desired time zone. On the Numbers tab

Set Long Distance and Short distance to Imperial or Metric. Long distances are those that are displayed in and are measured in miles or kilometres. Short distances are those that are measured in metres or and centimetres, or feet and inches. Control panel 129 P800_UM.book Page 130 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary

Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire.

For applications that use currency values you can set a currency symbol and choose how the symbol should be placed in relation to the symbol. Internet accounts You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP), who supplies you with account details including: a username, a password, and the phone number or web site address that your P800 automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set up an Internet account before you can:

Access web pages and download multimedia messages.

Set up an e-mail account to send and receive e-mail messages. Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P800. There are three types of Internet account:

Dial-Up account:

. High -speed Dial-Up account:

GPRS account:

With a Dial-Up account, you're charged for the length of time that you are connected to the Internet. This is a special kind of Dial-Up account. With a High-Speed Dial-Up account, you're charged for the length of time you're connected but you can increase the connection speed so that information is transferred faster. Billing rates from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) may increase as you increase the connection speed. With a GPRS account, you're charged for the amount of information you view, download, or send. The dialogue has two tabs: Accounts and Other. Accounts tab The Internet accounts dialogue lists all the Internet accounts that have been set up on your P800. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect to the Internet, select the Show connection dialogue check box. This may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for Internet and Messages. 130 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 131 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is the account that your P800 prompts you to use. To create a new Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select New. 2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a connection is being established the text -GPRS is automatically added to names of GPRS accounts.) 3. Choose the Connection type for the type of account that you want to create, GPRS or Dial-Up. 4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ depending on the type of account: GPRS, Dial-Up or High-

Speed Dial-Up:

Preliminary GPRS account New For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings. If advanced settings are required, they must be provided by your ISP. Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below:

GPRS Advanced settings tabs Server User name and password Normally, you do not have to enter a user name and password when you connect to a GPRS account. However, some service providers may require you to enter these details. If you select the User name and password required check box, but do not enter a user name and password, you will be prompted to enter these when the P800 connects. Log in Address Enter the Internet address of your access point. The address is supplied by your service provider. The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. The DNS address uniquely identifies your Internet Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your P800 uses to connect to the Internet. Your P800 can normally fetch these addresses automatically from most ISPs. If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot connect to the Internet and you suspect these addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their primary and secondary DNS addresses. Control panel 131 P800_UM.book Page 132 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary GPRS Advanced settings tabs IP address types There are four different types of IP addresses:

IPv4: Consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid input is between 000 and 256 in each box. IPv6: Consists of eight hexadecimal boxes and valid input is between 0000 and FFFF. IPv4 compatible: Consists of six hexadecimal boxes and four 3-digit boxes. The last hexadecimal box is prefilled with 0:0:0:0. Only the four 3-digit boxes can be changed, and the valid input is between 000 and 256. IPv4 mapped: Consists of six hexadecimal boxes and four 3-digit boxes. The last hexadecimal box is prefilled with F:F:F:F. Only the four 3-digit boxes can be changed, and the valid input is between 000 and 256. IPv4 is the most common addressing method. A proxy server is a computer connected between your P800 and the computer you communicate with. This arrangement can be used for connections to SyncML servers, or within a company network. If this setting is needed, your company's Information Services department or SyncML provider must give you instructions. Proxy 132 GPRS Advanced settings tabs Other If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your P800 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. QoS Your ISP may require plain text authentication. If you select the Plain text authentication check box, the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection will be restored. Check with your mobile operator before changing any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings. If your operator supports the use of Header compression, selecting On can speed up your connection. The settings Precedence, Delay, Reliability, Peak rate, and Mean Rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service) values will apply. Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account New Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your P800 dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your ISP you can increase the speed of your connection by making settings under Advanced settings on the Speed tab. Control panel

P800_UM.book Page 133 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP. For some accounts you may also need to make advanced settings. Preliminary Select Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below Script Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up advanced settings tabs Log in The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the table GPRS Advanced settings tabs. As an alternative to entering your user name and password to access the Internet you may need to use a login script stored on your P800. Although uncommon, scripts may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Select the Use login script check box and enter the script text in the Script editor If you select the check box Plain text authentication

(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection will be restored. Select the check box Post connect terminal if:

The login script of the account that you are setting up requires that you input certain information or you will need to respond to prompts from the Internet account.

You are connecting to a Dial-Up account that uses Secure Access generated by a separate smart card or password generator. For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the table GPRS Advanced settings tabs. Proxy Control panel 133 P800_UM.book Page 134 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up advanced settings tabs Speed You can only increase the speed of your connection if you have a High-Speed Dial-Up account with your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up advanced settings tabs Secure To enable secure access for this Internet account you must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this dialogue:

1. Select the Enable secure access check box. To create or delete Secure Tokens on your P800, select Control panel > Connections >Secure tokens. 2. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token that you want to link to this account from the drop-down lists. Other If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your P800 to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. If the computer that you connect to supports call back, it can break the Internet connection after you have logged in and then call your P800 back to re-

establish the connection. Call back saves you money and increases security. To enable call back:

1. Select the Use call back check box. 2. In the Call back type list, choose whether you want the ISP to call you back using the phone number stored on the provider's server (Use server number) or another phone number (Use number below). 134 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 135 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To Edit an Internet account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. Note If you change the Connection type, all account data for that account will be deleted. To Delete an account 1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. Other tab You can use the Dial-Up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up your P800 to disconnect automatically from the Internet, if you're not using it. The connection is broken after the period you specify has lapsed. Preferred Mode (bearer preference) Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by incoming phone calls while browsing the web. All incoming voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. When you have selected GSM only, no GPRS data connection is possible. Preliminary If you select Automatic, your P800 will let you answer incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS functionality. A GPRS data connection will be temporarily interrupted by a voice call. IP security manager The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one policy can be activated at a time.This is used for secure connections over the Internet, typically to a corporate intranet.If needed, your company IS department will supply the necessary information. There are two types of passwords needed:

IP security password: is to be set when activating the very first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is possible to change it later at any time by tapping the Password button.

Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this. Language Use this list of all languages stored on your P800 to change language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use. Control panel 135

P800_UM.book Page 136 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Tip To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is loaded on your P800 at delivery. You can use the P800 Change Language utility on the PC suite for P800 CD to load and delete languages. Master reset Use Master reset to return your P800 to the state it was in when originally delivered. Warning! All user data will be deleted and all settings will be in your P800 to the way they were when it was originally delivered. If you want to keep installed applications clear the Delete user installed applications check box. Messaging accounts The of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make settings as described below. Messages application can handle many different types The Messaging accounts dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging account:

Email SMS MMS CBS You can have any number of e-mail accounts. To receive and send e-mail, you must first set up an Internet account

(if one isn't already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 130. You can only have one SMS message (Short Message Service) account.These settings also apply to EMS

(Extended Message Service) messages. You can only have one MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) account. To receive MMS message WAP-based content you must first set up an Internet account (if one isn't already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 130. You can only have one CBS (Cell Broadcast Services) account. The number of Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is limited by the space on your SIM. Tip A simple way of setting up an e-mail or multimedia message account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your P800. Read more about the different types of messages in Messages on page 59. 136 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 137 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Email tab The Email tab shows a list of the e-mail accounts on your P800.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. You can choose one of your e-mail accounts as Preferred. This will be the e-mail account that your P800 uses when you use Send as to send an entry as e-mail directly from one of your P800 applications To create a new e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select New. 2. On the Basic tab, enter the following settings:

E-mail account basic tab settings Account name Your name This is the name you give to your e-mail account. This name appears on your outgoing e-mail messages. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your e-mail address. Email address Preliminary 3. On the Inbox tab, enter the following settings, as required:

E-mail account Inbox tab settings User name Password Incoming server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your user name, your password, and its incoming server address, which identifies the computer where your incoming e-mail messages are stored. If you do not have much time to download your e-

mail messages, you can choose to receive just Just headers (the sender, subject, and date only) or set a size limit (if a message is larger than the e-mails smaller than limit, only the headers are downloaded). You can download the complete message later. Select Schedule to schedule an automatic download of your incoming e-mail messages. Messages that are waiting in your Outbox will not be sent at the same time. Download Schedule Connection type Select POP3 or IMAP. POP3 is most common. Internet account Select the Internet account to access your e-mail messages. Control panel 137 P800_UM.book Page 138 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 4. On the Outbox tab:

E-mail account Outbox tab settings Outgoing server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with its Outgoing server address, which identifies the computer through which your outgoing e-mail messages are sent. Some SMTP servers might require authentication also when sending e-mail. In that case, select the check box Use SMTP authentication and enter your User name and Password. If the SMTP server accepts using your Inbox login information for authentication, select the check box Use Inbox login details. Use SMTP authentication Use Inbox login details 5. On the Advanced tab:

E-mail account Advanced tab settings Secure connection Secure password authentication Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you whether you can use either a Secure connection or Secure password authentication. A secure connection means that all information

(including your username, password, and all messages) is encrypted to maximize security while you're connected to the Internet. In contrast, secure password authentication means that only your password is encrypted. Normally 25. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to. Outgoing mail port 138 E-mail account Advanced tab settings Incoming mail port Use MIME encoding Normally 110. Do not change unless your ISP instructs you to. MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-

textual information (for example graphics) and accented characters to be sent in e-mail messages. If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding, clear the check box. To edit an e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Select Done. To delete an e-mail account 1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Select Delete. 3. Select Done. Control panel P800_UM.book Page 139 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM SMS tab Use these settings to set up text message and EMS messaging:

Preliminary MMS tab Use these settings to set up multimedia messaging:

Messaging accounts SMS tab settings Service centre address Messaging accounts MMS tab settings Service centre address The Service centre address is the phone number where your text messages are stored. It is normally imported from the SIM card but if that fails, your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Your network operator may also specify the Character Set. You can set a time limit after which text messages are deleted from the network by choosing a value in the Messages stored for list. Clear the check box Extended messaging when you do not want to use EMS message functions when composing your messages. Clear the check box Smilies if you want to use only plain text smilies. Character Set. Messages stored for Extended messaging Smilies Tip If you send and receive text messages in several countries, you can avoid having to change the service centre address when you travel abroad by entering the international dialling prefix

(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your network operator. You can set the Connection type to one of the bearer types in the list. WAP Accounts. Download method Download size and Less than The Service centre address is URI to the server on which your multimedia messages are stored. Your MMS service provider or your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Specify which of your configured WAP accounts you wish to use.

WAP accounts are created in Control panel >

General (tab) > WAP Accounts Select between Manual or Auto:

Manual - only a notification will be sent to your P800 and you can decide whether or not to download the full message.

Auto - the full message is downloaded directly to your P800 Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming messages:

No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages doesn't matter, all messages will be received.

Less than - messages smaller than the limit will be received, bigger messages will be deflected. Control panel 139 P800_UM.book Page 140 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Advanced settings Select Advanced to make settings about how your P800 will send and receive multimedia messages. MMS Advanced settings tabs Send The values you give these settings will be default for all multimedia messages that you send. You can of course choose other values for an individual message in Messages. You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is, how long they should be available to the receiver. Maximum is the default. You can give your messages a Priority level of Low, Normal

(default) or High. You can set a level of Conformance for the multimedia messages that you send to make sure that they will be played back correctly on different products. You can choose one of these levels:

Standard - a warning message is displayed whenever you add non-conformant item to a multimedia message. You have the option to send anyway.

None - non-conformant messages are sent. Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:

Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your number. Read report requests a read notification from receivers of your messages. Delivery report requests a delivery notification from receivers of your messages. Reply with history includes the original with your reply. MMS Advanced settings tabs Receive These settings apply to multimedia messages that you receive. Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the sender when a message is:

Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification

Read by you: Allow read notification You can filter reception of incoming messages by message class (Advertisements, Personal, Automatic, Information) as well messages from senders listed in Contacts. Selecting a check box will filter out messages of that category. To receive multimedia messages only from senders listed in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the check box for Contacts. CBS tab On the CBS tab you make settings related to CBS (Cell Broadcast Services). CBS services include Area Information and Cell Information. The availability of Cell Broadcast Services (Cell and Area Information) is operator dependent. Cell information may be used to display the area code below the network name in the flip closed standby view. Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic report. 140 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 141 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM To enable Cell Information

Select the Cell Information check box To turn Area Information on

Check the Area Information check box. Received messages will be displayed and automatically stored in the Area Info Inbox when dismissed. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your P800. The check box for each channel shows if it is on (checked, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not active):

To add a new channel 1. Select New. 2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel dialogue. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are too many channels defined, New will be disabled and you will see a message: Maximum channels on SIM. Channel numbering is operator dependent. Please consult your network operator for information. To turn a channel on or off

Select the channel in the list and check the check box. To turn it off, clear the check box. Preliminary To delete a channel

Select Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone, you will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will also delete any stored Area Information messages for that channel in your Area Info Inbox. Alerts Your P800 can notify you when a new message arrives with a different sound for each type of message that it can receive. To set up notification, select Alert. If you check the Display notification message check box, you will also see a notification message. For each type of message you can either

Select the Default Melody, or

Select Find Melody to open the Select audio dialogue, where you can browse through your folders to pick a melody from those stored on your P800. Secure tokens Your P800 supports secure access systems from a number of vendors. You manage secure access by using Secure Tokens. Read more about secure access in Secure access on page 164. Control panel 141 P800_UM.book Page 142 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Each token is associated with one system and with one Internet account, or none, when you use your P800 as a Hard Token

(password generator). You can configure as many tokens as needed. The Secure tokens dialogue shows a list of secure access providers. Secure tokens relating to the provider's name are listed under the name in an open tree structure. Select Control panel > Connections > Secure tokens to:

Edit, Delete, or Create a new token, or Generate a password. These options are only displayed as available when a Secure token is highlighted, and greyed out when the vendor's name is highlighted. The sequence of the dialogs they generate will be vendor specific. A token is associated with an Internet account through the Internet settings for the account. SeeInternet accounts on page 130. Many dialogue details when using secure access are vendor, system and network specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to get the correct information. Storage manager This dialogue helps you do housekeeping with the storage space on your P800. The list shows the applications on your P800 and the space they occupy. Removing information from applications To remove information from an application: select an application in the list. This application is then displayed. Remove the old or unwanted entries or information. Here are some housekeeping tips for different applications:

Remove any unwanted recordings as even short ones occupy Messages, remove any old messages from your Inbox a lot of space. In or Sent folders. In Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries. In by selecting Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries.

Throughout your P800, use folders as you create and receive Tasks, remove all completed entries by selecting Calendar, remove all entries in a specified time period information to speed up housekeeping later. 142 Control panel

P800_UM.book Page 143 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Removing unwanted general files Select Files to see a list of all stored general file types on your P800. You can remove unwanted files and launch a viewer for each file. Uninstalling applications If you uninstall an application, you will have to reinstall the application if you want to use it later. To uninstall an entire application, select Uninstall. Note You cannot uninstall the applications that came with your P800. System sounds To set the sounds given when you press a key on the keypad or tap the screen in your P800 select System sounds. You can choose between the following sounds:

Keypad Touch screen Tone, Click or Silent Click or Silent Text input There are several standard ways of entering text in your P800. See Entering text - Flip open on page 29 and Entering text in flip closed mode on page 25. Preliminary Use the settings on the Primary, Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to set methods for entering text in your P800. Primary Alternative The method that you select here is activated automatically when you need to enter text into your P800. The method that you select here is activated if you tap at the bottom of the screen. If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its settings here. Time & date Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your P800. The dialogue has three tabs. You can set:

Time & date Format Workdays The current time and date. Here you can also turn Summertime (daylight saving time) on or off for your location. Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen. Specify the days in your working week Note These settings are also available in the application. Time Control panel 143 P800_UM.book Page 144 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Time & date tab To set the current date 1. On the Time &date tab, select the date. A calendar view opens. Tap the arrows to set the current year and month. 2. Select the current date. To set the current time 1. On the Time & date tab, select the time. Select the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 2. Select the am/pm box >

. This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. If the locations you have set under International are in a country that currently has summer time

(Daylight Saving Time), you can adjust the time and date. Control panel >

To turn daylight savings time on 1. On the Time &date tab, select Daylight saving, select the check boxes for the zones that currently have daylight savings time. 2. Select Done. Format tab You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-

hour time format. To set the time and date display format 1. Select Date format and choose a format. 2. Select Date separator > choose a separator. 3. Select a Time format. 4. Select Time separator choose a separator. 5. Select Done. Workdays tab You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customize the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. To specify your workdays 1. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work. 2. Select First day of week and choose a day. User greeting Your P800 can show a user greeting on the standby screen when you turn it on. Use this dialogue to turn this function on or off. You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters). 144 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 145 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM WAP accounts Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts

(sometimes called WAP profiles) on your P800. WAP accounts are intended for multimedia message and for accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings should be included in your Internet accounts!

For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. The dialogue has two tabs: Basic and Preferred. Basic tab The dialogue shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your P800. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. To create a new WAP account:

1. Enter the name of the WAP account. 2. Select the Internet account you want to use. Preliminary 3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the Use proxy check box. 4. Enter the IP Address of the gateway or proxy 5. Enter the Port address of the gateway or proxy. For a WAP gateway use:

9201 for a normal connection 9203 for an encrypted secure connection. If the gateway/proxy requires User name and Password, which is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialogue. Preferred tab Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be used when you use the Open page command in the application and when a page is opened from another P800 application. Internet If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the Internet. WIM management WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security functions, especially to store and process information needed for user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant store for private keys, certificates and other items that may require a PIN for access or modification. Control panel 145

P800_UM.book Page 146 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary The WIM management dialogue consists of PIN choice list and a WIM items list. You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM items list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM item list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected. Note This is the PIN to access the WIM. The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any items that do not have a different PIN, that is, no specific items on the WIM are linked to PIN-G. You can change status of a PIN:

Enable PIN: A PIN code that is enabled is requested for authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation you must enter the PIN code.

Disable PIN: A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to authorize an operation to proceed. To change the PIN code:

1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list. 2. Select Change PIN. If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it can be used again. Select the PIN and select Change PIN. 146 Control panel P800_UM.book Page 147 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Installing applications It is possible to install new applications in your P800 either from the PC or directly from the P800.These applications can be obtained in several ways, for example:

from the Internet from a CD from a Memory Stick as an e-mail attachment. Applications can also be downloaded directly to your P800 from other devices, the Internet or via e-mail. There are two types of installation files for applications:

SIS (Symbian Standard Installation)

MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java Archive) Note SIS and JAR files are installation packages containing several files. This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for example, system components and add-ons. PC Suite for P800 The PC Suite for P800 CD delivered with your P800 contains a set of useful applications to install applications and manage your P800:

Backup and Restore Make safety copies of your data. File Manager Transfer files (images, documents, music, and so on) between your P800 and PC. Change Language Change the system language in the P800. Download Station Install applications in the P800. Smartphone Monitor Monitors the connection, runs automatically. Sync Station Synchronizes data in your PC and P800. Phone Book Manager Edit SIM card from your PC. Refer to the online help for each specific application. Installation When inserting the CD in the PC, a start menu is automatically shown. Select language and then start the PC Suite for P800 Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. By default the PC Suite for P800 is accessed from Start menu >

Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800. Installing applications 147

P800_UM.book Page 148 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary The Setup application also can be used later to add or delete components. Installing applications Installation file security Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation of C++ or PersonalJava applications or other content into the P800 file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you know for sure who produced the SIS file then you can take an installation decision based on what you know about that vendor. Your P800 supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity. During installation the P800 verifies a digital signature and certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate on the phone. Successful verification means that you can trust who produced the SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature you will be given a warning about the problem but you can still decide to proceed with installation at own risk. In general it is recommended that you install only from SIS files where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified. MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for MIDP JAR files. From a PC PC Suite for P800 must be installed in your PC and the P800 must be connected to the PC via cable, IR or Bluetooth wireless technology in order to install applications from your PC. Installing applications from your PC 1. Connect your P800 to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. When connected, an icon is shown in the taskbar on the PC. 2. Start the PC software P800 Download Station and select the application (.sis or .jar file) to install. It is also possible to double-click a file in file manager and make the P800 Download Station start automatically. 3. Confirm to install the application in the P800. 4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick). Download to the P800 begins. 5. Installation starts when download is complete. 6. Installation is complete. 148 Installing applications Preliminary Removing applications in the P800 1. Select

> Applications > Uninstall and then select software to remove. 2. Confirm selection. 3. Select Done. Note If you delete an application from your P800, any copy on your PC (including backups) will be deleted the next time you synchronize with your PC. Tip See also Master Reset and Storage Manager in Control Panel for more options regarding removal of applications and user data. P800_UM.book Page 149 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM From the P800 Program packages can also be downloaded to your P800 from the Internet or from a Memory Stick. When downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your P800. The procedure below describes installation of application packages already in the P800 but not yet installed. Installing applications in the P800

> Applications > Install. 1. Select 2. Select software in the list. 3. Select Install. If the software is certified, an information dialog will be shown with the name of the software, version and supplier. Select Install again. 4. Now, depending on the software, you may be prompted to replace a previous installation, select language, memory location and select other installation options. 5. Installation is complete. Select Done. Removing applications in your P800 It is sometimes necessary to remove installed applications and user data to free up memory. Installing applications 149 P800_UM.book Page 150 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Connecting to other devices Your P800 can be connected to other devices with similar interfaces, such as PCs, other P800s and PDAs. The connection can be made via:

Cable Infrared (IrDA)

Bluetooth wireless technology Once it has been connected, you can perform various tasks, depending on what type of connection you have chosen, such as:

Using a cordless headset (Bluetooth wireless technology)

Sending and receiving files via (infrared, Bluetooth wireless technology) beaming

Making Backup/Restore and Synchronisation of your data and file transfer. (Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology)

Using the P800 as a modem for Dial-Up Networking.

(Cable, infrared and Bluetooth wireless technology) IrDA Bluetooth E-mail SMS MMS Bluetooth IrDA Cable Connecting to other devices 150

P800_UM.book Page 151 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM PC connectivity software Your P800 is delivered with a CD, PC Suite for P800. This software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See the chapter Installing applications on page 148 for more information. You do not need to install the PC Suite for P800 if you only want to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset. Connection via cable Put your P800 in the desk stand and connect the cable to an empty USB port on the PC. When connecting via cable, the P800 must be set in PC connect mode or Modem mode, see table below. The setting is made in Control panel > Connections >

Cable. PC connect mode

Synchronization

Installation of software

Backup and restore Modem mode

P800 as a modem

Phone Book Manager (PC software) Serial settings The default settings for normal use:

Baud rate:

Parity:

Stop bits:

460800 None 1 Preliminary Character length:

Flow control:

8 CTS/RTS Connection via infrared port When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the infrared ports have a free line of sight between them. The infrared port on your P800 is located on the left-hand side, next to the On/Off button. Activating the infrared port The infrared port must be activated before communication can begin. Go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared port and set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes. See the chapter Control panel on page 124 for more information on infrared settings. Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology You can connect your P800 to other products equipped with Bluetooth wireless technology, for example PCs or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since Bluetooth wireless technology is radio-based, transmitting and receiving devices do not have to be in a free line of sight. This means that your P800 can stay in your pocket while communicating. However, objects between transmitting and receiving units might weaken the signal. Connecting to other devices 151 P800_UM.book Page 152 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Connection to another device can be made within a range of up to 10 metres. For all tasks, except beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and trusted relationship between your P800 and the other device. This process is called pairing

(other documentation refer to it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your P800 also after you have turned it off so you do not need to repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make them secure only paired devices can connect to your P800. Activating Bluetooth wireless technology Activate Bluetooth wireless technology on your P800 in Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Operation mode to Auto, On or Discoverable and set Receiving items to Ask first or Always receive. See the chapter Control panel on page 124 for more information on Bluetooth wireless technology settings. Pairing To let your P800 initiate pairing with another device 1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to Discoverable. 2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Add. Your P800 searches for all devices in the vicinity and lists them. 3. Select the device you want your P800 to pair with and, enter a passkey when asked for it. When the passkey is accepted, the pairing process is complete, refer to the section Passkeys below. 4. If you in the future want to allow a paired device to connect to your P800 without you explicitly approving each connection you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and the check box Allow to connect without confirmation. To let another device initiate pairing with your P800 1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to Discoverable. 2. Follow the other devices manual to initiate pairing. 3. When asked for a passkey, enter the same on both devices. 4. If you in the future want to allow a paired device to connect to your P800 without you explicitly approving each connection you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices select a device and the check box Allow to connect without confirmation. To remove a paired device from your P800 Select a device in the list and select Remove. 152 Connecting to other devices Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 153 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Passkeys Passkeys ensure that the device you pair with really is the device you think it is. A passkey is a set of numbers and/or letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with the owner of the other device. Accessories like headsets often have a default passkey, usually 0000, see the specific users guide. Transfer items with Send As From many applications it is possible to transfer (and receive) items like appointments, contacts and images to other users. The transfer starts by entering the Send as menu in the specific application. Depending on the application and item you can choose between the following transfer methods:

Infrared

Bluetooth wireless technology

Text message

Multimedia message

E-mail Note To be able to send or receive an item over infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology, these functions must be activated. SeeConnection via infrared port on page 151 and Activating Bluetooth wireless technology on page 152. Connecting to other devices 153

P800_UM.book Page 154 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Synchronization and backup With PC Suite for P800 installed in your PC, your P800 can synchronize with the following PC applications, also called Personal Information Managers (PIMs):

Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology, the functionality is the same. The following items can be sychronized locally:

Lotus Organizer 5 & 6

Lotus Notes 4.6, 5.0

Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002 Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server in, for example, a corporate network. Local synchronization Bluetooth IrDA Cable

E-mail

Contacts

Calendar

Tasks Jotter notes Configuration of PC software Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings are made in the P800 SyncStation PC software (included on the PC Suite for P800 CD). The easiest way is to configure the PC software to automatically make a synchronization every time your P800 is connected. An icon, Smartphone Monitor, is shown on the PC taskbar when connected. In the PC go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

SyncStation and select the items to synchronize and select manual or automatic method. Refer to the online help in P800 SyncStation PC software for more information. Synchronization and backup 154

P800_UM.book Page 155 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Performing a local synchronization Making an automatic synchronization 1. Connect your P800 via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. 2. Synchronization starts automatically. Making a manual synchronization 1. Connect your P800 via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. 2. In the PC, go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

SyncStation and start the synchronization. Alternatively, right click on the SyncStation Monitor and select Synchronize. Preliminary Remote synchronization Remote synchronization takes place over the air and is the ideal way to keep the P800 up-to-date while on the move. Using GPRS, the P800 can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. GPRS, HSCSD or CSD PIM Application Sync Server Firewall Internet/Intranet Synchronization services may be offered by mobile operators, third-party service providers and as added capability to corporate PIM applications. The following items can be synchronized remotely:

Contacts

Calendar

Tasks Synchronization and backup 155 P800_UM.book Page 156 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Remote sync server configuration Enter in the following parameters:

Remote Sync in Applications, select Edit > Settings and fill

Server address

User name

Password You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate IT help desk or your service provider for information on these parameters. You also need to have at least one configured Internet account that remote sync can use to connect, see Internet accounts on page 130. Remote sync task configuration Selecting items to synchronize 1. In Remote Sync, select one item in the list you want to be synchronized. 2. Select the Enable task check box. 3. Fill in the Task name or leave default. 4. Fill in the Server database

(Contact your corporate IT help desk or your service provider). 5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider.)

Repeat for other items. Remote Sync Edit Sync task Calendar/Tasks Task status 2002-09-15 Contacts Email Jotter Sync Making a remote synchronization

Open Applications > Remote Sync, select the Sync button. When ready, the Task status column shows today's date for all successfully synchronized items. 156 Synchronization and backup P800_UM.book Page 157 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Backing up data You can use the P800 Backup and Restore PC software to back up the contents stored in your P800 to your computer. Keeping backups of your P800 contents on your computer means that you have a separate copy of the contents of the P800, which can be restored into the P800. Backups should be made on a regular basis. A backup reminder can be set. See the online help for P800 Backup and Restore for more information on how to use the application. Preconditions The PC Suite for P800 must be installed in the PC and the P800 must be connected to the PC via cable. Note Backup and restore does not work via IR or Bluetooth wireless technology. Performing a backup To make a backup 1. Connect your P800 to the PC via cable. 2. In the PC, go to Start > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

Backup and Restore. 3. Select P800; several can be registered. 4. Start Backup and select media: P800 and/or Memory Stick. Backup begins, the progress is shown in the P800. Preliminary 5. Follow the instructions in the P800. 6. Backup is complete. Restoring data If you have lost data or accidentally deleted information in your P800 you can restore an earlier backup. A backup from a certain memory type (phone memory or Memory Stick) can only be restored to the same type. To restore a backup 1. Connect your P800 to the PC via cable. 2. Go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 > P800 Backup and Restore in the PC. 3. Select P800; several can be registered. 4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved backups and click Restore. Restore begins, the progress is shown in the P800. 5. Follow the instructions in the P800. 6. Restore is complete. Warning! Everything in your P800 will be overwritten by the chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore, you cannot cancel the procedure. Synchronization and backup 157 P800_UM.book Page 158 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Note If you have used your Secure Tokens (Secure Access files) since you made your backup, you must reconfigure these. If you restore another P800, you must reconfigure your Secure Tokens. 158 Synchronization and backup P800_UM.book Page 159 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Getting started with Internet and Messages Introduction Before you can use Internet and send or receive messages you will need to make some user-specific settings in the Connection type When your P800 connects to a service provider, it will use a GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services. Messages to access the Control Panel. Internet and Service provider You will need a service provider to connect your P800 to the network.The service provider could be:

An Internet service provider (ISP) which connects you to the Internet.

An access point provided by your network operator.

A private service provider such as your company or your bank. You will need to enter specific service provider details into your P800 to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate Internet and corporate accounts. Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed services, check with them. The connection type defines which network your account uses to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network, and Dial-Up Internet accounts use the GSM network. GPRS If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet account allows you to:

Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are charged for the amount of information you view, download or send when your are connected to the Internet.Check your operator for details of your subscription.

Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is broken. Dial-Up For both Dial-Up and High-Speed Dial-Up accounts, you are charged for the length of time you are connected. If your network operator supports them, you can increase your connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account. Getting started with Internet and Messages 159 P800_UM.book Page 160 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Automatically set up service provider and messaging The easiest way to set up your P800 is automatically, through your service provider. Messages settings your P800 supports automatic setup For of:

e-mail accounts

MMS message (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings. Check your service provider's website for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote configuration of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, e-mail and MMS message settings. If remote configuration is possible, they will send you the auto configuration messages required by SMS message. Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of these services may also be available through the phone configurator utility at www.sonyericsson.com To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct:

Select SMS. Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

Accepting new Internet or Messages settings New configuration messages will appear in the Auto setup account inbox of mail accounts will, however, be found in your SMS message inbox.) Messages. (Configuration messages for e-

When an auto setup message appears, select it. A dialogue with a brief text and operator message appears on the screen. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in the inbox. If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing account you can choose to create a new account with the same name or replace the existing account. Warning! Never accept remote configuration messages if you are not expecting them or are unsure where they have come from. Manually set up service provider Alternatively to setting up an Internet account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from Internet accounts on the Connections tab of the Control panel. First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your IT Manager. 160 Getting started with Internet and Messages

P800_UM.book Page 161 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM All settings are described in Internet accounts on page 130. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new Internet account on page 131. Manually set up Messages Alternatively to setting up Messages automatically, you can enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use yourself from Messaging accounts on the Connections tab of the Control panel. First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the following sources:

If your mobile operator offers an e-mail service you can get the necessary details from them.

Your Internet service provider.

Your IT Manager in the case of connecting to the corporate network to access your work e-mail account.

Your network operator in the case of SMS message and CBS services. Preliminary The dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging service:

e-mail SMS message MMS message CBS The provider of your e-mail service, or for a corporate account, your IT Manager can provide you with the necessary details. All settings are described in Email tab on page 137. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new e-mail account on page 137. Short Message Service The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM card. All settings are described in SMS tab on page 139. Multimedia Messaging Service Your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you with the necessary information. Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an Internet account in Control panel > Internet accounts and a WAP account in Control panel > WAP Accounts All settings are described in MMS tab on page 139. Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information Your network operator will be able to inform you if these services are available. All settings are described in CBS tab on page 140. Getting started with Internet and Messages 161

P800_UM.book Page 162 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Setting up WAP accounts A WAP account defines a service provider and gateway that should be used when making a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account when you use MMS message

(Multimedia Messaging Service). The WAP gateway sits between your P800 and the WAP site coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another to access your bank's WAP service. The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your P800 is automatically, through your service provider. Check your service provider's website for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic setup. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. Manually set up a WAP account Alternatively to setting up a WAP account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from WAP Accounts on the Connections tab of the Control panel. First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your IT Manager. All settings are described in WAP accounts on page 145. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new WAP account: on page 145. Using your P800 as a modem Your P800 contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you can use it to connect your PC to the Internet or corporate intranet.Your P800 appears to the laptop like a normal modem. Bluetooth IrDA Cable Personal Computer 162 Getting started with Internet and Messages P800_UM.book Page 163 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM You link the laptop to your P800 using technology connection over the air can be by any of the bearers that your P800 supports:

cable (USB or serial).The Bluetooth wireless infrared, or

GPRS

HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data)

CSD (Circuit Switched Data). A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up Networking Wizard is provided on your PC suite for P800 CD. The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking) entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections. Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your P800 is ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network. Because Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-sight alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position and let your P800 remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be placed up to 10 metres away. If you wish to use an infrared link, the range is typically up to 1 metre. The two infrared 'eyes' must be kept in line of sight, at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees. Preliminary The Dial-Up Networking Wizard The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your P800. You can also view and modify the GPRS settings in the P800. For HSCSD DUN entries, it updates the modem settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer (ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN connection. You can view or change the DUN entries created with the wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface. The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the PC suite for P800 must be installed in your PC and your P800 must be connected to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth wireless technology. You should have any information concerning, for example, phone numbers, names of servers or domains, that the server that you want to connect to may require. To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-Speed Circuit Switched Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard 1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Choose Create a new Dial-Up connection. 3. Follow the instructions in the Wizard. Getting started with Internet and Messages 163 P800_UM.book Page 164 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary To edit a previously created DUN entry 1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Modify a Dial-Up connection. 3. Select the desired connection from the list. 4. Follow the instructions in the Wizard. CSD connections To set up a CSD (GSM Data) connection you will need to install your P800 as a modem manually. To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD 1. On the PC, open the Control Panel. 2. Choose to install a new modem. 3. Choose your P800 as the modem. 4. Select the port where the P800 is connected. 5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been created. Connecting To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard 1. If you are connecting by cable, set your P800 to Modem cable connection mode. 2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:

Click the Desktop short-cut created by the wizard. Select the entry from within the system DUN folder. Run an application that has built-in support for using DUN entries (for example a browser or e-mail client). Secure access If you need access to a network that requires secure access

(often known as strong authentication), for example a corporate intranet, you can set up the Internet account you use to log in to that network to use secure access and generate the required one-time password when you make the connection. Your P800 supports the following secure access systems:

SecureID from RSA

DigiPass from Vasco

SafeWord from Security Computing If you have a separate device or application that requires one-

time passwords according to one of these systems, you do not need a separate hardware token generator (Hard Token). Your P800 can generate passwords that are not associated with an Internet account. You manage secure access in your P800 using Secure Tokens:

164 Getting started with Internet and Messages P800_UM.book Page 165 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Each token is associated with one vendor/system and may be associated with one or more Internet accounts (or none, when you use your P800 as a Hard Token). You can configure as many tokens as needed. To edit, delete, create a new token, or generate a one time password, tap: Control panel > Connections > Secure tokens. Note You should have the flip open when generating a one time password. Internet account settings A token is associated with an Internet account through the Internet settings for the account:

To set up a Dial-Up (CSD or High-Speed CSD) account for Secure access 1. Tap Control panel > Connections > Internet Accounts. 2. Create a New or Edit an existing 3. Tap Advanced. 4. On the Secure tab for the account select the Enable secure Dial-Up account. access check box. 5. Select the appropriate Vendor and Token. To set up a GPRS account for Secure access 1. Tap Control panel > Connections > Internet Accounts. 2. Create a New or Edit an existing GPRS account. Preliminary 3. Tap Advanced 4. On the Server tab for the account select the User name and password required check box. 5. Enter your User name if desired. If you leave it empty, you will be asked to fill it in at connection time. 6. Leave the Password box empty. Connecting to an Internet account For Dial-Up accounts there are two possible ways to connect to a secure access account, depending on if the login procedure uses a script and the PCT (Post Connect Terminal) or not. To connect to a Dial-Up account that does not require the PCT 1. In the login dialogue, enter your vendor specific login information in the PIN box. 2. Tap Done, the one-time password is generated and passed to the network invisibly. To connect to a Dial-Up account using the PCT 1. In the PCT tap Generate. 2. In the vendor-specific Generate Passcode dialogue, generate the one-time password. 3. Tap Copy. 4. Return to the PCT, tap Paste to enter the one-time password in the script. Getting started with Internet and Messages 165 P800_UM.book Page 166 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 5. Tap Done. To connect to a GPRS account 1. In the login dialogue, tap Generate. 2. Select the appropriate Vendor and Token. 3. In the vendor-specific Generate Passcode dialogue, generate the one-time password. 4. Tap Copy. 5. Return to the login dialogue, enter your user name if required and tap Paste to enter the one-time password in the Pin box. 6. Tap Done. Tip Many dialogue details when using secure access are vendor, system and network specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to get the correct information. GPRS - data logs Icons on the status bar let you overview the information on data connection calls. A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides information on the GPRS service status. The GPRS connection status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three states for the icon, unavailable

, available and active

. and GPRS The HSCSD/CSD icons are displayed during a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example, the GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active transferring data (alternates between suspended activates the GPRS active icon for 2 seconds. Any data transfer either received or sent

, active

) and and Connection information When you select the data connection icon, during an active data connection, a menu appears with the choices Information and Disconnect. Information to view information on the connection.

Select

Select Disconnect to end the connection. GPRS status information When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status information and, if applicable, GPRS error text appear. GPRS data log A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account establishes a connection for the first time. If there is an existing data log associated with the current GPRS connection, this is updated. 166 Getting started with Internet and Messages Preliminary Session data When the connection is deactivated, for example when the current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and received in the last session is displayed. In both flip open and flip closed the information is displayed for a couple of seconds. In the flip closed mode, the information can be dismissed with the return key

. P800_UM.book Page 167 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM The GPRS data log shows a list of GPRS Internet accounts. Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status icon is displayed to the left of the account. To view information on an account

Select an account in the list. Information on the account is shown. The data log is updated dynamically. Buttons allow you to delete or reset the current data. These buttons are disabled during an active or suspended connection. To delete the log for an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Select Delete. To reset the log of an account 1. Select an account in the list. 2. Select Reset. To delete or reset the log of several accounts 1. Select the check boxes of the accounts in the list to be deleted or reset. 2. Select GPRS data log > Reset or GPRS data log > Delete. Getting started with Internet and Messages 167 P800_UM.book Page 168 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Troubleshooting This chapter consists of a selection of suggestions for solving possible problems with your P800. Start problems

Hand-held phone: Recharge or replace the battery.

Vehicle Handsfree: Check that the P800 is properly inserted into the holder and check the fuse in the fuse holder

(connected to the battery cable). SIM card related problems Insert card A SIM card has not been inserted into your P800. See Getting started on page 7 for instructions on inserting the SIM card. PIN & unblocking PUK code Contact your dealer if you have forgotten your PIN or unblocking PUK code. By default you need your PIN or PUK code to unlock your P800. Tip Store PIN and unblocking PUK code information in a safe place. Wrong PIN The PIN code has been entered incorrectly. The message is followed by the prompt Enter PIN. Enter the PIN code correctly and press or

. Note If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a row, the SIM card will be blocked. You can unblock it by using your PUK. Blocked contact card provider The SIM card is permanently blocked after the Personal Unblocking Key (PUK) has been entered incorrectly ten times in a row. Contact your network operator. Card blocked unblock?

This message appears if the PIN code has been entered incorrectly three times in a row. To unblock the SIM card 1. Press 2. Enter your personal unblocking key (PUK) and press

. Note Your PUK is provided by your network operator when you purchase your SIM card. Troubleshooting 168 P800_UM.book Page 169 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Enter new PIN appears on the screen. 3. Enter your PIN code and press

. You can enter either your current PIN code or a new one. Repeat new PIN appears on the screen. 4. Enter your PIN code again for confirmation and press

. If you entered both your unblocking key and PIN code correctly, the message New PIN will appear on the screen. Alternative method for unblocking the SIM card To unblock the SIM card, enter the following sequence:

new PIN repeat new PIN unblock key Lock problems Device lock Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt Enter lock code. Your P800 is locked to prevent unauthorized use. To unlock the P800:

Enter your personal security code, then press or

. Preliminary Key symbol The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key action.

Press followed by to unlock the keys. Screen limitations In all cases where numbers or characters exceed the available screen space, truncation or dots are used to compensate for this. Numbers are truncated at the beginning, for example

...555666777. Characters are truncated at the end, for example Methusel.... Emergency calls only A network is within range but you are not allowed to use this network. You may, however, call the emergency number 112. Fax calls Your P800 does not support fax transmission. Even if your operator subscription supports fax transmission, fax calls will be rejected. However they can be forwarded to another number such as the office fax number, see Forward calls on page 47 for more information. Troubleshooting 169 P800_UM.book Page 170 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Note Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send a fax to your P800 as they can experience a number of retries before the fax transmission is stopped. Indicator light Blinks red This indicates that the battery is running low and soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare. Note With Vehicle Handsfree (VHF) equipment, make sure that the following are inserted or connected: your P800 and its holder, the fuse in the fuse holder, and/or the external antenna. Does not blink If the indicator light at the top of your P800 does not blink and no network is displayed there is no network within range. See No network on page 170. Memory/Disk full Due to memory limitations, your P800 has no more space available to save or store information. Warning! Make sure regular backups are made with Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost or corrupted information. To free up memory, delete unused or old:

Call logs.

Contacts.

Messages.

Calendar To-Dos or appointments.

WAP history or bookmarks.

Notepad notes. No network This indicates that no network is within range. The reason for this is either:

1. You are in an area that is not covered by a network. 2. The received signal is too weak, possibly because you are being shielded from the signal. Move to obtain a sufficiently strong signal. Check your display signal strength indicator. System failure In case of a system failure, your P800 will flash an animated warning. To recover, please restart the P800 like this:

170 Troubleshooting P800_UM.book Page 171 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM 1. Press and hold the On/Off button at least 10 seconds to turn the P800 off. 2. Restart as normal: Press the On/Off button to turn on your smartphone. 1010 Preliminary Troubleshooting 171 P800_UM.book Page 172 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read this information before using your mobile phone. Important: To avoid hearing impairment, answer call or lower volume before placing this product to the ear. Recommendations

Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.

Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.

Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures.

Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products.

Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.

Do not paint your product.

Turn your product off in places where posted notices instruct you to do so and in places where mobile phones are prohibited including aircraft and hospitals.

Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your car's air bag.

Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorised personnel should perform service. If your mobile phone is equipped with infrared, never direct the infrared ray at anyone's eye and make sure that it does not disturb any other infrared units. Antenna Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your mobile phone. Use of unauthorised or modified antennas could damage your mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR levels above the recommended limits (see below). Efficient Use Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or radio frequency fields). 172 Guidelines for safe and efficient use

P800_UM.book Page 173 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave exposure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any variations in measurements. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions, but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power required to reach the network. Therefore, the closer you are to a base station, the more likely it is that the actual SAR level will decrease. Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio frequency exposure guidelines. Preliminary Accessories can significantly affect a mobile phone's compliance with the radio frequency exposure guidelines. For example, the Federal Communication Commission in the U.S. requires that some manufacturers' accessories shall be tested, and Sony Ericsson has done so with respect to its products. To avoid causing loss of performance or radio frequency exposure levels above the permissible limits it is recommended that you only use Sony Ericsson or Ericsson original accessories intended for use with the mobile phone. If you wear the mobile phone on your body while it is transmitting, and you do not use a Sony Ericsson or Ericsson original body worn accessory, please ensure that you are not using an accessory that contain any metal. A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on www.sonyericsson.com/. Driving Please check if local laws/regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your product. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 173 P800_UM.book Page 174 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Please note that because of possible interference to electronic equipment, some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation. Personal Medical Devices Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker, e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear opposite the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information. For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device. Children DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSORY. YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORY MAY CONTAIN SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING HAZARD. Disposing of the Product Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Power Supply Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage or stress. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used outdoors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. 174 Guidelines for safe and efficient use Preliminary Battery Information We recommend that you charge the battery for 4 hours before you use your mobile phone for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5C (+41F) and

+45C (+113F). A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced capacity the first few times it is used. The talk and standby times depend on usage conditions and network configurations when using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power is required and talk and standby times are prolonged. P800_UM.book Page 175 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Emergency Calls Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain network services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local service provider. Using wireless technology to help find you in case of an emergency is a goal shared by the entire wireless industry, local phone companies and the emergency response centers. Your phone includes technology which represents the first step towards that goal. However, the complexity of mobile communication technology, combined with related implementation technologies means that this locating feature may not work in all cases, even if you are able to speak with an emergency response center. Always review with an emergency response center all location data you have, including intersecting streets, as well as any landmarks, to assist in locating you. Sony Ericsson is committed to continuing to work with the entire communications industry to improve location features for emergency response. Sony Ericsson is not liable for any service( s) including operation, coverage, or range of the network services provided by network carriers independent of Sony Ericsson. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 175 P800_UM.book Page 176 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary

Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.

Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using other batteries and chargers could be dangerous.

Do not expose the battery to liquid.

Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery.

Do not disassemble or modify the battery.

Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, never above +60C (+140F). For maximum battery capacity, use the battery in room temperature.

Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery.

Keep out of children's reach.

Use the battery for the intended purpose only.

Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed. Disposing of the battery The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center for information. Limited warranty Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Ericsson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original accessory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre (national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com/ to get further information. Our warranty Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year. 176 Guidelines for safe and efficient use P800_UM.book Page 177 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM What we will do If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson authorised distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance with the terms and conditions stipulated herein. Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions below. Conditions 1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original purchaser by the dealer, specifying the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty service if this information has been removed or changed after the original purchase of the Product from the dealer. 2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer. Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of Sony Ericsson. Preliminary 3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure of the Product due to accident, modification or adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid. 4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system. 5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations, modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony Ericsson authorised person. 6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the Product. 7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty. Guidelines for safe and efficient use 177 P800_UM.book Page 178 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary 8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some countries/states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under applicable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from their sales/ purchase contract. If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU country where an identical Product is sold by an authorised Sony Ericsson distributor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre. Please observe that certain services may not be possible elsewhere than in the country of original purchase, for example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible to repair SIM-locked Products.

** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase. FCC Statement This device compiles with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interface that may cause undesired operation.

* European Union (EU) 178 Guidelines for safe and efficient use P800_UM.book Page 179 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Terms and definitions AU, .au Format for audio data files. Bearer Path over which data flows. Specifically in CSD and HSCSD, the type of telephony link from the GSM network to the server PSTN or ISDN. Bluetooth Bluetooth wireless technology is a secure, fast, point-to-

multipoint radio connection technology. It is a computing and telecommunications industry specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and personal digital assistants

(PDAs) can easily interconnect with each other and with home and business phones and computers using a short-range wireless connection. Bookmark A URL and header/title stored in the phone, enabling the user to go directly to a Web or WAP page. bps Bits per second rate of data flow. Preliminary BMP Microsoft Windows Bitmap. A graphics format defined by Microsoft supporting 1, 4, 8 or 24 bit colour depth. No compression, so files can be large. cHTML A version of HTML optimized for small devices. CLI Calling Line Identity. Shows the number of the person calling you in your mobile phone display. Your smartphone will also display the name and photograph of the caller if they are in Contacts. You can then make an informed choice as to whether or not to take the call. Bear in mind that not all numbers can be displayed. To use this service, it must be supported by your network. COM Port Defines a serial/RS-232 port within the Windows environment. May be physical (COM1 port on the rear of the PC) or virtual

(COM5 port communicating with a PC card modem). CS Circuit Switched. Connection from A to B which has a fixed bandwidth and is maintained over a period of time, for example a voice telephone call. Terms and definitions 179 P800_UM.book Page 180 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary CSD Circuit Switched Data. CSD is a GSM service providing a CS data connection at a rate of 9.6 or 14.4kbps. CSS Cascading Style Sheet. A feature of browsers. DTMF Dual Tone Multi Frequency. A method of coding digits as a combination of two audible tones. DUN Dial-Up Networking. The dial-up networking capability in Windows. e-GSM Extended GSM. New frequencies specified by the European Radio Communications Committee (ERC) for GSM use when additional spectrum is needed (network-dependent). It allows operators to transmit and receive just outside GSM's core 900MHz frequency band. This extension gives increased network capability. EMS Enhanced Messaging Service. An extension of SMS enabling pictures, animations, sound and text formatting to be added to text messages. ESM Ericsson Smart Messaging. Used for OTA configuration; an enhancement of the Nokia Smart Messaging standard. FCC Federal Communications Commission. US government agency which regulates radio communications. GIF Graphics Interchange Format. Format for storing images which also supports animated images. Highly compressed by limiting the colour palette to 16 or 256 colours. It is one of the two most common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide Web. The other is JPEG. GPRS General Packet Radio Services. A radio technology for GSM networks that adds packet-switching protocols, shorter set-up time for ISP connections, and offer the possibility to charge by amount of data sent rather than connect time. GPRS promises to support flexible data transmission rates typically up to 20 or 30 kbps (with a theoretical maximum of 171.2 kbps), as well as continuous connection to the network. GSM Global System for Mobile Communications. GSM is the world's most widely-used digital mobile phone system, now operating in over 160 countries around the world. 180 Terms and definitions P800_UM.book Page 181 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM GSM 900 The GSM system family includes GSM 900, GSM 1800 and GSM 1900. There are different phases of roll-out for the GSM system and GSM phones are either phase 1 or phase 2 compliant. GSM 1800 Also known as DCS 1800 or PCN, this is a GSM digital network working on a frequency of 1800 MHz. It is used in Europe and Asia-Pacific. GSM 1900 Also known as PCS. Refers to a GSM system running in the 1900 MHz band. Used in the USA and Canada, for instance. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 38.4 kbps, four times faster than the standard data rates of the Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. HTML Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide Web browser page. The markup tells the web browser how to display a web page's words and images. Preliminary HTTP HyperText Transfer Protocol. The communications protocol used to connect to servers on the World Wide Web. Its primary function is to establish a connection with a Web server and transmit HTML pages to the client browser. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4) is a standard client/server protocol for accessing e-mail from your local server. The e-mail is received and held for you by your Internet server. You (or your client e-mail receiver) can view just the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether to download the mail. IrDA The Infrared Data Association. is dedicated to developing standards for wireless, infrared transmission systems between devices. With IrDA ports, a device such as your smartphone can exchange data with other devices without a cable connection. IrDA requires line-of-sight transmission. ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. Communication protocol offered by telephone companies that permits telephone networks to carry data, voice, and other source traffic. It can provide circuit-switched data connections in multiples of 64 kbps. Terms and definitions 181 P800_UM.book Page 182 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary ISP Internet Service Provider. An organization that provides access to the Internet. JFIF JPEG File Interchange Format. JPEG Joint Photographic Experts Group, best known for the .JPG format for still image compression. MBM Multiple Bit Map. Symbian OS bitmap format. MeT Mobile Electronic Transactions. An initiative founded by Ericsson, Nokia and Motorola to establish a secure and consistent framework for mobile transactions. MIDI MIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol designed for recording and playing back music on digital synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal computer sound cards. MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions. A protocol defining how messages are sent on the internet. For example, MIME is used to describe how attachments are encoded and what type of data they contain. MMS Multimedia Messaging Service. Logical extension of SMS and EMS. MMS defines a service enabling sound, images and video to be combined into multimedia messages. It supports photo quality pictures, and sounds in WAV, MIDI, AMR, or Melodies format. MP3 MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3 is a standard technology and format for compression a sound sequence into a very small file (about one-

twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the original level of sound quality when it is played. 182 Terms and definitions P800_UM.book Page 183 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM MPEG-4 The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under the auspices of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). MPEG-4 goes far beyond compression methods: Instead of treating the data as continuous streams, MPEG-4 deals with audio/video objects that can be manipulated independently, allowing for interaction with the coded data and providing flexibility in editing. MPEG-4 supports a wide range of audio and video modes and transmission speeds. It also deals with intellectual property and protection issues. OS Operating System, such as Symbian OS, Linux, Microsoft Windows. OTA Over The Air. A technology for transmission and reception of application related configuration information in a wireless communications system. PC Personal Computer. PCS Personal Communications Services, often used to describe GSM 1900 networks. Preliminary PDF Portable Document Format. A format created by Adobe for storing and distributing documents. Phone book A memory in the SIM card where phone numbers can be stored and accessed by name or position. PIM Personal Information Management. Generic term for applications such as Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, and so on. PIN A PIN is a personal identification number. PINs are commonly assigned to bank customers for use with automatic cash dispensers. They are also used, sometimes with a security token, for individual access to computer networks or other secure systems. POP3 Post Office Protocol 3 is a standard client/server protocol for receiving e-mail. The e-mail is received and held for you by your Internet server. Periodically, you (or your client e-mail receiver) can check your mail-box on the server and download any mail. QQVGA Quarter Quarter VGA, 160 x 120 pixels. Terms and definitions 183 P800_UM.book Page 184 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary QVGA Quarter VGA size, typically refers to a portrait oriented screen 240 pixels wide x 320 pixels high. PDA Personal Digital Assistant. A handheld computer having functions such as address book, calendar, and so on. PNG Portable Network Graphics. Format for storing images on file with data compression but without lowering of quality (loss of information). Protocol In information technology, a protocol is the special set of rules that end points in a telecommunication connection use when they communicate. Protocols exist at several levels in a telecommunication connection. RS232 A standard for serial transmission between computers and peripheral devices SGML A generic markup language for representing documents. SC Service Centre (for SMS). Service Provider A company that provides services and subscriptions to mobile phone users. SIM A SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a smart card, inserted into GSM phones, that contains your telephone account information. SIM cards can also be programmed to display custom menus for personalized services, for instance to assist operators in providing mobile commerce applications. SMIL Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language. Used by MMS to describe how media objects are to be played. SMS Short Message Service. Allows messages of up to 160 characters to be sent and received via the network operator's message centre to a mobile phone. SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. Protocol used to send e-mail from an e-mail client via an SMTP server. SWIM A SWIM card is a SIM card containing a WIM. 184 Terms and definitions P800_UM.book Page 185 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM SyncML SyncML is a universal protocol for data synchronization, developed by the SyncML initiative Ltd. TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. TCP/IP is the basic communication language or protocol of the Internet. It can also be used as a communications protocol in a private network

(either an intranet or an extranet). TLS Transport Layer Security. Used by Web browsers, for example. URL Uniform Resource Locator. Points to a service or information on the internet, for example: http://www.sonyericsson.com USB Universal Serial Bus. A plug-and-play interface between a computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks, keyboards, telephones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new device can be added to your computer without having to add an adapter card or even having to turn the computer off. USSD Unstructured Supplementary Services Data. Narrow-band GSM data service. For example entering M79M1234# might return the stock price for stock 1234. Preliminary vCal; vCalendar vCalendar defines a transport and platform-independent format for exchanging calendar and scheduling information for use in PIMs/PDAs and group schedulers. vCalendar is specified by IETF. vCard vCard automates the exchange of personal information typically found on a traditional business card, for use in applications such as internet mail, voice mail, Web browsers, telephony applications, call centres, video conferencing, PIMs /PDAs, pagers, fax, office equipment, and smart cards. vCard is specified by IETF. VGA Video Graphics Array. Graphics standard introduced by IBM, having a resolution of 640 x 480 pixels. VPN Virtual Private Network. A private network that is configured within a public network. A VPN appear as private national or international network to the customer, but physically shares a backbone trunk with other customers. VPNs enjoy the security of a private network via access control and encryption, while taking advantage of the economies of scale and built-in management facilities of large public networks. Today, there is tremendous interest in VPNs over the Internet, especially due to the constant threat of hacker attacks. Terms and definitions 185 P800_UM.book Page 186 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary WAP Wireless Application Protocol is a specification for a set of communication protocols to standardize the way that wireless devices, such as cellular telephones and radio transceivers, can be used for Internet access, including e-mail, the World Wide Web, newsgroups, and Internet Relay Chat (IRC). Wav A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav). WBXML Wireless Binary Extensible Markup Language. WIM The Wireless Identity Module is a data module for electronic identity certificates. It can contain both trusted and client certificates, private keys and algorithms needed for WTLS handshaking, encryption, decryption, and signature generation. The WIM module can be placed on a SIM card, called a SWIM card. WML Wireless Markup Language. A markup language used for authoring services, fulfilling the same purpose as HyperText Markup Language (HTML) does on the World Wide Web

(WWW). In contrast to HTML, WML is designed to fit small handheld devices. WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security. Part of WAP, WTLS provides privacy, data integrity and authentication on transport layer level between two applications. W3C The main standards body for the WWW. xHTML Extensible Hypertext Markup Language. A reformulation of HTML 4.01 in XML. Being XML, means that XHTML can be viewed, edited, and validated with standard XML tools. At the same time, it operates as well as or better than HTML 4 in existing HTML 4 conforming user agents. XML Extensible Markup Language. An initiative from the W3C defining an extremely simple dialect of SGML suitable for use on the WWW. 186 Terms and definitions P800_UM.book Page 187 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Technical data General Product name P800 Size Weight System and power class SIM Card Operating System Processor User storage Battery life, standard battery Operating temperature Standard version, latin character set 117 x 59 x 27 mm 158 grams with battery and flip, 148 grams with battery, flip removed. E-GSM 900 Class 4 GSM 1800 Class 1 GSM 1900 Class 1 Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type Symbian OS v7.0 with UIQ user interface and applications environment ARM 9 For settings, user data (for example images, contacts, messages) and third party applications: 12Mbyte Talk Time: up to 13 hours Stand-by time: up to 400 hours 15 to +55 C Preliminary Screen Screen type Screen size Pixel size Colour resolution Screen surface Illumination TFT Flip closed: 208 x 144 pixels, 40 x 28 mm Flip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm 0.192 x 0.192 mm, or 132 ppi (Pixels Per Inch) 12-bit (4096 colours) Touch-sensitive Front-light Integrated CommuniCam Picture Size Colour depth Storage format 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA) 24 bit (16 million colours) JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression) levels, user-

selectable. Technical data 187 P800_UM.book Page 188 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Picture viewer Integrated browser Formats Sharing via JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, WBMP IR, Bluetooth wireless technology, MMS message, e-mail, PC file transfer Markup languages Video player File Format

.MP4 (MPEG4) Audio player File Format

.MP3, WAV, AU, G-MIDI and AMR Bluetooth wireless technology Specification Coverage area Version 1.1. Up to 10 metres (33 feet) Infrared transceiver Data transmission rate Max speed between phone and IrDA device (that is PC, another phone): up to 115,200 bps WAP version Scripting Style sheets Images Security WIM Cache HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a small screen device) WML 1.2.1 WBXML xHTML Basic xHTML Mobile Profile cHTML 2.0 Compiled WML scripts WCSS WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG WTLS Class 1, 2, 3 TLS/SSL WIM interface including SIM-WIM

(SWIM) 15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default. 188 Technical data P800_UM.book Page 189 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM A Accented letters 31 Accepted callers 48 Accepting new Internet or Messages settings 160 Accounts tab 130 Activating Bluetooth wireless technology 152 Activating the infrared port 151 Add to contacts 47 Adding and removing certificates 127 Adding images to your Contacts 122 Advice of Charge (AoC) 41 Alarm tones and sound notification 123 Alarms 118 Alerts 141 AoC - Call meter settings 49 Application icons 20 Application shortcuts 23 Applications - Flip closed 9 Applications - Flip open 10 Applications in flip closed mode 24 Area information 67 Audio player 188 Auto retrying 42 Automatically set up service provider and messaging 160 B Background Image 24 Backing up data 157 Preliminary Banking services 44 Basic tab 145 Battery 12 Battery insertion and removal 12 Beaming 19 Before using Messages 60 Blinks red 170 Blocked contact card provider 168 Bluetooth 124 Bluetooth wireless technology 188 Bookmark view 75 Browser view 71 C Cable 126 Calibrate 128 Calibration 28 Call handling 37, 39 Call log 41 Call waiting 48 Calling cards 49 Card blocked unblock? 168 Care instructions 17 CBS tab 140 Certificate manager 126 Change code 35 Change phone volume 44 Changing your application shortcuts 121 189 P800_UM.book Page 190 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Charging the battery 13 Chess 89 Closing applications 25 Common functions 18 Conference calls 42 Configuration of PC software 154 Connecting 164 Connecting and disconnecting from the Internet 68 Connecting the accessories 15 Connecting to an Internet account 165 Connection information 166 Connection type 159 Connection via Bluetooth wireless technology 151 Connection via cable 151 Connection via infrared port 151 Context sensitive menus 72 Copying/pasting number 40 Creating and editing notes 87 CSD connections 164 Customize the calendar 81 D Delay timer 94 Demo application 16 Detail view 97, 100, 105, 109 Detail view - Archive 112 Detail view - Document 110 Detail view - Drawing 112 190 Detail view - Spreadsheets 111 Device lock 35, 169 Dial-Up 159 Different views 79 Disconnecting and connecting 66 Display 127 Displaying calls 41 Displaying the Area Code in the Standby Screen 121 Does not blink 170 Downloading 65 Downloading e-mails automatically 66 Downloading tracks 102 Draft 60 Drawing pictures 86 E E-mail 64 Email tab 137 Emergency calls 43 Emergency calls only 169 Ending a call when another call is on hold 42 Entering text - Flip open 29 Entering text in flip closed mode 25 Exchanging sound recordings 93 Extended characters 32 F Fax calls 169 File list view 100 P800_UM.book Page 191 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Find 18 Finding messages 68 First time start-up 16 Flight mode 45, 47 Flip closed - overview 22 Flip closed mode 50 Flip closed shortcuts 128 Flip open 27 Flip open mode 52 Flip removed 129 Folders 18 Folders in Messages 60 Format 117 Format disk 129 Format tab 144 Forward calls 47 From a PC 148 From the smartphone 149 Functions specific for different document types 109 G General 187 General functions 40, 108 Get and send 67 Getting help 20 GPRS 159 GPRS - data logs 166 GPRS data log 166 Preliminary GPRS status information 166 GSM Networks 49 H Handsfree 47 Handwriting recognition 30 Hints and smart functions 43 How to use 61 I Icon views 18 Icons 20, 76 Icons within a page 73 If your service provider or network is unavailable 68 Inbox 60 Incoming call alert 46 Incoming call picture 46 Indicator light 170 Indicators and status bar icons 21 Infrared 129 Infrared transceiver 188 Insert card 168 Inserting symbols 26 Inserting text 26 Installation 147 Installation file security 148 Installing applications 148 Integrated browser 188 Integrated CommuniCam 187 191 P800_UM.book Page 192 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary International 129 Internet account settings 165 Internet accounts 130 Introduction 159 IP security manager 135 J Jog Dial 11 K Key functions 92, 120 Key lock 35 Key symbol 169 Keypad buttons 22 L Language 135 Letters 31 Light 128 List view 96, 99, 104, 108 Local synchronization 154 Locations 118 Lock 128 Lock problems 169 Locks 47 Loop 100 M Making a call with the flip closed 51 Making a call with the flip open 54 192 Making a remote synchronization 156 Making and receiving calls 16 Making sound recordings 92 Managing contacts 55 Managing entries 80 Managing notes 87 Managing play lists 100 Managing task entries 84 Managing the SIM phone book 56 Manually set up a WAP account 162 Manually set up Messages 161 Manually set up service provider 160 Master reset 123, 136 Memory Stick Duo 14 Memory Stick Duo Adapter 14 Memory/Disk full 170 Menu options in detail view 51 Menu options in detail view and edit view 54 Menu options in list view 50, 53 Menu options in SIM phone book 51 Menu options in SIM phone book list view 53 Menus 50, 52, 72, 76 Messaging accounts 136 Methods for storing data 19 Missed calls 41 MMS tab 139 Mobile music 99 Multimedia messages 62 P800_UM.book Page 193 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM N Navigation 28 Network indication 41 New Dial-Up or High-Speed Dial-Up account 132 New GPRS account 131 No network 170 Numbers 31, 118 O On-screen keyboard 29 Options in flip closed mode 36 Options in flip open mode 38 Options menu 23 Other tab 135 Outbox 60 P Pairing 152 Passkeys 153 PC connectivity software 151 PC Suite for P800 147 Performing a backup 157 Performing a local synchronization 155 Personal details 54 Phone book manager 57 Picture viewer 188 Pictures 95 PIN & unblocking PUK code 168 PIN2 34 Preliminary Play list view 99 Play Solitaire 90 Power save 128 Preconditions 157 Preferences 45, 95, 100, 105 Preferred Mode (bearer preference) 135 Preferred tab 145 R Receiving a call when another call is on hold 42 Receiving attachments 65 Remote party notifications 42 Remote sync server configuration 156 Remote sync task configuration 156 Remote synchronization 155 Removing and attaching the flip keypad 32 Removing applications in your smartphone 149 Removing information from applications 142 Removing unwanted general files 143 Restoring data 157 Restrict calls 48 Ring signals 122 Rules 90 S Saving changes 82 Saving contact details 68 Saving video clips 106 Screen 71, 75, 187 193 P800_UM.book Page 194 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Preliminary Screen areas 27 Screen limitations 169 Screen saver 128 Secure access 164 Secure tokens 141 Security 125 Security information 127 Selecting and starting applications 25 Sending a contact 57 Sending a note 87 Sending and moving task entries 84 Sending and receiving pictures 97 Sending attachments 65 Sending e-mail 64 Sent 60 Serial settings 151 Service provider 159 Services 15 Session data 167 Setting a background picture 121 Setting a Screen Saver 121 Setting up WAP accounts 162 Settings 57, 77, 85, 90 Set-up 44 Signing documents 74 Silent mode 43 SIM card lock 34 SIM card related problems 168 194 Smartphone locks 33 Smartphone outline 8 SMS tab 139 Solitaire 90 Sony Image Station 98 Sorting your files 19 Speakerphone 43 Special characters 44 Speed dial numbers 44 Standby view 23 Start problems 168 Status bar 24 Storage manager 142 Synchronized e-mails 66 System sounds 143 T Text input 143 Text messages including EMS features 61 The accounts in Messages 61 The Dial-Up Networking Wizard 163 The SIM card 12 The smartphone package 7 Time & date 143 Time & date tab 144 Time and date 116 To delete a contact 52 Transfer items with Send As 153 P800_UM.book Page 195 Wednesday, August 28, 2002 4:19 PM Type of certificate 127 U Understand the game 90 Uninstalling applications 143 User authentication request 74 User greeting 144 Using sound recordings as ring signals 93 Using Tasks 83 Using the calendar 79 Using the camera 94 Using your smartphone as a modem 162 V Video player 188 Virtual flip 26 Virtual flip open mode 33 Voice control 46 Voice mail 43, 49 W Wallpaper 127 WAP accounts 145 WAP and OTA provisioning messages 77 WIM Access 74 WIM management 145 Workdays 117 Workdays tab 144 Writing e-mails 64 Preliminary Writing text notes 86 Wrong PIN 168 Z Zooming 18 195

 

 

P800_UM.book Page 1 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM P800 Users manual Editorial Comment:Sidan grs eventuellt som omslaget, men i svart/vitt. Kolla om Lund har gjort liknande manualer sedan R380. 1 European Union standards The symbol on our products signifies that they have been certified according to the EMC directive 89/336/EEC, the Tele-

communications directive 91/263/EEC, and the Low Voltage directive 73/23/EEC when applicable. The products fulfil the requirements according to the following standards:

Cellular Phones and Accessories in Combination:

ETS 300 342-1 EMC for European digital cellular telecommuni-

cations. Accessories Without Direct Connection to a Cellular Phone:

EN 50081 Electromagnetic compatibility, Generic Emission Standard, and EN 50082 Electromagnetic compatibility, Generic Immunity Standard. P800_UM.book Page 2 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Sony Ericsson P800 Users Manual First edition (July 2002) This manual is published by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communica-

tions AB, without any warranty. Improvements and changes to this manual necessitated by typographical errors, inaccuracies of current information, or improvements to programs and/or equip-

ment, may be made by Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB at any time and without notice. Such changes will, however, be incorporated into new editions of this manual. All rights reserved. Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, 2002 Publication number:

Users Manual EN/LZT 108 6039 P1A INNOVATRON PATENTS Note Some of the services in this manual are not supported by all networks. This also applies to the GSM International Emergency Number 112. Please contact your network operator or service provider if you are in doubt whether you can use a particular service or not. 2 P800_UM.book Page 3 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Contents Overview over the smartphone ..................................... 8 Description of the smartphone............................................ 8 How to use the user documentation.................................... 8 The smartphones functions................................................ 8 Care instructions................................................................. 8 Getting Started .............................................................. 9 Checklist ............................................................................. 9 Assembly ............................................................................ 9 The SIM card.................................................................... 10 Battery .............................................................................. 10 Operational modes............................................................ 12 Phone buttons ................................................................... 13 First time startup............................................................... 15 Demo application.............................................................. 15 Making and receiving calls............................................... 15 Available services............................................................. 15 Memory Stick ................................................................... 16 Phone locks ................................................................. 18 SIM card lock ................................................................... 18 Device lock....................................................................... 19 Change code ..................................................................... 19 Icons ............................................................................ 20 Application icons.............................................................. 20 Indicators and status bar icons.......................................... 20 Preliminary General icons ................................................................... 21 General functions........................................................ 22 Sources (this section will be removed)............................ 22 Entering text - Flip open .................................................. 22 Icon views........................................................................ 25 Folders ............................................................................. 25 Zooming........................................................................... 25 Find .................................................................................. 25 Sorting your files ............................................................. 26 Beaming........................................................................... 26 Methods for storing data.................................................. 26 Getting help...................................................................... 27 Flip closed - overview ................................................ 28 Sources (this section will be removed)............................ 28 Keypad buttons ................................................................ 29 Making and receiving calls.............................................. 29 Standby view.................................................................... 30 Status bar.......................................................................... 30 Applications in flip closed mode ..................................... 31 Entering text in flip closed mode..................................... 32 Virtual flip........................................................................ 33 Flip open - overview................................................... 34 Sources (this section will be removed)............................ 34 Description of screen areas.............................................. 35 3 P800_UM.book Page 4 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Navigation......................................................................... 36 Calibration ........................................................................ 36 Removing and attaching the flip keypad .......................... 36 Telephony.................................................................... 39 Calls .................................................................................. 40 Conference calls................................................................ 44 Emergency calls................................................................ 45 Preferences........................................................................ 45 Hints and smart functions ................................................. 48 GPRS - data logs ......................................................... 50 Connection information.................................................... 50 GPRS status information .................................................. 50 GPRS data log................................................................... 50 Contacts....................................................................... 52 Flip closed mode............................................................... 52 Flip open mode ................................................................. 54 Personal details ................................................................. 56 Placing a call..................................................................... 56 Managing contacts............................................................ 57 Sending contact details ..................................................... 59 Settings ............................................................................. 59 Phone book manager......................................................... 59 Messages ..................................................................... 61 Before using Messages ..................................................... 62 Folders in Messages.......................................................... 62 The accounts in Messages ................................................ 63 4 How to use Messages....................................................... 63 Internet........................................................................ 72 Browser view ................................................................... 73 Bookmark view................................................................ 77 Settings............................................................................. 79 Calendar...................................................................... 81 Sources (this section will be removed) ............................ 81 Using the calendar............................................................ 82 Managing entries.............................................................. 83 Tasks ........................................................................... 85 Sources (this section will be removed) ............................ 85 Using Tasks...................................................................... 85 Managing task entries ...................................................... 86 Sending and moving task entries ..................................... 86 Settings............................................................................. 87 Jotter............................................................................ 88 Writing text notes............................................................. 88 Drawing pictures.............................................................. 88 Creating and editing notes ............................................... 89 Managing notes................................................................ 89 Games ......................................................................... 91 Chess................................................................................ 91 Solitaire............................................................................ 92 Voice memo................................................................ 94 Sources (this section will be removed) ............................ 94 P800_UM.book Page 5 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Recording voice memos ................................................... 94 CommuniCam ............................................................. 96 Sources (this section will be removed)............................. 96 Using the camera .............................................................. 96 Preferences........................................................................ 97 Pictures........................................................................ 98 List view ........................................................................... 98 Detail view........................................................................ 99 Audio player.............................................................. 101 Sources (this section will be removed)........................... 101 List view ......................................................................... 101 Detail view...................................................................... 102 Downloading tracks........................................................ 103 Video player.............................................................. 104 List view ......................................................................... 104 Detail view...................................................................... 105 Saving video clips........................................................... 106 Online services.......................................................... 107 World clock............................................................... 108 Sources (this section will be removed)........................... 108 Time and date ................................................................. 108 Workdays........................................................................ 110 Locations ........................................................................ 110 Numbers.......................................................................... 111 Alarms ............................................................................ 111 Preliminary Calculator.................................................................. 113 Sources (this section will be removed).......................... 113 Personalizing your smartphone................................. 114 Changing your Application Shortcuts............................ 114 Displaying the Area Code in the Standby Screen.......... 114 Setting a background picture ......................................... 114 Setting a Screen Saver ................................................... 114 Adding images to your Contacts.................................... 115 Ring signals.................................................................... 115 Alarm tones and sound notification............................... 116 Master Reset .................................................................. 116 Control panel ............................................................ 117 Bluetooth........................................................................ 117 Cable .............................................................................. 119 Certificate manager........................................................ 119 Display........................................................................... 121 Flip closed shortcuts ...................................................... 122 Flip removed.................................................................. 122 Format disk .................................................................... 122 Infrared........................................................................... 122 International................................................................... 123 Internet accounts............................................................ 123 IP security manager ....................................................... 128 Language........................................................................ 128 Master reset.................................................................... 129 Messaging accounts ....................................................... 129 Secure tokens ................................................................. 135 5 P800_UM.book Page 6 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Storage manager ............................................................. 135 System sounds ................................................................ 136 Text input........................................................................ 136 Time & date .................................................................... 136 User greeting................................................................... 137 WAP accounts ................................................................ 138 WIM management .......................................................... 138 Installing programs.................................................... 140 Sources (this section will be removed)........................... 140

........................................................................................ 140 PC Suite for P800 ........................................................... 140 Installing programs in your smartphone......................... 141 Removing programs in your smartphone ....................... 142 Connecting to other devices ...................................... 144 Sources (this section will be removed)........................... 144 Connection via cable....................................................... 145 Connection via infrared port........................................... 145 Connection via Bluetooth ............................................... 146 Transfer items with Send As........................................... 147 Synchronization......................................................... 148 Sources (this section will be removed)........................... 148

........................................................................................ 148 Local synchronization..................................................... 148 Remote synchronization ................................................. 150 Making a remote synchronization .................................. 151 Backing up data .............................................................. 151 6 Restoring data ................................................................ 152 Getting started with Internet and Messages.............. 153 Introduction.................................................................... 153 Automatically set up service provider and Messaging .. 154 Manually set up service provider................................... 154 Manually set up Messages ............................................. 155 Setting up WAP accounts .............................................. 156 Using your smartphone as a modem.............................. 156 Secure Access ................................................................ 158 Trouble shooting....................................................... 161 Blocked contact card provider ....................................... 161 Card blocked unblock? .................................................. 161 Emergency calls only..................................................... 161 Indicator light................................................................. 162 Blinks red....................................................................... 162 Insert card....................................................................... 162 Key symbol .................................................................... 162 Memory/Disk full........................................................... 162 No network..................................................................... 163 Phone locked.................................................................. 163 Start problems ................................................................ 163 Guidelines for safe and efficient use......................... 164 Limited warranty............................................................ 168 Terms and definitions ............................................... 172 Quick guide for common tasks ................................. 179 P800_UM.book Page 7 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Technical Specifications ........................................... 180 Demo Application ..................................................... 192 Document Viewer ..................................................... 194 Video player.............................................................. 202 Preliminary 7 P800_UM.book Page 8 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Overview over the smartphone function descriptions settings overview personalizing Useful and important information Help texts connection Internet and messaging The smartphones functions xx Care instructions You have bought a very advanced smartphone. To learn to use all the smartphone features you should read this chapter now and not wait until next week. Description of the smartphone Look at the smartphone as a computer where you have the possibility to install new software How to use the user documentation The user documentation helps you to understand and make use of the smartphone and, abow all, to find all the functions. The documentation consists of the following parts:

Users manual. Help texts in the smartphone. Complementary information on the Internet. Users manual 8 P800_UM.book Page 9 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Getting Started This chapter gives you a quick overview of the main functions in your smartphone and how to get started. Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Users manual smartphone UI Design Spec, UI Fundamentals, 31/196 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Design Spec, Startup Wizard UI, 35/196 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A Checklist Your smartphone package includes:

1 Smartphone with stylus 1 Battery 1 Travel charger 1 Deskstand with USB cable 1 Headset Preliminary 1 Pouch and strap 3 Extra stylus 1 Cover - flip replacement 1 Memory Stick Duo 1 Memory Stick Duo Adaptor 1 Users Manual package 2 CDs, PC Suite for P800 and Multimedia for P800 Note If your package does not include all the listed items above, please contact your reseller. Assembly Before you can use your smartphone you need to:

Note Always turn off the phone and detach the charger before you insert or remove a SIM card. insert the SIM card attach and charge the battery. 9 d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t r a S g n t i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G P800_UM.book Page 10 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary The SIM card When you register as a subscriber with a network operator, you get a SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card. The SIM card contains a computer chip that keeps track of your phone number, the services included in your subscription, and your phone book information, among other things. A 4-digit PIN (Personal Identity Number) code is supplied with the SIM card from your operator and must be entered when powering on your smartphone. The SIM card is placed in the silvery holders under the battery. 10 Tip You can also store SIM card data, such as contacts, in the phones own memory and on Memory Stick. It is possible to export/import data between these media. Battery The battery that comes with your smartphone may not be charged. You should charge the battery for at least 4 hours before you use it for the first time. Should you need to discharge the battery, simply use your smartphone as usual until the battery runs out of power. Charge the battery by using the charger supplied with your smartphone. You can also use some battery chargers that have been supplied with other Ericsson mobile phones using the same connector plug, e.g. T28, R320s. Warning! Avoid direct sunlight. Extremely high temperatures reduce the capacity of the battery permanently. Avoid recharging a full or almost full battery. Battery insertion and removal To insert the battery 1. Ensure that the flip is closed. 2. Place the battery into the battery compartment and close the lid. P800_UM.book Page 11 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To remove the battery 1. Ensure that your smartphone is turned off. Warning! It is important that you always turn off your smartphone before removing the battery. Failure to do so can result in loss of information. 2. Remove the battery lid by pulling down the release catch, then take away the battery. Charging the battery Warning! The mains (power) supply plug may look different depending on the mains socket in your country. Do not connect the AC-plug-in unit to any other item than your Sony Ericsson Travel Charger or other compatible Sony Ericsson/Ericsson chargers with the same plug. Preliminary To charge the battery 1. Make sure the battery is attached to your smartphone and the lid is closed. 2. Connect the charger to your smartphone as follows:

The flash symbol on the plug must face upwards. Locate the flash symbol by the smartphones connector. Tilt the charger plug contacts slightly downwards when inserting into the smartphone connector, then move the plug downwards so that it fits securely with the smartphone connector. 11 d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t r a S g n t i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G Operational modes The three main operational modes are:

Flip closed (FC mode) Flip open or off (FO mode) Flip removed (FR mode) These operational modes are interchangeable where tasks often can be started with the flip closed and, if required, continued in the more comprehensive flip open mode. Although the manual covers the modes of operation in detail, it is very important to remember that many of the functions described are dependant on them being available from your network operator and internet service provider. Please consult your network operator and internet service provider for more information about the services that are available to you. P800_UM.book Page 12 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 3. Connect the charger to the mains Charging is indicated by the battery meter on the display pulsing continuously, and the indicator on top of the smartphone, showing a steady red light (or green, if the smartphone is switched on). Note When the battery is completely discharged, or new, it may take up to 30 minutes before the battery charging icon appears in the display. 4. Wait approximately 4 hours or until the battery meter on the display is full and the indicator on the top of the smartphone shows a steady green light. Note Non-Ericsson batteries are charged slowly for safety reasons. 5. Remove the charger by tilting the plug upwards and away. When the battery needs to be charged, a beep is heard, the indicator light (on the top of your smartphone) blinks red and a battery low message appears in the display. The battery can be charged whenever you wish without affecting the smartphones performance. However, this lengthens the charging time. Note The smartphone automatically switches off if the voltage is too low. 12 Preliminary Function Shutter realease for the camera Activates the internet browser Button C Camera button D Internet button C D P800_UM.book Page 13 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Phone buttons A B Button A Jog Dial B On/Off Function Navigating through menus and more, see separate description below Turns the smartphone on or off 13 d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t r a S g n t i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G P800_UM.book Page 14 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Action Pull toward Function Flip closed: Always brings up the Options Menu. Flip open: Scrolls to the right across the Main Application Tabs at the top. Up Down Inward Away Toward Function Scrolls up items in a list;

Adjusts volume during a call;

Moves back a page when playing an MMS. Scrolls down items in a list;

Adjusts volume during a call;

Moves forward a page when playing an MMS. Flip closed: Generally does the same as the OK Key which is select/action Flip open: Select a highlighted item. Dials selected phone number. Flip open: This action always has the same action as the Back button thus goes back to previous screen, dismisses dialogues, it will send a busy signal to the user when receiving an incoming call, it does not end a call. Flip closed: Push away scrolls to the left across the Main Application Tabs at the top. Jog Dial Action Rotate up Rotate down Push inward Keep pushing inward Push away 14 P800_UM.book Page 15 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM First time startup When the smartphone is switched on for the first time a program, the setup wizard, will be started automatically. The wizard will guide you through a set of essential settings, see below. Follow the instructions on the screen. The different steps in the setup wizard 1. You will be prompted to open the flip. 2. Information on the wizard. 3. Calibrating the screen. 4. Setting the location. 5. Setting date, time and formats. 6. More information about the Jog Dial, text entry and status bar. 7. Setup complete. Demo application The Demo application demonstrates some of the most common functions in your smartphone. Start Demo by tapping Applications > Demo in flip open mode. Preliminary Making and receiving calls To make a call 1. Press the On/Off button to power on your smartphone, keep the flip closed. 2. Enter your PIN when the dialog box appears and press OK, press C to erase a digit. 3. Enter the area code and phone number, and press the Jog Dial or OK to make the call. To end a call 1. Press the Jog Dial or OK to end the call. To receive a call 1. Press the Jog Dial or OK to answer an incoming call. Available services Some services and functions described in this users guide are network- or subscription-dependent. Because of this, all menus may not be available in your smartphone. This symbol or subscription-dependent. Please consult your network operator for more information about your subscription. indicates that a service or function is network-

15 d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t r a S g n t i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G P800_UM.book Page 16 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Memory Stick With the Sony Memory Stick you can easily save still images, music, voice and computer data and applications. If your phone memory runs low, you can transfer the content from the phone memory to the Sony Memory Stick. The content on the Sony Memory Stick can in turn be transferred to other Sony Memory Stick compatible products, e.g. digital cameras. LOCK 16 Inserting Memory Stick 1. Remove the stylus. 2. Insert the Memory Stick in the slot, the connector side facing you, see the picture above. Make sure it is securely inserted, a click sound should be heard. Warning! Improper insertion may damage your smartphone and the Memory Stick. Removing the Memory Stick 1. Remove the stylus. 2. Press the edge of the Memory Stick using your finger nail or the stylus. Note Be careful when removing the Memory Stick so it does not fly away. Memory Stick Adaptor Use the Memory Stick Adaptor when using your Memory Stick Duo in a device (e.g. camera, MP3 player) equipped with a regular sized Memory Stick. Insert your Memory Stick Duo according to the picture on the adaptor. P800_UM.book Page 17 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Warning! Do not insert Memory Stick Adaptor into a Memory Stick slot without Memory Stick Duo. This may cause a damage to the product. Please make sure adaptors connector side is inserted first. For more information about Sony Memory Stick, see www.memorystick.com Preliminary 17 d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G d e t r a S g n t i t t e G d e t t r a S g n i t t e G P800_UM.book Page 18 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Phone locks The smartphone is provided with a variety of phone locks to prevent unauthorized use. These locks are released by codes that will be displayed as asterisks (*) when you enter them. The smartphone will ask you to enter the codes when necessary. Note You can usually make an emergency call without unlocking the smartphone. SIM card lock The SIM card lock protects your SIM card, not the smartphone, against unauthorised use. It is unlocked by the PIN and PUK codes. You can find both your PIN code and PUK code in the documentation you got together with your SIM card. (PIN stands for Personal Identification Number and PUK for Personal Unblock code.) Your PIN code consists usually of four digits. The smartphone will ask for the PIN code when you start it. To activate the SIM card lock 1. Select Phone> Edit> Preferences> Locks 2. Tap Change Codes and select what code you want to change. 3. Enter the new code You may choose to having the code activated; everytime you power on the smartphone, or just when a new SIM card is inserted. An error message informs you if wrong PIN code is entered. Usually after three wrong attempts (SIM card dependant) the SIM card will be locked and you need to enter the PUK code to unlock it. The PUK code usually consists of 10 digits. When you have entered the right PUK code you must enter a new PIN code. You have ten attempts to enter the PUK code. If all ten attempts fail the SIM card will be blocked and you need to contact your network operator who will unblock it. You cannot change the PUK code. PIN2 Some functions can be protected by a secondary code feature. This is useful when several people uses the smartphone but only one person is administrator. PIN2 are managed in the same way as PIN. 18 s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P P800_UM.book Page 19 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Device lock The Device lock protects your smartphone against unauthorised use. When this lock is activated the smartphone asks you to enter the code to unlock the smartphone before you can use it. If someone steals your smartphone and put another SIM card in it, it cannot be used. To activate or change the Device lock 1. Choose Phone> Edit> Preferences> Locks. You can lock your smartphone to prevent other people from using it. Use the locks for the SIM card and/or the device to protect your smartphone from unauthorized use. Change code To change a code 1. Select Phone> Edit> Preferences> Locks. 2. Tap Change Codes 3. Select the code you want to change. 4. First enter the old code, then the new one. (You have to enter the new code twice to be sure you typed it correct.) Automatic key lock This option locks the keys on your smartphone. This is to protect the keys for accidentally been pressed. Preliminary 19 s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P s k c o l e n o h P P800_UM.book Page 14 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Icons Beskriva syftet med kapitlet:

Hitta ikoner som inte r sjlvklara Application icons An application icon starts its program when you tap it. Below are the default application icons that you can see in the screen when the flip is closed, or in the application picker when the flip is open. A list of the other application icons can you see in the application launcher. Application Calendar Contacts Call list Messages Internet Application launcher Icon 14 Icon Application Indicators and status bar icons These icons appears in the flip closed standby screen or in the status bar when the flip is open. They indicate status for several functions or that something has happened, for example, the smartphone has received a text message. When the flip is open, you can often tap the icons to get more detailed information or start an application, for example, open the keyboard. Icon Function Signal strength Battery strength A new e-mail message has been received. Speakerphone mode is on. P800_UM.book Page 15 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Icon Function Tap the keyboard to open the virtual keybord. General icons Kort beskrivning av vad general icons r. Icon Function Preliminary s n o c I s n o c I s n o c I s n o c I 15 P800_UM.book Page 22 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary General functions This chapter describes a number of general functions that are the same for many applications in your smartphone. For example, how to enter text, find and organise data and how to get help. Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Users manual R380s UI Design Spec, UI Fundamentals, 31/195 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A Entering text - Flip open This section describes how to enter text in flip open mode. See the chapter Flip closed - overview on how to enter text in flip closed mode. There are two ways of entering text with the flip open:

The on-screen keyboard found at the bottom of the screen. Handwriting recognition directly on the screen using the stylus. See the handwriting recognition card on how to write. 22 On-screen keyboard In text edit mode, tap the keyboard icon and then select characters. Tap Done when ready. Calendar Edit Unfiled Weekly meeting Type Appointment Date 08/01/2002 The agenda for... Done t 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 y u i o p q w e r l cap s d f g h j a k z x c v b n m . aeo 123 abc

P800_UM.book Page 23 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM You can choose between three types of keyboard layouts with different character sets. Down left, tap one of the following buttons:

abc - standard characters

- international characters 123 - numeric characters and currencies Current input field is shown to the left in the top bar of the keyboard. Tap arrows or rotate Jog Dial to change input field. The keyboard top bar also contains a drop-down menu with Cut, Copy and Paste. When copying or cutting the text must be selected first. Handwriting recognition Handwriting recognition translates stylus gestures into letters, numbers or other characters, and displays these caracters as text. Handwriting recognition is only active when needed - that is, when focus is currently on a text control in an application view or in a dialog that needs an text entry. Preliminary s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l The text mode screen is divided in an upper and a lower part divided by an arrow in the middle of the right edge. Write lower case letters below the arrow and upper case in line with it. Numbers are written above the arrow. Note Most letters can be written in alternate styles, see tables below. The style itself does not matter when writing upper- or lowercase, it is the position of the screen that decides whether it will be upper case or lower case. 23 a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G P800_UM.book Page 24 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Letters Lower case letters are written on the lower part of the screen, below the arrow and upper case letters in line with the arrow. a b c d e f g h i j k l m 24 2 1 2 2 1 1 2 1 2 n o p q r s t u v w x 1 y z 2 Period comma apostrophe question exclamation ampersand at double quote tab space backspace carriage return Accented letters Write the character as described above, then write the accent on the upper part of the screen, above the arrow. Numbers Numbers are written on the upper part of the screen, above the arrow. 0 1 Period

or

8 9

) 2 3 4 5 6 7 Comma dash tilde backspace tab P800_UM.book Page 25 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Extended characters Write the character above the arrow, then insert the character l

(written from bottom to top) before writing the extended character. See the Handwriting recognition help topic for information on how to write these characters. Icon views The smartphone can present the applications in two ways:

List view (small icons appears in one column) Icon biew (large icons in two columns) Folders On the right of the menu bar is the folders menu. Folders are used to organize user data, e.g. contacts, jotter entries, task lists, into user definable sets. Each application has its own set of folders: a folder created in one application is not visible in another. In list view, the folder menu is used to organize your entries. In detail view, the folder menu allows you to change the folder of the current item. Preliminary Every item created in an application is always assigned to a single folder by default the Unfiled folder. There are three recommended folders for most applications: Unfiled, Personal, and Business. In list view, there is a super-folder called All which, when selected, displays items from all folders. All is the default value in list views and when an application is first launched. You can add folders or change the names of existing folders through the Edit Folders menu item. A folder can only be deleted if it is empty. Not all folders can be deleted. Zooming You can change the size of the screen fonts between Small, Medium or Large. From the menu bar, select Edit > Zoom. Find Find searches through all the items stored in an application. The standard Find dialog contains a single text edit box with two buttons, Find and Cancel. Tapping Find starts the search, Cancel closes the Find dialog. In some applications, for example Messaging, Find may be more complicated:

25 s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G P800_UM.book Page 26 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary the size of each message is so large that you may want to restrict the search to the current message only. folders are potentially more significant, so you may want to restrict the search to the current folder only. Sorting your files You can sort the files you have stored in your smartphone. By sorting your files, you choose in which order you want the files to be displayed on the screen. You can choose between four different ways:

Sort by type: The different file types are sorted together in the list. Sort by size: The largest file size, in kB, is displayed at the top of the list, and the smallest at the bottom of the list. Sort by date: The latest file you saved in your smartphone is displayed at the top of the list. Sort by name: The files are displayed in alphabetical order, from top to bottom. Note Sort is not valid for all applications. 26 Beaming It is very convenient to be able to exchange data using infrared or Bluetooth beaming between two devices that supports the exchange standards. For example, one user selects an item in the Pictures application and then enters the menu Pictures > Send as > IR, and the two users align their machines. The receiving user usually does not have to initiate anything provided that infrared/Bluetooth is enabled.. As a precaution, however, the receiving user does have the opportunity to accept or reject the item sent and has the option to view it after saving. Save saves the object into the destination application and then optionally opens the application to show the object just saved. Methods for storing data Your smartphone can store data in three different ways:

SIM card (Only for phone numbers and associated names) Phone memory (12 MB of capacity for storing pictures, messages, music, programs etc.) Memory Stick (Expansion memory. There are several alternatives with different amount of memory on the market.) P800_UM.book Page 27 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Getting help From the menu bar select Edit > Help or View > Help to get to the inbuilt help system. The help system uses two views:

The Topics view shows all available topics, e.g. both topics connected to a specific application and general topics. The Detail view presents the title and text of a single topic. The Topics view allows you to select a topic, which opens the detail view/Text view and displays the selected topic. You can also set the zoom level and exit the Help system. Also, in many dialog boxes it is possible to tap the help icon in the upper right corner to get help. Preliminary s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G s n o i t c n u f l a r e n e G 27 P800_UM.book Page 28 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Flip closed - overview This chapter describes how your smartphone works with the flip closed. With the flip closed (FC mode) the smartphone behaves very much like an ordinary mobile telephone. The screen is not touch sensitive when the flip is closed;

therefore you can only operate the smartphone by the buttons. Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Users manual R380s UI Design Spec, UI Fundamentals, 31/195 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Design Spec, UI Status Bar, 27/196 05-CRH 162 02 UI, Rev A UI Design Spec, UI Standby, 30/196 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Design Spec, UI FC Text Entry, 18/196 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A 28 P800_UM.book Page 29 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Keypad buttons Button / Key Function OK Enter selected function. BACK Exits present application and returns to previous menu. CLEAR Erase entered characters/digits from the display Erase an entire row of entered characters/digits,

one by one. press and hold. Disconnect the microphone (mute function) when a call is in progress, press and hold. Mute the ring signal during an incoming call. Put the smartphone into silent mode, when in the standby mode press and hold. OPTIONS MENU The menu offers different options for different applications. Long press opens Applications. ASTERISK Enter the character *. Enter a p (pause) character if held down. Toggles between different input modes (Abc, 123 ... ) if held down. Preliminary Button / Key Function HASH / @

Enter the character #. Brings up a list with special characters if held down. Terminate the input of pin and security codes. Recall a phone number from the SIM card phone book (enter the number of the memory position and then press #) NUMERIC KEYS Enter the digits 0 to 9. Enter associated characters or perform an associated function, for example:

the 0 key, when held down, enters the international character '+'

The 1 key, when held down dials your voice mail. Enter a short-cut to a Phone book entry, press and hold. Making and receiving calls To make a call 1. Enter the area code and phone number, and press the Jog Dial or OK to make the call. To end a call 1. Press the Jog Dial or OK. 29 i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F P800_UM.book Page 30 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To receive a call Press the Jog Dial or OK to answer an incoming call. Note Phone calls can also be made with the flip open/off, see the chapter Telephony for more information. Standby view When powering on your smartphone the standby view is displayed. This view is displayed only in flip closed mode and contains configurable shortcuts (see the section Application shortcuts below) to other applications. Also, when closing the flip you always return to the standby view. There are five application shortcuts in the standby view. Selected application is highlighted and its name is shown bottom left of the screen above the OK key. Press Jog Dial or OK key to start the application 30 There are also 6 icon positions, 3 at each side of the screen, for temporary indicators such as missed calls and unread messages. Options menu Press the menu button or pull the Jog Dial towards to open the standby options menu to get access to keylock, battery status, missed calls and more. Application shortcuts It is very convenient to have shortcuts to the applications you use most frequently in the standby view. Change the shortcuts in the following meny in flip open mode:

Control panel > Device > Flip closed shortcuts Wallpaper You can change the wallpaper in flip open mode, go to Control panel > Device > Display. Tip More wallpapers can be found on the Multimedia for P800 CD, delivered with your smartphone. Status bar The status bar on top of the screen displays:

Signal strength. Varies from very low to full signal. Indicates also the status for your GPRS connection. P800_UM.book Page 31 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 12:02 pm Time. Shows the current time and indicates activated alarms. Battery. Indicates current battery level (zero to four units) and charging status. Note More information about battery status and GPRS can be found in Options menu > Status Applications in flip closed mode Select flip in closed mode. to list all the applications possible to start with the Call list The Call list displays the latest calls either outgoing, incoming or missed. Press the Jog Dial or OK to call selected entry. Activated from the standby view only. Contacts Displays a list of your contacts. Enter selected contact to view associated phone numbers. Then press the Jog Dial or OK to make a call. Preliminary Messages You can read, create, send and delete SMS and MMS messages in this view. Calendar The Calendar view displays entries, if any, for current day. Use the Jog Dial to get more information about selected entry or to change day. Example Tuesday 29 January 11:00 Lunch with A. Eriksson 14:00 Project meeting Tasks Keeps track of your tasks. Set due date, alarm, priority etc. to all your tasks and let your smartphone remind you on time. Jotter Displays a list of stored entries. In detailed view the whole entry can be seen. With the Menu button it is possible to edit or make a new entry via the keypad. It is not possible to make, edit or view a drawing in this mode 31 i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F P800_UM.book Page 32 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Voice Memo Your smartphone can be used like voice recorder. Use the menu button to play, create a new or delete an old memo. CommuniCam In CommuniCam view the screen becomes a viewfinder. Press the Camera button or the Jog Dial to take a photo. Tip Camera button is also a shortcut to CommuniCam application. Online services Your service provider might offer different services reachable from your smartphone. For example: weather forecasts, economical information or newsletters. Contact your service provider for more information. Connections Set the way you communicate to your PC or other device. Select between infrared, bluetooth and cable. In the cable menu you also select whether the smartphone is about to operate as a modem or not. 32 Selecting and starting Rotate the Jog Dial to select application. In the standby view, selected application becomes coloured and slightly enlarged and the name is shown down to the left of the screen, just above the OK button. Press the Jog Dial or OK on the keypad to start selected application. Tip In pressing its specific number. view, it is also possible to start an application by Closing applications Present application automatically closes and the data is saved when returning to the standby view or switching to another application. wxyz9 Entering text in flip closed mode When pressing a key a pre-edit box with alternate characters is shown on the toolbar:

If the same key is pressed again, next character in the pre-edit box is selected. The C key deletes the character to the left of the cursor. If continuously pressed, the C key deletes several characters and then whole words. Preliminary

. P800_UM.book Page 33 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Inserting text There are four text entry types:

Abc initial upper case letter, the rest lower case. Default for abc lower case entry each new text edit field. 123 numeric entry only ABC upper case entry In text edit mode, press the options menu key and choose Text Options > Input type to select text entry type. A short press on the asterisk key * toggles the input types in text edit mode. Inserting symbols In text edit mode, press the options menu key and choose Text Options > Symbols to select item from the symbol selector table. Use Jog Dial to select row and press OK, then scroll within the row to select symbol and press OK. Virtual flip The virtual flip is to be used when you physically have removed the flip and want to use your smartphone in flip closed mode. The virtual flip gives you the same functionality as the real flip keypad. Enter numbers and characters by using your stylus. Open flip Tap Open flip to go to flip open mode. See the chapter Flip open - overview on page 34 on how to remove the flip and activate the virtual flip. 33 i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c l p i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F i w e v r e v o

d e s o c p l i l F P800_UM.book Page 34 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Flip open - overview This chapter describes what functions are available with the flip open. Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Users manual R380s UI Design Spec, UI Fundamentals, 31/195 05-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Design Spec, UI Status Bar, 27/196 05-CRH 162 02 UI, Rev A 34 P800_UM.book Page 35 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Description of screen areas In the flip open mode the screen is touch sensitive. The screen is divided in a number of areas, see figure and table below. B Menu bar Screen_areas skall in hr Preliminary Usually, contains two menus on the left, and a folder menu on the right. The two left hand menus always have the same form:

the application menu, whose name is always the same as the application, and which contains the system services used by most applications, such as Find, Send as, and Beam. the Edit menu, with editing items such as Cut, Copy, Paste, Zoom, Preferences and Help C Application space The central area of the screen where the Item A Application picker Displays six icons for quick and easy access to the most common applications, customizable. Description D Button bar E Status bar application view is displayed. Applications use this area in a way that is appropriate to the information that they display. Many of the built-in applications are based around 2 standard view layouts: a list view and a detail view Optionally, an application view displays a button bar at the bottom of the application space. Not all application views require a button bar. Displays device status information such as signal strength, battery and device information. Settings for sounds and time. On-screen keyboard. i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F 35 Removing and attaching the flip keypad Removal 1. Use your fingernail to gently lift up and push the cover plate under and away from the keypad, see picture below. Note Be careful with the touch sensible screen. Never use a sharp object like a screw driver. 2 1 P800_UM.book Page 36 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Navigation In flip open mode navigation done using the stylus and tapping selected items and by using the Jog Dial, see the chapter Getting Started on page 9 Calibration The screen is pre-calibrated to factory settings. However, this may not necessarily agree with how you use the stylus. Calibration is calculated by the average stylus tap speed and the location of the stylus tap on selection. To re-calibrate the screen:

1. Select Applications > Control panel > General > Display 2. Tap Calibrate and the calibrate screen appears. 3. Tap once at the centre of each of the three calibration points in numerical order. 4. Tap Yes or No to accept or reject the new settings. To restore the factory settings 1. Select Applications > Control panel > General > Display 2. Tap Calibrate and the calibrate screen appears. 3. Press Jog Dial - the text Factory settings restored is shown and you are taken back to the display screen. 36 P800_UM.book Page 37 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 2. Unlock the catch and lift away the keypad. Preliminary 2. Attach the keypad to the smartphone. 3. Attach the cover plate by first placing the small hooks by the screen and then press on the curved front part until it is securely fixed. Attachment 1. If needed, turn the hinge on the keypad in correct position, see the figure below. 3. Secure the flip by pressing the catch until you hear a click sound. Click 4. Attach the cover plate by first placing the small hooks by the screen and then press on the curved front part until it is securely fixed. i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F i w e v r e v o

n e p o p i l F 37 P800_UM.book Page 38 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Virtual flip open mode The virtual flip is to be used when you physically have removed the flip. Activate this function in Control Panel > Device > Flip removed. is shown on the status bar when virtual flip is activated. Tap it to get to virtual flip closed mode. 38 P800_UM.book Page 39 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Telephony This section describes how to use the smartphone as a telephone. Different possibilities are available:

In Flip closed mode you can dial a number, using the keypad. In Flip open mode you can dial a number, using the virtual keypad. In Flip closed as well as Flip open mode, you can make a call from the contact list. In Flip open mode you can speed dial any of the 9 speed dial numbers, using the special contacts keypad. In Flip closed you can press the number representing the speed dial entry on the keypad. In Flip closed as well as Flip open mode you can call any previously called numbers, using the call list. You may even call by selecting a number included in a SMS or listed in an application. Preliminary End call. Hold call. Add to contacts (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and not found in the contacts database). Show contact (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and appears in the contacts database). Transfer sound (to a Bluetooth headset). Turn On/Off tones. Microphone mute On/Off. Copy number (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known). Paste number (displayed if the clipboard contains a number). Speakerphone on/off. Call list. Options in Flip closed mode The following options are available during or after a call:

Options in Flip open mode The following options are available during or after a call:

39 y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l P800_UM.book Page 40 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary End call. Hold call. Add to contacts (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and not found in the contacts database). Show contact (displayed if the phone number of the active call is known, and appears in the contacts database). Transfer sound (Only when Bluetooth headset has audio). Show cost / Hide cost (Call hit area). key, The context sensitive menu, opened by pressing the contains the following options:

Retrieve call. End call. Show contact. Add to contacts. Zoom in (if the calling party matches a contact with a stored picture). Calls To make a call in Flip closed mode, you may either use the keypad or the Jog dial. Use the stylus and the virtual keyboard in Flip open mode. 40 Placing calls To place a call (Flip closed) 1. Dial the telephone number on the keypad and press OK. To remove a typed character - press C. To remove all characters - press and hold C. To place a call (Flip open) 1. Select Telephony 2. Select the virtual keyboard icon 3. Dial the number on the virtual keyboard and select the phone

. icon To remove a typed character - select the backspace icon

. To place a call using Speed dial (Flip open) Speed dial is a fast way to call one of the last nine used phone numbers. 1. Select the Speed dial icon 2. Select an entry. To place a call using the Call list 1. Open the call list by selecting the Call list icon 2. Scroll with the Jog dial or tap with the stylus to select an

. entry. 3. With Flip closed, select the phone icon

. P800_UM.book Page 41 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To place a call using the Contact list 1. Open the Contact list by selecting the Contacts icon

. 2. Scroll with the Jog dial or tap with the stylus to select a contact. 3. Scroll with the Jog dial or tap with the stylus to select a number. To answer a call (Flip closed) The smartphone rings when you receive a call. You can Answer, Send busy or Mute. If the calling party is found in Contacts, the name of the caller is displayed. If there is a picture it will also be shown. 1. Chose Answer to answer the call. 2. Choose End call to finish. Note Select Send busy to send a busy signal to the calling party. Select Mute to just turn off the ring signal. The calling party will still be calling. To put a call on hold for placing another call 1. Place a call or answer a call. 2. Select Hold call. Preliminary Phone Edit 11:03 John Smith

+4613244500

(w) Ann Jones

(h) End active call switch calls Join calls 3. Place a second call, or answer a call. The held call is shown with grey background. To switch between the calls:

With Flip closed, press the Switch calls. and select With Flip open, select the call with the grey background and select Switch calls. To end the active call and continue with the held call, select the End active call button. To join the calls to a conference, select Join calls. See Conference calls on page 44. To end a call Select End call. To reject a call With Flip closed, select Reject or, press the Back key. With Flip open, select Send busy. 41 y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l P800_UM.book Page 42 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To silence the call ring signal This does not affect the call. It just silences the signal. With Flip closed, select Mute, or press the C key. With Flip open, rotate the Jog dial and select Mute. To place a call using voice control Say the magic word and then the name of the person you want to call, and the smartphone gets connected. Note This option requires that the number of the calling party is provided with a voice recording. See Preferences on page 45. Tip The Magic word is not needed if you use a Bluetooth headset. Press the headset call button and say the name of the person you want to call. Copying/pasting number A highlighted telephone number may be copied and pasted for exchange with other text fields or in applications. Copy number - if a number has been entered. Paste number - if there is a copied number stored in the clipboard. To copy/paste a number Select Telephone > Preference > Copy/Paste number 42 Displaying calls During call set up, a progress window shows the current status. Calling is displayed until a line has been allocated. When the line has been allocated Connecting is displayed. After a call is finished the view will return to the application in Flip open mode that were active when you answered. If an incoming call matches an entry in Contacts, the corresponding information is displayed. If the number is not found in Contacts, only the telephone number is displayed. At the top of the window, the call timer for the call is displayed. The cost meter is also displayed, if available. After the Name/Number field a character indicates the phone number type. Home - indicated by (h). Work - indicated by (w). When using voice control, you can also let the smartphone tell you who is calling. Missed calls When a call has been missed, a message is displayed. Select View to display information on the missed call. P800_UM.book Page 43 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Network indication The area at the top of the display contains network indication, which can be:

Network/Service provider name. No network. Emergency calls only. Searching. Call log The call log allows you to check the smartphones data on calls made, received or missed. The log keeps track of cost information, length, date and time of each call. The List view of the call log displays the contents in order where the most recent call is at the top. Note Refer to the Icons chapter to find out which icon that represent each kind of calls in the smarthpone. In Flip Open:

1. Select the call log icon 2. Select a listed call to see more detailed information about it. In Flip closed:

1. Press 2. Choose Call list or Missed calls, depending on what you are and select Calls from the menu. looking for. Preliminary Tip In Flip closed mode you may press the OK key twice to re-

dial the last number used in the smartphone. Advice of Charge (AoC) Advice of charge allows you to keep track of the cost of calls and to stop the device from making chargeable calls when a certain credit limit has been exceeded. This option is only available if Advice of Charge is supported by the SIM subscription. If the credit is limited, a warning Low credit is displayed, when there is approximately thirty seconds of credit left. When the credit runs out, Credit expired is displayed and ongoing calls are stopped. Auto Retrying If a call attempt is not successfully connected, the smartphone automatically retries to call after a while. When retry has been initiated the smartphone will continue to retry for a number of times or until you invoke any other action. The type of connection failure determines the number of retry attempts. While the time between the retry attempts is elapsing the dialogue Retrying is shown. When a retry is successful, the smartphone alerts you with a single ring tone. 43 y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l P800_UM.book Page 44 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Remote party notifications When a remote party carries out certain operations, the smartphone may receive a notification. An alarm is sounded and one of these messages is shown. Call held by other party. Call retrieved by other party. Call transferred by other party. Calls joined by other party. Call is waiting at other party. Terminating a call when another is on hold When the active call is terminated, you are asked to retrieve the held call. If you do not respond within a few seconds the held call is also terminated. Receiving a call when another is on hold If someone calls when a call is on hold, you are asked if you want to release the held call and answer the incoming call. 44 3 2 1

(w)

(w)

(h) 11:03 Phone Edit John Smith Tom Clark Ann Jones Conference calls A conference call can be started when you have an active call and a held call. The conference call view is automatically displayed whenever a member has been added to the conference. The conference call view is displayed when selecting the Show parties button, from the standard call control view. You return to the standard call control view by pressing the Hide parties button. If an incoming call is answered during a conference call, the conference call is put on hold. Note Conference calls are subject to being supported by the network. Hold conference End conference Hide parties To start a conference call Select the Join calls option from the Phone menu, or the Join calls button. P800_UM.book Page 45 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To extract a party Select Phone > Extract party. This causes the conference call to be put on hold, the selected party is then removed from the conference and becomes the active call. To release a party Select Phone > Release party. This ends the call to the selected party. Emergency calls If you initiate a call to a number which is identified as an emergency number, The Emergency call mode is shown. Emergency call can be made without PIN or PUK codes, even without a SIM card. You can end the call using the menu key. Preferences In this menu you may change the settings for a number of telephony options. To set the telephony preferences 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select the item to set-up. Preliminary Incoming call alert This option lets you choose individual ring melodies for each smartphone profile; Handheld, Handsfree and Car. You may also set individual volume levels or let the smartphone vibrate. 1. Use the stylus to point and drag the bar lever to the preferred sound level. 2. Select the list view and highlight the signal of your choice. 3. Select Done to activate the changes. Incoming call picture Select the option to automatically show the picture saved in contacts at incoming calls. Voice control The voice control option lets you handle calls vocally. Say a

"magic word" and then the name of the person you want to call, and the smartphone tries to call. The magic word is a command that bypasses the key press to activate voice dialling. 1. Switch the option on and set when to use the Magic word. 2. Select if the name of the calling party should be played at incoming calls. 45 y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l P800_UM.book Page 46 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To record a voice command 1. Select one of the options, Magic word, Answer, or Busy and select Record. 2. Say a word after the tone Be sure to use a word that you can remember. For example Calling. 3. Select Play if you want listen to your recording. 4. Select the voice message options for each smartphone profile. 5. Select Done to exit. Flight mode Turns off the radio function so it wont disturb wave sensitive equipment, for instance when you want to use the smartphone in an aeroplane or in a hospital. To set flight mode on/off Select the option. If the Flight mode is set, a dialogue gives you the option to switch Flight mode off, everytime the smartphone is powered on or off. To set flight mode on temporarily Select Flight mode now. 46 Locks Locks contains options for:

When to lock the device, the SIM card or the keys on the keypad. Changing the lock codes. The Device lock is an option for powering on the smartphone. Key lock blocks your keys to be pressed by mistake, for instance when the smartphone is in your pocket. The SIM card lock demands your code when the phone is turned on or when a new SIM card is installed. Note For more information see the chapter: Locks and Security. Add to contacts This option enables the function for adding the calling party to contacts. Handsfree Handsfree lets you choose how to answer the smartphone when it is used in a handsfree situation. You may also activate a bluetooth device from this menu. To set handsfree options Select 1 ring to have the smartphone answer automatically after one signal or Any key for answering by pressing any key. P800_UM.book Page 47 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To set bluetooth options Select the preferred sound device; Phone or Headset. Forward calls Forward calls lets you choose how to forward incoming calls to another number, on:

Busy Not reachable No reply All calls Data calls Fax calls To forward calls 1. Enter the telephone number you want to forward to. 2. Select Done. Tip Normally the data/fax options are not changed. Accepted callers You can accept calls from selected persons even when the smartphone is set up to divert calls. To add an accepted caller 1. Select Add new. Preliminary 2. Write the name and the number of the contact you want to reach through. 3. Select Done. Call waiting This option sets the call waiting option on or off. Restrict calls You can set restrictions for calls made from or to your smartphone. You may for example protect it from being used with long distance calls. To restrict incoming calls 1. Select the Incoming calls tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All incoming calls. Incoming calls when roaming. To restrict outgoing calls 1. Select the Outgoing calls tab. 2. Set restrictions for:

All outgoing calls. Outgoing international calls. Outgoing international calls except to home PLMN. y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l 47 P800_UM.book Page 48 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To change the password 1. Select Change password. 2. Enter the old code. 3. Enter the new code. 4. Comnfirm the new code. Voice mail For easy voice mail access, enter the number to the voice mail of your card operator. GSM Networks This option lets you choose a secondary net when you are outside your operators area. Choose if you want to search for a new network or use a preferred one. You can also make a list of preferred networks. Note Your operator may not allow all you to access all available networks, depending on policy. Calling cards This options is used to handle calling cards. AoC - Call meter settings This option is only available if Advice of Charge is supported by the SIM subscription. 48 Limited - the limit is mostly preset by the operator. When the credit is set to limited, chargeable calls should only be made if the credit is larger than 0. The option is however useful if you want to restrict the call cost for yourself or another person that uses the smartphone. Unlimited - there is no credit limit. Calls can be made even if there is no charging information available. Call summary When a call is terminated, a call summary is displayed, with time information and, if available, cost and remaining credit information of the call. Hints and smart functions Special characters A long press on the * key inserts the DTMF string character P.

(Also sometimes pause.) A long press on the 0 key inserts the international call prefix

+. Change phone volume During a call you may use the jog dial to change the phone volume. P800_UM.book Page 49 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM The C key During an active call, holding the C key mutes the microphone. A short press on C activates the microphone again. During a call a press on the C key mutes the microphone. When entering text in Flip closed mode, the C key erases the last entered letter. A longer press deletes all text in the active field. DTMF You can use your telephone banking services or use a company service by sending tones during a call. You can also program fast dial functions including DTMF-tones. Use this to reach the bank service for example, and you will have instant access to your bank account. All you have to do is to manually enter your bank code. 1. Press the keys from the keypad that represents the codes or services, for example the code 010-000000p1#33# to check your bank account:

Start with the number to the bank service (for example 010-000000). Insert a P to activate the tones after a short pause. Insert the number representing the option your bank has programmed (for example 1 for automatic banks services). Preliminary Insert the numbers that represent the service your bank has programmed. (for example 33 for checking your bank account). 2. Select Save. Warning! Do never program any personal codes in your smartphone. 49 y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l y n o h p e e T l P800_UM.book Page 50 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary GPRS - data logs and GPRS

. GPRS is inactive during a CSD or HSCSD data call. Icons on the status bar lets you overview the information about calls of dataconnection type. The HSCSD/CSD icons are displayed during a data connection. Where GPRS is suspended, for example by a voice call the GPRS suspended state is indicated by a combined icon There are three states for the GPRS icon: Active transferring data (alternates between suspended activates the GPRS active icon for 2 seconds. A combined signal strength and GPRS signal icon provides information on the GPRS connection status. The GPRS connection status appears above the signal strength icon. There are three states for the icon, unavailable and active

. Any data transfer either received or sent

, available

, active

) and and

. Connection information When the data connection icon is selected during an active data connection, a pop up menu displays Information and Disconnect. Selecting Information displays information on the connection. 50 GPRS status information When the signal strength icon is selected, network, GPRS status information, and GPRS error text is displayed, where applicable. GPRS data log A new GPRS data log entry is created when a GPRS account establish a connection and transfers data. If there is an existing data log associated with the current GPRS connection then this is updated. The GPRS data log application consists of a list view and a detail view displayed when an account entry is selected. List view The List view displays a list of GPRS Internet accounts. Where one account is active or suspended, the relevant status icon is displayed to the left of the account. Detail view Select an account entry from the list view to display the data view for that account. P800_UM.book Page 51 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM This view displays information on the account. The data log is updated dynamically. Buttons allows you to delete or reset the current data. These buttons are disabled during an active or suspended connection. Session data When the connection is deactivated, for example when the current Internet account is disconnected, the total data sent and received in the last session is displayed. In both Flip Open and Flip closed the information is displayed for a couple of seconds. In the Flip closed mode, the information can be dismissed with the Back button. The Server tab supports the APN address and PDP type. Preliminary s g o l t a a d

S R P G s g o l t a a d

S R P G s g o l t a a d

S R P G s g o l t a a d

S R P G 51 P800_UM.book Page 52 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Contacts Contacts is an address book, from which you can easily access business contacts and friends. Contacts stores names, phone numbers, e-mail addresses and other useful information. You can create and edit entries, scroll, or search for a specific name. Contacts is available in Flip open and Flip closed modes. The information stored in the SIM phone book is also accessible, with phone number, name, and SIM position. SIM phone book entries can be imported to Contacts and Contacts entries can be exported to the SIM phone book. Flip closed mode With the Flip closed, you can place calls and send SMS or MMS messages. Contact has two views in Flip closed mode:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The details for a contact. Context sensitive menus In both views you can use the context sensitive key access some of the smartphones contact functions. to 52 P800_UM.book Page 53 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Menu options in list view Description Option Zoom in/out Zoom the display in or out. SIM phone book Display the contacts of the SIM card. Send owner card Send your business card as IR or Bluetooth. Find Undo delete Main menu Search for a specific contact. Revert the last deleted contact. Return to the application launcher. Menu options in SIM phone book Option View all Information numbers Service numbers Display the service numbers on the SIM card, if Description Switch to Contacts list. Display the information numbers on the SIM card, if any. Zoom in/out Main menu any. Zoom the display in or out. Return to the application launcher. Menu options in detail view Option Call Send SMS Send MMS Description Call the active contact. Send an SMS to the active contact. Send an MMS to the active contact. Preliminary Description Send the active contact as SMS, IR or Bluetooth. Delete the active contact. Start other applications. Option Send as Delete contact Applications Placing a call To select a contact 1. Select the Contacts icon 2. If you want to place a call to a contact in the SIM phone

. book, select SIM phone book from the context sensitive menu. If there are information numbers or service numbers stored on the SIM card, you can also access them. 3. Scroll down to the desired contact or Select Find from the menu and search for the contact. To use Quick index 1. Press and hold a number key. The first contact, corresponding of the first letter of the key, is shown. 2. To search further, use the keys in the normal manner. To place a call 1. Select a phone number. 2. Click the jog dial or click OK 53 t s t c a n o C t s t c a n o C s t c a t n o C t s t c a n o C P800_UM.book Page 54 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary or 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Call from the context sensitive menu. To send an SMS message 1. Select a phone number. 2. Select Send SMS from the context sensitive menu. To send an MMS message 1. Select a E-mail address. 2. Select Send MMS from the context sensitive menu. Adding a contact You can create a new contact using information from a recently received voice call or message. Refer to the Telephony set-up for information on how to enable this function. 1. Select Yes when asked to add to contacts. 2. Enter contact name and edit the number, if required. To access the full edit view, open the Flip. Deleting a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Delete contact from the context sensitive menu. 54 To revert a deleted contact, select Undo delete from the context sensitive menu. Flip open mode The contact application can be found in the application picker and in the Application launcher. Contact has three views in open mode:

List view An alphabetical list of contacts. The list view is the starting point for finding a contact. Detail view The contact details for a contact. Edit view Contact details, displayed in a way that allows you to add and change the information. Tabs at the bottom of the List view provide a fast way to locate information. To highlight the first entry that begins with the first letter on a tab, select the tab once. To highlight the first entry that begins with the next letter on the tab, select the tab again. abc def ghi jkl mno pqr stu v-z Menus In all views there is a menu bar from where you can access some of the contact functions. P800_UM.book Page 55 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Menu options in list view Menus Contacts New Find Option Description Create a new contact. Search contacts containing a specific text. Send owner card Send your business card as Bluetooth, e-mail, SMS, IR or MMS. View your personal business card. Edit Folders View owner card Undo delete Paste contact Zoom Preferences Help All Unfiled Edit folders Revert the last deleted contact. Paste a received or copied contact into Contacts. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if telephone numbers should be displayed in the list. Open the help program. Show all contacts in the list. Show the contacts that is not in a folder. Categorize your contacts in folders

(business, personal etc.). Preliminary Option Menu options in SIM phone book list view Menus Contacts New Description Create a new contact. Display the information numbers on the SIM card, if any. Information numbers Service numbers Display the service numbers on the Own numbers Edit Paste contact Copy to contacts Copy the shown SIM card entry into Copy all to contacts Sort by SIM position Zoom Preferences Help SIM card, if any. Display speech, fax and data numbers on the SIM card. Paste a received or copied contact into Contacts. Contacts. Copy all SIM card entries into Contacts. Sort the list according to SIM position. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if telephone numbers should be displayed in the list. Open the help program. 55 t s t c a n o C t s t c a n o C s t c a t n o C t s t c a n o C P800_UM.book Page 56 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Menu options in detail view and edit view Menus Contacts New Find Option Description Create a new contact. Search contacts containing a specific text. Send a contact as Bluetooth, e-mail, SMS, IR or MMS. Set the active contact as owner card/

personal business card. Delete the active contact. Change the details of the active contact. Copy the active contact.entry. Cut out the marked text. Copy the marked text. Paste the copied text into the selected field. Add an extra field to the active contact. Specify the phone number to be displayed next to the contact in the List view. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Send as Set as owner card Delete contact Edit contact Copy contact Cut Copy Paste Add field (in Edit view only) Show in list Zoom Edit 56 Menus Option Preferences Description Select how the contact list is to be sorted, and if the telephone number should be displayed in the list. Folders Export to SIM Export the contact to SIM. Help Unfiled Edit folders Open the help program Show the contacts that is not in a folder Categorize your contacts in folders

(e.g. business, personal etc.) Personal details The first time you use your smartphone you are advised to enter your personal details. You create an electronic business card, containing your contact details, including notes and a photo. You can attach this card to e-mails, or beam it to another device. To create your own business card 1. Select Contacts > New and enter your details. 2. Select Contacts > Set as owner card. Placing a call To open Contacts Select the Contacts icon Application launcher

. or select Contacts in the P800_UM.book Page 57 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To search for an entry containing specific text 1. Select Contacts > Find. 2. Enter the text string you wish to search for. 3. Select either In all fields or In Names & Company and click Find. 4. When search is completed, all results are displayed. Note Searching is not case sensitive and you do not have to enter an entire word to locate a matching entry. To place a call 1. If required, change category from the Folders menu. 2. Scroll down to the desired contact. If the contact list is long, first select a tab at the at the bottom of the view. 3. Select the contact to display the information. 4. Depending on what you want to do, select according to the following:

Select the phone icon call. Select the e-mail icon e-mail. or the phone number to place a or the e-mail address to send an Select the web icon Select the MMS icon Select the SMS icon or URL to open a web page. to send an MMS message. to send an SMS message. Preliminary Note Regarding detailed information on these functions, please refer to the respective section of the manual. Managing contacts You may sort the contacts according to first name, last name or company. The contact entries may also be filtered by category such as business or personal. To create a new contact 1. Select Contacts > New. 2. Enter desired information. When applicable, select from drop down menus. To add a voice dialling command Voice dialling commands can be added when you create or change a contact. 1. Select the Voice commands icon at the bottom of the screen. 2. Select a number. 3. Select the Record button. 4. Record a new voice command after the tone. To play a recorded voice command, select the Play button. To remove a voice command, select the Delete button. 57 t s t c a n o C t s t c a n o C s t c a t n o C t s t c a n o C P800_UM.book Page 58 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To add a note to a contact 1. Select the note tab

. 2. Enter the text. 3. If you do not want the note to be included when you send, beam, or synchronize the contact, select the Private box. To add a photo or other image to a contact 1. Select the photoview tab 2. Select the image space. 3. If required, change folder. 4. Select the image to use. 5. Select the Select button. To change an image, select the old image and select Replace image. To remove an image, select the old image and select Delete image. To change a contact 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Change the desired information. When applicable, select from drop down menus. 58 To add a field to a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Add field. 4. Select the field to be added from the drop down list. 5. Select Add. To delete a contact 1. Select the contact. 2. Select Contacts > Delete contact. Managing the SIM phone book You manage the SIM phone book the same way as the Contacts. You may also sort the SIM phone book according to SIM position. You can also copy information between the smartphone and the SIM card. To import contacts from SIM Within the SIM phone book detail view, select Contacts >

Copy to Contacts for importing the selected SIM entry. Within the SIM phone book list view, select Contacts > Copy all to Contacts for importing all SIM entries. To export contacts to SIM 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Contacts > Export to SIM. P800_UM.book Page 59 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 3. If the contact has multiple telephone numbers, select the number to export. 4. Select Done. Sending contact details You can send contact details to others: by SMS message, MMS message, Infrared, or Bluetooth. To send contact details 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Contacts > Send as. 3. Select the message type. 4. Select Done. To send your own contact details 1. Make sure the two infrared ports are aligned. 2. In List view, select Contacts > Send owner card. 3. Select the message type. 4. Select Done. Settings To sort the contact list and show the preferred phone number 1. Select Edit > Preferences. Preliminary 2. Select the desired sorting option (first name, last name or company) and click Done. 3. If you want a telephone number to be shown nest to the name in List view, select Show preferred phone number. If no number is selected below, the first telephone number is used. 4. Select Done. To change the preferred phone number 1. Select a contact. 2. Select Edit > Edit contact. 3. Select Edit > Show in list. 4. Select the number to be shown from the list. 5. Click Done. Note If no numbers appear, ensure that Show preferred phone number is checked in preferences. Phone book manager On the CD, there is an application called Phone book manager. This application is used to manage the SIM card information from a PC. 1. Prepare the smartphone for modem connection. Refer to the Setup section for information. 2. Connect the smartphone to the PC. 59 t s t c a n o C t s t c a n o C s t c a t n o C t s t c a n o C P800_UM.book Page 60 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 3. Start the Phone book manager application on the PC. 4. For instructions on the application, refer to the application help information. 60 P800_UM.book Page 61 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Messages With types of messages:

Messages you can create, send, and receive different e-mail messages. Your smartphones mail client supports POP3 and IMAP4 mail servers, MIME attachments and SMTP for sending mail. SMS (Short Message Service) messages are short text messages sent and received via the network operator's message centre. EMS (Enhanced Message Service) messages also allow pictures, sounds, melodies and animations to be inserted. MMS (Multimedia Message Service) messages. An MMS message from your smartphone can contain text, graphics, animations, photographic images, audio clips and ring melodies. You also use Messages to receive:

Area Information messages.These are impersonal text messages broadcast to all subscribers in a network area.Typical uses could be sending local road reports or local taxi phone numbers (Area Information services are not available from all operators). BIO (Bearer Independent Object) messages. There are different types of BIO messages:

Setup (e-mail, Internet, WAP accounts) Preliminary E-mail notifications Files for exchanging electronic business cards (vCard) and calendar information (vCal). Auto setup files for OTA (Over The Air configuration). The different types of messages, e-mail, SMS, and MMS messages are handled by separate messaging accounts. Tap Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts to see the details of the messaging accounts on your smartphone. You can have any number of e-mail accounts - a typical configuration will be one business and one personal account. When you set up a synchronisation with your PC, an account for synchronised e-mails is automatically created on you smartphone. SMS and MMS messages use only one account each. Accounts are automatically created for storing received:

Area info messages Auto setup messages Beamed messages Each account stores its messages in four folders: Inbox, Outbox, Draft, and Sent. 61 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M P800_UM.book Page 62 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Before using Messages Before you can send and receive any messages you need to set up the necessary accounts.See Getting started with Internet and Messages on page 153 Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet or e-mail account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your smartphone. Folders in Messages There are four folders for each messaging account: Inbox, Outbox, Draft and Sent. Inbox Inbox contains received messages. You can reply to, forward, and delete messages, but not edit them. Received auto configuration messages are stored in the Auto setup account Inbox. Outbox Outbox contains messages that are ready to be sent. Saving a message to Outbox is useful if you have several to send: you reduce connection time by sending them all at the same time. 62 To save an e-mail to Outbox:

1. After composing your message, tap Send. 2. Select Save to Outbox. You cannot save SMS messages to Outbox unless the phone fails to connect. Messages that you send from an e-mail synchronisation account are always saved to Outbox and sent from your PC after your next synchronisation. Draft Draft contains messages that are not ready to be sent. To store a new message in Draft:

1. Create the message and leave it without tapping Send. To move a message from Outbox to Draft:

1. Open the Outbox message list and tap Message > Move to Draft. Sent Sent contains messages you have sent from your smartphone. Tip To avoid running out of storage space on your smartphone, make it a habit to clear out unneeded messages from your Sent folder. P800_UM.book Page 63 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM The accounts in Messages When you open Messages, a list of your accounts appears. An asterisk next to an account indicates that a message has arrived since you last opened the accounts inbox Accounts Messages Edit How to use Messages Preliminary To write and send a text message:

1. In 2. Enter the number to the recipient or tap To and select Messages select SMS > Message > New recipient or recipients from your contact list and tap Done. SMS MMS Personal e-mail Area Info Auto setup Beamed Unread Out 3. Write your message and tap Send. 2 3 3 1 1 1 0 2 2 0 0 0 To add EMS features to you SMS:

1. Tap Edit > Insert Object 2. Select the type of media you wish to import and tap Continue 3. Select the item you want to insert and tap Done. SMS and EMS messages An SMS (Short Message Service) text message is a short message that you can send and receive on a mobile telephone. It can contain up to 160 characters. If you create a longer message it will be sent as two

(or more) separate messages, but received (if the receiving telephone supports this) as one message. If you add pictures, animations, melodies and sounds to your message it becomes an EMS (Enhanced Message Service) message. Text messages can be sent to one person, or to a group of recipients that you have saved in Contacts. 63 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M 2. The first page of the new message is now displayed. To add an image, text, audio, voice or scribble tap

***Startbild fr att skapa MMS, inget infogat***

To insert an object:

1. Tap 2. Select the type of object you want to insert from the list. P800_UM.book Page 64 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Here you can see an example of an SMS with inserted EMS features . MMS messages MMS (Multi Media Service) messages can include real pictures, animations and sound, organised like a slide presentation with time based control of the playback. Composing an multimedia message is like building a small slide presentation. A typical page will consist of a picture, some text and sound. Editorial Comment:Frsta bilden nr man kommer in i MMS. A picture taken using the integrated Communicam can quickly and conveniently be sent via MMS using the Send as command from the viewer. MMS messages can be sent to a mobile phone or an e-mail account. To create a new MMS message:

1. Select your MMS account and then tap Message > New or open an existing message and tap Message > New. 64 P800_UM.book Page 65 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Here you can see the first page with an inserted picture.

****Bild 1 av i skapande av MMS med infogad bild och ljud samt add media ikon***

To delete, replace or edit an inserted object:

1. Tap the inserted object and choose an action. Preliminary To add a new page to your MMS message:

1. Tap You now have a completely new page to insert objects on

***Bild 2 i skapande av MMS, sida 2 av MMS:et men ngot infogat New illistration needed***

To edit an inserted picture:

1. Tap the picture so that it is highlighted. 2. Tap Edit image. While editing your picture you can add scribble, resize, crop or rotate your image. To undo your changes, tap Edit > Undo all. Warning! If you have accepted you changes by tapping Done, there is no undo possibility. To set the download method for receiving MMS messages, manual or automatic:

1. In Control panel, tap Connections > Messaging accounts >

MMS > Download method 65 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M P800_UM.book Page 66 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Manual means that only notifications will be downloaded and the full message will be downloaded to your smartphone when you select Receive. You can only view the notification. To view the full message, tap Receive. Automatic means that the full message will be downloaded to your smartphone directly and can be viewed directly when selecting Read. To insert an attachment:

1. While creating your MMS message, tap the tab with the attachment icon, (Attachment Icon) 2. Tap Add. 3. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 4. Select the attachment. To play a received MMS message (manual mode, flip closed):

1. The dialogue You have 1 new message appears 2. Select 1 Read.The header for the message is displayed. 3. Tap Receive.The message will be downloaded and played on your smartphone. It is also saved in your inbox for MMS messages. To play a received MMS message (automatic mode, flip closed):

1. The dialogue You have 1 new message appears. 2. Select 1 Read. 66 3. The message is played, downloaded and stored in your inbox for MMS messages. E-mail Writing e-mails To write a new e-mail:

1. Select an e-mail account and tap Message > New or open an existing e-mail and tap Message > New. If your leave the message before sending it, it is automatically stored in the folder Draft (unless it was created from Outbox, in which case it remains there). To mark an e-mail as urgent:

1. On the address tab, select High in the Priority list Tip If you are creating several e-mails, you can reduce connection time by saving them to Outbox and then connect and send them all at the same time. To save an e-mail to Outbox:

1. Tap Send 2. Select Save to Outbox > Done To enter addresses from Contacts when writing an e-mail:

1. Tap To:

P800_UM.book Page 67 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 2. In the Find contact dialogue select the tick box for each entry you want to send the e-mail to. 3. Tap Done. Tip To enter several addresses manually (without using Contacts) in a text message or e-mail: enter a comma between each address. Sending e-mails To send an e-mail:

1. Tap Send > Send immediately Note If your smartphone is connected to the Internet when you send a mail, it is sent immediately, and your smartphone remains connected when it is finished. If not, your smartphone connects to the Internet, sends the e-mail and disconnects. To save an e-mail and send it later:

1. Tap Send > Save to Outbox. To move an e-mail from Outbox to Draft:

1. In your list of Outbox messages, tap to the left of the e-mail

(a tick appears), and tap Message > Move to draft. Note E-mails in a synchronised account are always saved to Outbox, and are only sent after your next synchronise your smartphone and PC e-mails. Preliminary Sending Attachments To attach an entry to an e-mail that you are writing:

1. On the 2. Select the type of attachment you want to add. 3. Select the item. attachment tab (attachment icon), tap Add You can attach entries to e-mails directly from the following applications:

Jotter, Voice. and Contacts, Calendar, Tasks, To attach a Calendar entry to an e-mail:

1. Open the entry in Calendar and tap Calendar > Send As. 2. Tap Email > Done. 3. Create the e-mail and tap Send. To attach a Contact to an e-mail:

1. Open the contact details for the contact you wish to send and tap Contacts > Send as 2. Tap Email > Done 3. Create the e-mail and tap Send. Note When you forward an e-mail, you can choose whether or not you wish to forward the attachment. Large attachments increase the size of an e-mail and consequently the connection time needed to send it. 67 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M P800_UM.book Page 68 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Downloading You can choose not to download large e-mails and receive just a header instead. A header contains the subject line, senders details, and date, but not the full message. You can then choose whether or not to download the full message. To specify a size limit for e-mails, above which you only receive a header:

1. Tap Control Panel > Connections > Messaging accounts > Email >

tap the e-mail account > Edit 2. Tap Inbox 3. Select an option from the Download list. In your list of messages, headers are denoted by downloaded icon)

(header To download the full message:

1. In your list of messages: Tap the header. To download a series of messages:

1. In your list of messages: Tap the tick box to the left of each entry (a tick appears). 2. Tap Get & Send. Note If you delete a notification the message will no longer be visible in your message list, but the actual message is not deleted until your smartphone has connected to the mail server. 68 Downloading e-mails automatically If you are using a GPRS Internet account, your can schedule your e-mails to be downloaded automatically at certain times. To download your e-mails automatically:

1. In Control panel, tap Connections > Messaging accounts > Email 2. Select the required e-mail account and tap Edit 3. Tap Inbox > Schedule 4. Set time or interval for scheduled download and tap Done. Synchronised e-mails When you set up a synchronisation with your PC, an account for synchronised e-mails is automatically created on you smartphone and indicated by more than one account for synchronised e-mails. If you set up an account to dial in for messages that you also receive using e-mail synchronisation, the two accounts will contain the same messages.Note that there is no connection between the accounts, the copies in each account are separate.

(syncfile icon). You can have Disconnecting and connecting If your smartphone is already connected to the Internet when you send an e-mail, it remains connected after sending it. If your smartphone is not connected before sending and e-mail, it will connect and send the message and then disconnect. P800_UM.book Page 69 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Note You can send SMS messages while connected to the Internet, but you can not make or receive phone calls. Tip If you are using a GPRS Internet account, you can schedule an automatic download of your incoming e-mails. E-mails that are waiting in your Outbox are not sent at the same time. If your smartphone cannot connect to the e-mail account, automatic download will fail, and mailerror (scheduled download error) is displayed next to the e-mail account. Check, if downloads are scheduled to occur from the same location each time, that the reception in that location is good enough. A scheduled download will fail if your smartphone is engaged in a voice call.It may fail if it is connected to another ISP that is, through another Internet account than specified for the e-mail account (Check this with Steve Burke-(Lennart Lnneborg)) If e-mail are not downloaded because a scheduled download fails, they are downloaded during the next successful connection. You can select an e-mail account that uses dial-up rather than a GPRS account but automatic download will fail if your smartphone is not connected to the Internet when downloads are scheduled. Preliminary Receiving Attachments Any attachments to an e-mail message are displayed on the tab (attachment icon). The icon next to an attachment in the list identifies the type of attachment. To view an attachment you need a viewer for that type of file.Your smartphone comes with pre-installed viewers for Microsoft Word, Excel, PowerPoint and Adobe Acrobat

(PDF) files. Many more are available from the Multimedia for P800 CD. Note When you reply to an e-mail that has an attachment, the attachment will not be included in your reply. Area information Area information messages are impersonal text messages that are sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example, a local traffic report. When you receive an area information message, the message automatically appears in the display. When you dismiss the message it is stored in the Area Info Inbox until it is written over by a new message received on the same channel. Please consult your service provider for more information about availability of Area information services and area information channel numbering. To add an area information channel:

1. 2. Check Area information check box. In Control panel, tap Connections > Messaging accounts > CBS. 69 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M P800_UM.book Page 70 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 3. Tap New. 4. Enter the desired Channel number and check the Subscription active check box. 5. Tap Done. To remove an area information channel:

1. In Control panel, tap Connections > Messaging accounts > CBS. 2. Tap the channel to be deleted. 3. Tap Delete and confirm the removal by tapping on Yes in the subsequent dialogue. Any messages belonging to that channel will also be deleted. Get and Send To get and send messages for one specific account:

1. Select 2. Select the desired account (SMS, MMS or e-mail for Messages. example). 3. Tap Get&send. Messages. To get and send messages for all you accounts:

1. Select 2. Tap Message > Get&send. Any unsent messages in your Outbox will now be sent and new messages not yet downloaded will be downloaded to your smartphone. 70 Connecting and disconnecting from the Internet To disconnect from the Internet:

1. Tap the connection type (HSCSD/CSD the status bar. or GPRS

) in 2. The dialogue Do you want to disconnect, Yes/No appears. 3. Tap Yes. Finding Messages In both the list of accounts and list of messages, Find searches through the subject lines, senders details and dates. In an open message, Find searches through the text of the message an highlight the text it finds. You can only search through e-mails that have fully downloaded. Saving contact details When you receive a message, you can save the contact details of the person who sent you the message. To save the senders details:

1. In the message tap From. P800_UM.book Page 71 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Note If you save an address from an e-mail synchronised from your company PC, the corporate version of the address rather than the full Internet e-mail address, is saved to Contacts. If the corporate version of the address is not an Internet address (an X.400 address, or just the senders name, for example), you can use it to send e-mails from your synchronised account, but you cannot use it in e-mails that you send directly from your smartphone. If your service provider or network is unavailable Sometimes a message cannot be sent because your smartphone cannot connect to a network. Please check that the Messaging Account and Internet Account information in the Control panel is correct. If you have both GPRS and dial-up Internet accounts, try sending the e-mail using an account of the other type. This works when only the GPRS or the GSM network is available

(but not both), because the two account types use different networks. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network and dial-up Internet account use the GSM network. If your e-mail service provider is unavailable and you have access to another account you can copy and paste the text from the unsent e-mail in Outbox into a new one created with the other account and send it. Preliminary You can cancel sending an e-mail. The message will remain in Outbox and you can send it later. 71 s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M s e g a s s e M P800_UM.book Page 72 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Internet You use the browser to:

Connect to the Internet to view and access Web- and WAP-

pages. View HTML and WML e-mail attachments. Receive and view Push messages from your WAP service provider. Download Java applications, images and audio. The browser can open web pages that does not use Java script or frames. You can save bookmarks to viewed pages, to be able to access them easily. You can also save pages in the smartphone for off-

line viewing. The browser uses folders for categorizing the information. The folders used are bookmarks, saved pages, signed documents, and Push messages. Before you can use Internet, you need to set up an Internet account in the Control panel. If you intend to use certain WAP services it might be necessary to set up a WAP account in the Control panel as well. 72 To start the browser Start the browser by:

pressing the browser key (the home page is shown). selecting the Internet icon in the application picker (the start page is shown). selecting the Internet icon

(the start page is shown). in the application launcher selecting a URL in another application. Note If required, you have to enter your ID and password to log in to your internet account. The application has two views:

Browser view Bookmarks view The base view of the application, where you can view Web and WAP pages. A list view where you can save short-cuts:

to Web and WAP sites on the Internet to locally stored pages to received WAP Push messages to documents digitally signed by the user. P800_UM.book Page 73 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Browser view Screen Internet Edit P800 WEB/WAP P800 WEB/WAP Internet Browser Internet Browser Edit 0:03 K J H G A B C D E F A Internet menu. B Edit menu. C Select to change to the next page. D Select to change to the previous page. Preliminary E Select to see the bookmarks view. F Select to close the browser. G Progress bar, shows the loading progress. H Shows that a secure connection is established. J Select to stop loading the page. K Select to go to the home page. 73 t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e n t I P800_UM.book Page 74 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Menus Menus Internet Option Open page Add to bookmarks Save page Send as Find Find next Description Enter the URL, or select from the drop down list. Enter the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Enter the name of the page and select the folder to save it in. Send the current URL as SMS, IR or Bluetooth. Enter a text and search for the text in the page. Search for the next occurrence of the search string. Reload the page. Reload page Load all images Load all images of the page. Page information Cut Show the page information. See description below. Cut out the marked information from an input field. Copy the marked information. Copy the all information on the page. Paste the copied text into the selected field. Set zoom level. Copy Copy all Paste Zoom Edit 74 Menus Option Preferences Help Description Set the preferences of the browser. See description below. Open the help program. Context sensitive menus The context sensitive menu is opened when you keep the stylus pressed on a link or an image. Link/image Text link and image link Description Open the active link. Option Open link Link information Add to bookmarks Save image Show information on the link. Add the active link URL to the bookmark list. Save the image in the smartphone. View image Copy image Send image as Load image View the image adopted to the screen (enlarged or reduced). Copy the image to the clipboard. Send the image as SMS, IR or Bluetooth. Load the image. Loaded image

(with or without link) Not loaded image (with or without link) P800_UM.book Page 75 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Link/image Voice call link Option Call New SMS New MMS New contact Mailto link New e-mail New MMS New contact Description Place a call according to the link. Send an SMS according to the link. Send an MMS according to the link. Create a contact with the link information. Send an e-mail according to the link. Place an MMS according to the link. Create a contact with the link information. Icons within a page Image not loaded (can be loaded manually). Broken image (not possible to load). To open a specific web page 1. Select Internet > Open page. 2. Enter the page URL or select a previously viewed page from the drop down list. 3. Select Open. Note If images are not loaded, select the image icons select Internet > Load all images. or Preliminary To navigate through recently opened pages 1. Select 2. Select to move back to previously viewed pages. to move forward again To save a page for off-line browsing 1. Select Internet > Save page. 2. Change the page name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To create a bookmark to the open page 1. Select Internet > Add to bookmarks. 2. Change the bookmark name, if required, and select a folder to save it in. 3. Select Done. To download and upload files When you select a link to a downloadable file, information on the file is displayed. Select Yes to start the download. When you select a link for uploading a file, a form for submitting the file is displayed. Select the file and select Yes to start the upload. 75 t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e n t I User authentication request Whenever a user authentication is requested, you have the possibility either to select a certificate and confirm the user authentication, to select to continue anonymous or to cancel the connection. If Always connect anonymous has been set, the browser will instead automatically try to connect anonymous. P800_UM.book Page 76 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To view information on the open page 1. Select Internet > Page information. 2. Select the Content tab to view the page information. 3. Select the Connection tab to view information on the connection. 4. Select the Certificates button to view the information on:

Server User To disconnect the connection 1. Select the connection icon 2. Select Disconnect. 3. Select Yes. in the status bar. WIM Access When the Browser requires access to the WIM card, for example when establishing a secure connection, you have to enter the correct PIN. Signing Documents You have to enter the signing PIN each time a signing operation shall be performed. 76 P800_UM.book Page 77 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Bookmark view Screen B Internet Edit All Ericsson Mobile Organiser LinneaTest SonyEricsson SvD Meny TV4 Yahoo 711 time table CSS fonts G H A C D E F A Internet menu. B View menu. C Select an icon to view information on the bookmark. D Select checkboxes to delete several bookmarks. E Select the bookmark text to view the page. Preliminary F Select to see the browser view. G Folder menu. H Select to go to the home page. 77 t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e n t I P800_UM.book Page 78 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Menus Menus Internet View Folders Option Open page New bookmark Edit Delete Sort by date/

name Zoom Preferences Help All Bookmarks Saved pages Unfiled Edit folders Description Enter the URL, or select from the drop down list. Enter the URL, the name of the bookmark and select the folder to save it in. Edit the selected bookmark. Remove the selected bookmark. Change the sorting order of the bookmark list. Set zoom level. Set the preferences of the browser. Open the help program. Show all contacts in the list. Show all bokkmarks. Show all saved pages. Show the bookmarks that is not in a folder. Categorize your contacts in folders

(business, personal etc.). Icons Bookmark 78 Saved page Push message from the WAP service provider Signed document To open a bookmark Select the bookmark text. The bookmarked item is opened. To view bookmark information Select the bookmark icon. Information on the bookmark is shown. From the information screen you can:

Edit the bookmark. Delete the bookmark. Send the bookmark as e-mail, SMS, Bluetooth, IR, or MMS. To delete several bookmarks 1. Select the check box of the bookmarks to delete. 2. Select Internet > Delete. 3. Select Yes to confirm. P800_UM.book Page 79 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM WAP and OTA provisioning messages WAP Provisioning and OTA messages are received by the browser application and stored within the messaging store. These messages are then accessed and managed by the appropriate messaging account. When the user taps on a provisioning or OTA message, dialogues are shown to aid the provisioning process. Settings You must set-up the account for the application to work. Refer to the Control panel section for more information. The browser is initially set-up to work. However, you can change these settings, if required. The easiest way to set up Internet and WAP accounts is to ask your internet service provider to send you an auto setup message containing the required setup information. The accounts will then be set up automatically on your smartphone. To guarantee the integrity of the settings, a PIN may be used. For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, e.g. on-line banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. Refer to the Control panel section for more information. Note Proxy settings for MMS and for a WAP gateway should be set in the WAP account. Other proxy settings should be set in the Internet account. Preliminary To set up the browser 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Perform the set-up according to the following:

Basic settings Enter the URL for the page to be shown when the browser is started from the application picker; either a page in the smartphone or a page on the internet. t e n r e t n I Select WAP account to be used when the home page is loaded. The accounts are set-up in the control panel. Select if images should be loaded. If images are not loaded, the page is loaded faster. Not loaded images can be loaded manually when viewing the page. Select if sounds should be played when the page is opened. Select if animations should be played when the page is opened. Security settings Select if you want to save signed documents. Select if you want to connect without giving away your identity. Select if you want to connect using the WIM card. Select if you want to allow cookies. 79 t e n r e t n I t e n r e t n I t e n r e n t I P800_UM.book Page 80 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Advanced settings Select if you want to be able to receive messages from your WAP service provider. Select if you want to automatically open the URL in WAP Push messages. Select if you want to remove messages out-of date automatically. Set the size of memory where viewed pages are stored. Stored pages will load faster when you visit them again. Select Clear memory to empty the list of pages visited. Select Clear cache to empty the cache memory. 80 P800_UM.book Page 81 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Calendar Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Functional Specification - Calendar 11/155 17-CRH 162 02 Uen Rev B White Paper LZT 123 943 R1A Calendar function helps you to keep track of appointments and events, and you can also set reminder alarms for the entries. You should delete old entries regulary to release memory in the smartphone. There are three types of entries in calendar:

Preliminary Appointments - An entry with start and end time (for example a meeting). Reminders - An entry that does not need a specified time (for example a birthday) However, you can specify a time if you, for example, want to set an alarm. If you do not specify a time, the reminder appears when the day begins. A reminder is denoted with a

. All day events - An entry with start and end dates but no specific times. Use All day event for an entry that lasts a whole day or several days, (for example conferences). An appointement can overlap an All day event (for example a lunch during a conference). Different views You can see your Calendar entries in three views:

Day Week Month 81 r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l P800_UM.book Page 82 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To change view Tap Tap Tap The to display the day view. Dayikonen ska in to display the week view. to display the month view. Using the calendar To create a new calendar entry 1. Select Calendar > New and enter a short description of the entry. This is the description you see in the calendar. 2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the entry in. 3. Continue to enter information to the items on the detail page. Type - Specify if the entry is an appointment, reminder or all day event. Date - Tap the date to get a calendar where you can set a date for the entry. Time - Set start and end time for the entry. Location - Specify a location or select an location you have used before. Alarm - Select the check box if you want your telephone to alert you about the entry with a sound. Tap the time and date that appears to do your settings. 82 Repeat - Specify if you want to repeat the entry or not. Read more about this below. Private - Select the check box to prevent the task from being viewed by others then yourself if you synchronize your calender with, for example, your PC. Kollas 4. Select the note page tab to write a note to this entry. 5. Tap to save and close the entry. To repeat reoccuring entries 1. When entry is open, tap Repeat. Set repeting to Daily, Weekly, Monthly by date, Monthly by day, Yearly by day or Yearly by date. Interval - Specify how often the event will happen, for example, by selecting Weekly and Interval 2 means that the event will go off every two weeks on the specified day. Forever/Until - Set the time limit for the alarm or select forever. Select days - Weekly repeted vents can be set to occur twice or more in a week. For example, eating lunch with a friend Tuesday and Friday every week. Note You can not repeat All day events. To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by taping it in the calandar. 2. Do the changes according to the instructions above. P800_UM.book Page 83 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Managing entries To find a certain entry 1. Tap Calendar > Find. 2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears. 3. Select where to search (Everywhere, Future, Past) 4. Tap Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Tap an entry on the result list to open it. To delete an entry Open the entry and select Calendar > Delete entry. Note A deleted entry can not be restored. To delete all entries in a period of time 1. Select Calendar > Remove entries. 2. Select the time period and tap Done. All entries from that time period are deleted from the Calendar. Note Repeated entries will not be deleted Editorial Comment:

To copy, cut or paste an entry 1. Open the entry 2. Tap Edit > Copy/Cut/Paste entry. Preliminary To move a Calendar item to Tasks Open the entry and tap Calendar > Move to Tasks. The entry is moved, not copied. If you move an entry with an alarm, it will also sound in Tasks. Note Some information such as wich folder it is stored in may be lost. To cut or copy Calendar entries to the Tasks application 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Cut entry or Copy entry 2. Open Tasks. 3. Select Edit > Paste entry Customize the calendar You can customize the calendar views and alarm settings to suit you own needs. To customise the calendar view, General tab 1. Select Edit > Preferences 2. Select the General tab 83 r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l r a d n e a C l 2. Select a folder and tap Edit or create a new folder by tapping Add. 3. Tap the colour box and select colour for that folder and tap Done. Entries in a folder with a specific colour appear in that colour in Day and Week views (but not in Month view) so that you can see tha pattern of events in your diary. Reminders appear as whatever the folder colour. Saving changes If you leave Calendar while editing an entry, your changes are saved automatically. P800_UM.book Page 84 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Now you can change the following settings:

The hours to be shown in a day. Standard time intervals in the day view. How detailed the time is showed in the calendar day view. Standard entry length. View hours in week from/to. To customise the Alarm settings 1. Select Edit > Preferences 2. Select the Alarm tab Now you can change the following settings:

Alarm precedes event by - how long before an entry the alarm shall go off. Alarm sound - select sound for the alarm. To customise the display 1. In calendar, tap Edit > Preferences 2. On the General tab you change the hours displayed in one day, one week, standard time intervals or standard entry length. 3. On the Alarm tab you set the an alarm to proceed an entry in the calendar. To set colours to your entries using the folders 1. In Calendar, tap the folders menu to the right in the meny bar and select Edit folders. 84 P800_UM.book Page 85 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Tasks Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. QT - Applications 6.2 UI Specification White Paper LZT 123 943 R1A With the Tasks function you can make a list of things you need to do both at work (for example, action items) and elsewhere

(for example, a reminder to air your dog). The folders help you to separate different types of activities. You can move entries between Tasks and the Calendar, which is useful when you come to schedule a Tasks entry. You can also send an entry through SMS, IR, Bluetooth or MMS. e-mail?

Using Tasks When opening Tasks you will have a task list of entered tasks. In this list you can only see a short description of the task. Tap a task to see its full information. A task entry consists of two pages. One detail page where you set the properties for the task, and one page where you can add notes. Preliminary To create a new task entry 1. Select Tasks > New and enter a short description of the task. This is the description you see in the task list. 2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the task in. 3. Continue to enter information to the items on the detail page. Completed - Select the check box when task is done.This can also be done directly in the tasks list. Priority - Set a priority for the task. You can sort the tasks by priority. Due date - Select the check box to set a deadline to the task. Tap the date that appears to get a calendar where you can set a due date. Alarm - Select the check box if you want your telephone to alert you about the task. Tap the time and date that appears to do your settings. Private - Select the check box to prevent the task from being synchronized with the task in other devices, for example your PC. Kollas 4. Select the note page tab to write a note to this entry. 5. Tap *Ikon enter* to save and close the task. Note *Delete* will delete the whole task entry. 85 s k s a T s k s a T s k s a T s k s a T P800_UM.book Page 86 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To edit an entry 1. Open the entry by tapping it in the tasks list. 2. Do the changes according to the instructions above. Managing task entries To open an existing entry Tap the entry in the tasks list To mark an entry as completed Select the check box to the left of the entry in the tasks list. To sort the entries Tap Edit > Sort on priority or Sort on date. To find a certain entry 1. Tap Tasks > Find. 2. Enter a search word in the menu that appears. 3. Select in which folder to search or use default value All folders. 4. Tap Find. A result list is then displayed. 5. Tap an entry on the result list to open it. To delete an entry Open the entry in the task list and then select Delete. 86 To restore a deleted entry Tap Edit > Undo delete. In your task list, tap Tasks > Delete completed. To delete all completed entries Note Unlike individual entries; when you delete All Completed entries, they are removed permanently and can not be restored. Sending and moving task entries To send an entry to another device 1. Open the entry and select Tasks > Send as. 2. Select how to send entry (SMS, Infrared, Bluetooth or MMS) and then tap Done. To copy, cut or paste an entry Tap Edit > Copy/Cut/Paste entry. To move an entry to the Calendar Open the entry and select Tasks > Move to Calendar. The entry is moved, not copied. To copy a task entry to Calendar 1. Open the entry and select Edit > Copy entry. 2. Open Calendar. P800_UM.book Page 87 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 3. Tap the day you wish the task to appear. 4. Select Edit > Paste Entry in Calendar. Note If you move or copy an entry to the Calendar it will lose the priority it was assigned in Tasks. If you do not set a due date for the tasks entry, the current date is used for the new Calendar entry. If you move or copy an entry with an alarm, the alarm will also be moved to the Calendar. Settings Select Edit > Preferences to do the settings. The following settings are available. Display due dates - Select to display them in the tasks list or not Display completed - Select to display them or not in the tasks list. This will not delete the completed tasks. Alarm sound - Select an alarm sound for the tasks. Preliminary s k s a T s k s a T s k s a T s k s a T 87 Drawing pictures The drawing mode gives you several options to draw in different styles or colors. The main window is the paper where you may draw with your stylus in the same way as you draw with an ordinary pen. Jotter Edit Unfiled P800_UM.book Page 88 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Jotter The Jotter works as a note book where you can write notes and draw pictures. The folders help you to separate different types of notes. A Jotter entry consists of two pages. One text page and one drawing page. When opening Jotter you will see a list of entered notes. In this list you can only see the first words of the text note. Tap a note to see its full information. Writing text notes Open Jotter and choose Jotter >New. The new note will automatically start as a text note. Note You write text notes on the text page by using the keys or the handwriting recognition. See Chapter Getting started to get more information. Tap A to get bold text and to create a bullet list. 88 P800_UM.book Page 89 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM to change color. A color scheme will be displayed. Tap Tap again on the color you prefer. Tap to change the virtual nib. A list of nibs representing different pen widths appears. Tap on the nib you want to use. Tap to activate the eraser. The eraser is either on or off. It works as the pen and erases with the same size as the chosen nib. Tap the eraser again to re-activate the pen. All jotter files (both text and drawings) are automatically stored in the telephone. The list view will be presented to you as soon as you start the Jotter application. Creating and editing notes To create a new note 1. Tap Jotter > New and enter a note on the text page. The first words will name the note in the jotter list. 2. Tap Unfiled (the folder menu) in the menu bar and select a folder to store the jotter in. 3. Select the drawing page tab to draw a sketch to this note. 4. Tap *Ikon enter* to save and close the note. Preliminary To edit a note while working with it For text, tap Edit > Revert The text returns to its original state. All changes are lost. For sketches, tap Edit > Undo This choice removes your last pen stroke. If you change your mind, tap Edit > Redo. To create a new note from text or sketches copied from another application 1. Open the list of notes and tap Edit > Paste. Note If you paste a sketch over an existing sketch, the existing sketch is deleted. Create a note from the Flip Closed mode. 1. Choose Applications >Jotter from the Flip closed mode. 2. If you have previos notes stored, these will now be listed. Use the Jog Dial to select a previous note in order to open it. 3. Press the menu key if you want to create a new note. Chose New. Insert your text by using the keypad. Managing notes To delete a note 1. Tap the note in the notes list The note opens. 89 r e t t o J r e t t o J r e t t o J r e t t o J P800_UM.book Page 90 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 2. Select Jotter > Delete note. Sending a note You can send a Jotter note by e-mail, SMS, MMS, Infrared or Bluetooth. To send a note Open the note and tap Jotter > Send as. The note will be sent as text and/or with the image depending on message type:

SMS: Text only E-mail: Text as body and Image as an attachment. MMS: Text and Image on first slide Bluetooth, Infrared: Complete Jotter entry , text only or image only 90 P800_UM.book Page 91 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Games There are two pre-installed games in the smartphone. A traditional Chess and the card game Solitaire. You will find both games in the Flip open modes list view. There is more games available for the smartphone. You will find these games on a disc in your original smartphone box. Games from third parties developers might be installed in the smartphone. Games which are not certified by Sony-Ericsson or their partners are not guaranteed to work correctly or securely, and users install them at their own risk. Chess You can play Chess against the the smartphone or against another smartphone user. In the latter mode, Chess communicates with another player via SMS. On completion of a move, the move data is transmitted in an SMS form to the other player. After transmission, the game waits for an incoming SMS from your opponent and uses its contents to determine the next move on the board, at which point control reverts to you. Preliminary Configuration There are levels from amateur to advanced. Choosing a higher level may however force the Smartphone to take longer to select a move. If you end up winning all the games, it may be time to select a more difficult level. Switching to Flip closed mode closes the game temporarily and saves the session status. In multi-player mode, an end-game SMS is sent to the remote player. Choose level 1. Select Chess> Level. 2. Tap on a level you think may suit your capacity. 3. Tap OK, Play Chess When you have set up a new game, a chessboard will be displayed. On the board are the 32 chess. 1. Tap the piece you want to move. The square where it is standing will now be highlighted. 2. Tap the square to where you want to move the piece. The square will flash and the selected piece will arrive on it. Selecting a square that is not allowed for a piece is not possible. 91 s e m a G s e m a G s e m a G s e m a G P800_UM.book Page 92 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Solitaire Solitaire is a card game played with a standard deck of 52 cards plus up to 4 Jokers. Understand the game The purpose of Solitaire is to remove all the cards from the piles to the layout card whilst scoring as many points as possible. Points are awarded for playing pile cards and bonus points are awarded for unbroken, ascending or descending runs of four or more rank cards. When you can not play any more card and cards still remains in the piles, the game is over. If all the pile cards are removed, bonus points are awarded and the hand is won. You are then challenged to play a game of Hi/Lo-card nature to acquire more bonus points. After the challenge, the game continues and a new hand is dealt with one less Joker. 92 Rules When the game starts, 35 cards are dealt from the deck into 7 piles of 5 cards. A further card is then dealt face up to from the layout card. Cards can only be played from the bottom of the piles. To play a pile card it must have a face value of one or more or one less than the layout card. Aces are low and may not be played onto Kings. Jokers can be played onto any card and any card can be played onto a Joker. Settings You may restart the game during a play. 1. Tap Solitaire >New. You may also undo/redo a move. 1. Tap Edit >Undo/Redo. You may change card backs and playing background 1. Tap Edit >Preferences. If your result is one of the sixth best it will be placed in the high score table. You can also watch individual player statistics. P800_UM.book Page 93 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Play Solitaire Solitaire is only available in the Flip open mode. 1. Tap the icon for Solitaire. The game will either start with a new game or with the layout for an earlier, interrupted game.(The game data is saved on return to desktop, on flip-close or on low battery.) 2. Tap the card you want to move and it will be higlighted. 3. Tap the card where you like to move the higlighted card. Preliminary s e m a G s e m a G s e m a G s e m a G 93 P800_UM.book Page 94 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Voice memo Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. QUARTZ FC Voice UI Specification Rev5.03 2001-12-17 QUARTZ Applications 6.2 UI Specification Rev9 2001-10-01 In Voice memo you can record and listen to your own voice memos. You can also exchange voice memos between phones via Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-

mail or MMS, and use a voice memo as a ring signal. You cannot name a voice memo that you have recorded. Each memo is identified by the date and time it was recorded and by its position in the list of voice memos. For example, the third of five voice memos is identified as 3 of 5 on the screen. Recording voice memos You can record and listen to your own voice memos, as well as save and listen to voice memos that others have sent to you. You can add a new recording to the end of an existing voice memo. When you do this, the position of the voice memo in the list does not change and the original date and time of the recording are retained. 94 To record and save a voice memo 1. Select

> New.

A new voice memo is created. 2. Select 3. Select and start recording after the beep. to finish the recording. The new voice memo is automatically saved in the list of voice memos with the current date and time. Note You can use all other functions in your smartphone at the same time as you are recording or listening to a voice memo. Key functions Tap... To... start recording a voice memo. listen to the current voice memo recording. stop the current voice memo recording. go to the previous voice memo, in the list of voice memos. go to the next voice memo, in the list of voice memos. To delete a voice memo 1. Select a voice memo you want to delete. P800_UM.book Page 95 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 2. Select Delete > Yes. Using voice memos as ring signals You can set a voice memo as a ring signal. Choose between a recording you have made yourself, and a recording you may have received via e-mail or in a mulitmedia message. To set a voice memo as ring signal see cross ref to the Telephony chapter. Exchanging voice memos You can send and receive voice memos by Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication, e-mail or MMS. To send a voice memo 1. Select Voice Memo > Send as. 2. Select how you want to send the voice memo. See the Messaging chapter for further details on how to send and receive voice memos. Preliminary 95 o m e m e c o V i o m e m e c o V i o m e m e c o V i o m e m e c o V i P800_UM.book Page 96 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary CommuniCam Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype with CeBit SW. Users manual Ericsson R380 and T68 FS Multimedia, 16/155 17-CRH 162 02 Uen, Rev A. Packet Video CommuniCam HIS Packet Video Pictures HIS Editorial Comment:Beskrivning av bde CommuniCam och Pictures-funktionen. Using the camera With the built in camera CommuniCam you can take pictures, view them in your phone screen and send them to friends or colleagues via multimedia messaging. You can also send the pictures you have saved in your smartphone to any other PC device via infrared communication or Bluetooth wireless technology. It is also possible to exchange pictures between the smartphone and the Web. 96 The pictures in your smartphone can be set as screen savers or they can be added to the contacts in your phonebook (see reference to Personalizing your smartphone). To take a picture 1. Press the camera button to activate the CommuniCam application. 2. Make sure you can see the subject in the display, then press the camera button again. The pictures are automatically saved in Pictures. To send the picture via MMS, select Send as MMS from the Flip closed context menu. To view, edit or send the picture, tap directly to Pictures. which takes you Delay timer You can take a picture with a 15-second delay before the actual picture is taken. This is a useful function if you want to be in the picture yourself. To take a picture with delay timer 1. Select 2. Tap Off. The icon changes into

. 15s. P800_UM.book Page 97 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 3. Press the camera button. The timer beeps for 15 seconds before the picture is taken. Preferences It can be useful to change the preferences for the camera, for example, if you are taking a picture in daylight or in dark surroundings. You can also choose what resolution (size and quality) you want for each separate picture. Preliminary To restore default camera preferences 1. Select CommuniCam > Restore defaults. 2. Select Yes. To change preferences for the camera 1. Select 2. Select CommuniCam > Preferences. 3. Select the setting you want to change:

. Move the slider to change the brightness of the picture. Move the slider to change the contrast colour. Turn the backlight On when the light behind the subject is brighter than the light in front of the subject. Turn the flicker free function On to reduce the effects of flicker from, for example, fluorescent light. Choose white balance according to the lighting conditions you are in when taking the picture. Choose quality and size for the picture. High picture quality means larger file size and larger memory size than low picture quality. The picture sizes are displayed in pixels. 97 i m a C n u m m o C i m a C n u m m o C i m a C n u m m o C i m a C n u m m o C P800_UM.book Page 98 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Pictures In Pictures you can manage all pictures saved in your smartphone. The pictures can be taken using the CommuniCam, received via e-mail, Bluetooth wireless technology or infrared communication, downloaded via the browser or transferred from your PC via a cable. Your smartphone supports JPEG, GIF, PNG, WBPM and BMP picture formats. The pictures can be sent in multimedia messages, added to the contacts in your phonebook, or used as wallpaper and screensaver. List view In the list view, you get an overview of all the pictures in your smartphone. You can search for specific pictures, zoom the picture names and sort your pictures by name, date, size or type. Change between a thumbnail view and a list view of the pictures by tapping At the bottom of the screen you can see how many pictures you have saved in your smartphone. and

. 98 P800_UM.book Page 99 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Tip To take a new picture, tap the CommuniCam. Tip Use the Find function to locate a certain picture, and the Zoom function to change the size of the screen fonts. which takes you directly to To sort the pictures Select Edit > choose how you want to sort the pictures in your folders. Preliminary Detail view s e r u t c P i s e r u t c P i In the detail view, you can rename your pictures and sort them into folders. This makes it easier for you to keep track of the pictures in your smartphone. To rename a picture 1. Select Pictures > Rename picture. 2. Enter a picture name > Done. Two or more pictures can not have the same name. Tip Use the Folder function to organize all your pictures. See cross ref to General functions on page 18. s e r u t c P i s e r u t c P i 99 If you want to use one of your pictures in another application you can simply copy it and then paste it into the application of your choice. To copy a picture Select Edit > Copy picture. A copy of the picture is saved in Pictures. Sony Image Station You can exchange pictures between your smartphone and Sony Image Station on the Web. Use the browser in your smartphone to go to http://www.imagestation.com/ and sign up. P800_UM.book Page 100 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary At the bottom of the screen you can see the picture information, for example, the size of the picture and the date the picture was taken. To change between the actual size of the picture and a size that fits on the screen, tap Use folder. to move between the pictures in the current takes you back to the list view. and and

. Sending and receiving pictures You can send pictures to other phones or to a PC via multimedia messaging. You can also save pictures that you have received via e-mail and in multimedia messages. To send a picture Select Pictures > Send as. See Messaging for further details. To save a picture from a message See Messaging for details. To delete a picture 1. Select Pictures > Delete picture. 2. Select Yes. 100 P800_UM.book Page 101 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Audio player Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linna UI Design specification - Composer RevA 2001-12-18 Packet Video Audio Player HIS, Version 1.1, 2002-04-11 Linna PRS Rev D Your smartphone has Mobile music in the form of an audio player. With the audio player you can listen to the latest music tracks, or complete albums. You can download tracks to your smartphone from a PC or the Internet, and create different play lists, using the folder function. Your smartphone supports a number of different sound files. Cross ref See Technical Specifications on page XX. List view In the list view, you can decide what types of sound files to include in your different play lists, and how to play back the play list you are currently in. You can also easily move between the play list view and the file list view for the current folder. Preliminary r e y a p l Play list viewFile list view i o d u A r e y a p l i o d u A In the play list view you play, pause and stop the play-back of the current folder, and see the duration of the track. In the file list view you can see how many tracks you have in the current folder. Icon Function Stop the track that is playing. Play/Pause the highlighted track. Takes you directly to the Play list view. 101 l r e y a p o d u A i r e y a p l i o d u A To adjust the volume Move the Jog Dial up to increase the volume, and down to decrease the volume. Detail view In the detail view, you can move tracks between your different folders using the folder function, send tracks to other phones or to a PC, using e-mail, multimedia messaging, Bluetooth wireless technology, infrared communication or cable. Here it is also possible to rename and delete tracks saved in your smartphone. P800_UM.book Page 102 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Icon Function Takes you directly to the File list view. Speak Shows what track that is playing. Loop With the loop function you can decide if you want to listen to the tracks in the current folder only once, or if you want to loop them until you manually stop the play-back. To loop a play list 1. Select Audio > Loop. 2. Select the checkbox. Preferences You can choose if you want all types of sound files to be displayed and played in the play lists, or if you want to display and play only a certain type of sound file. The sound files you can choose from are the ones that are supported by the smartphone. To select sound file types for the play lists 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Check the boxes next to the sound files you want to include in the play lists > Done. 102 P800_UM.book Page 103 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM The detail view displays the name of the track, the artist name, the album title, the track number, the copyright year, the sound file type and the duration of the track. Note The amount of information displayed depends on how much information is available on the sound file. Move between the tracks in the current folder using the and buttons. To rename a track 1. Select Audio > Rename track. 2. Enter a track name > Done. Two or more tracks can not have the same name. To delete a track from the smartphone 1. Select Audio > Delete track. 2. Select Yes. To send a track Select Audio > Send as. See Messaging for further details. Note You can not send MP3, WAV or AU sound files in a multimedia message. Only AMR sound files can be sent using multimedia messaging. Preliminary Downloading tracks When you receive sound files in other applications, such as e-

mail and multimedia messages you activate the viewer in your smartphone. From the viewer you can then save the sound file to your smartphone. To save a track from another application 1. Select Audio > Save track. 2. Select what folder you want to save the track in > Save. Note To create your own melodies, see the information on the CD for your smartphone. 103 r e y a p l i o d u A r e y a p l i o d u A l r e y a p o d u A i r e y a p l i o d u A

 

 

P800_UM.book Page 104 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Video player You can view video clips that you have saved in your smartphone. The video clips can be downloaded in the smartphone from an Internet site or transferred from a PC via cable. It is also possible to send these video clips to other phones or PCs, via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology and multimedia messaging. It is not necessary to download the video clips to be able to view them. You can use the streaming function and view the video clip from the Web site where it is located. The video clip is played with only a short time delay. The video player supports the MPEG-4 file format, e.g. name.mp4. List view Display dump of List view in Video player. In the list view, you get an overview of all the MPEG-4 video clips in your smartphone. You can search for specific video clips, zoom the video clip names and sort them by name, date, size or type. At the bottom of the screen you can see how many video clips you have saved in your smartphone. To view a video clip 1. Select

. 2. Tap a video clip in the list.

104 P800_UM.book Page 105 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Tip Use the Find function to locate a certain video clip, and the Zoom function to change the size of the screen fonts. To sort the video clips Select Edit > choose how you want to sort the video clips in the current folder. Preferences When you download a video clip to your smartphone, it is saved in the download cache memory. When this memory is full you have to empty it to be able to download new video clips to your smartphone. To clear the download cache 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Select Clear cache > Done. When you view a video clip from a Web site, using the streaming function, a media buffer is used to provide a steady flow of data. Increasing the size of the media buffer may improve the play-back of the video clip. To change the media buffer size 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Tap Custom setting > move the slider left or right. Preliminary Detail view l r e y a p o e d V i OBS!

New image!!

r e y a p l o e d V i In the detail view you can send, rename, delete or categorize your video clips. Only the video clips saved in you smartphone can be handled in the detail view. To handle a video clip saved on a Sony Memory Stick, you first have to save it to your smartphone. Icon Function Stop the track that is playing. Play/Pause the highlighted track. Rewind the current track. r e y a p l o e d V i r e y a p l o e d V i 105 Saving video clips When you play video clips that you have received via e-mail or multimedia messaging, or that you have downloaded to your smartphone from the Web, the viewer detail view is automatically launched. From the viewer detail view you can then save the video clip to your smartphone. To save a video clip from another application 1. Select the video clip you want to save. 2. Select Video > Save clip. 3. Select what folder you want to save the video clip in > Save. P800_UM.book Page 106 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Icon Function Forward the current track. Takes you back to the previous view. To rename a video clip 1. Select Video > Rename clip. 2. Enter a video clip name > Done. Two or more video clips can not have the same name. To send a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to send. 2. Select Video > Send as > choose how you want to send it. Tip Use the Folder function to organize all your video clips. To copy the current video clip to another folder, select Video >

Copy to, then select a folder from the list. To view the video clip info 1. Select Video > Clip info. To delete a video clip 1. Select the video clip you want to delete. 2. Select Video > Delete clip. 106 P800_UM.book Page 107 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Online services Online service is a customized service offered by a local network operator. Online services provides a mechanism which allows applications that exist on the sim to interacate and operate with the smartphone. It may provide services ranging from weather forecasts to the latest information from the stock market. The service is dependant on a special SIM card which supports Online services. Note Contact your operator to find out which services are available for your account. i s e c v r e s e n i l n O i s e c v r e s e n i l n O i s e c v r e s e n i l n O i s e c v r e s e n i l n O 107 P800_UM.book Page 108 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary World clock Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. QUARTZ DFRD Time UI Specification Rev 5 2001-03-27 The time and date are always displayed in standby mode. You can customize the display of times and dates throughout the smartphone. You can set your current location and another location of your choice. It is also possible to set three different alarms. Current city Current date Other city Alarm slot 108 Time and date To set the current time and date 1. Select 2. Tap the clock to view the current time and date settings.

. 3. Tap the Date box, then tap the arrows to set the current year and month. Then tap the current day. 4. Tap Daylight saving time, then tap the checkbox next to the zone that currently has summer time > Done. This is only required if you are currently in a country with summer time. P800_UM.book Page 109 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 5. Tap the time box, then tap the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 6. Tap the am/pm box to switch between am and pm >

is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. This 7. Select Done. Format You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12- or 24-hour time format. To set the time and date display format 1. Select 2. Tap the clock to view the current time and date settings.

. Preliminary 3. Select Format. 4. Tap the Date format box > choose a format. 5. Tap the Date separator box > choose a separator. 6. Select a Time format. 7. Tap the Time separator box > choose a separator. 8. Select Done. 109 k c o c l d l r o W k c o c l d l r o W l k c o c d l r o W k c o c l d l r o W P800_UM.book Page 110 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Workdays You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customise the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar. Locations Specify the country and city you are currently in. The city you select will be displayed next to the clock in Time. If you are away from home, for example travelling in another country, it can be useful to know what the time is in your home country as well as the country you are in. The city you select as Other city will be displayed below the clock in Time.

To specify your workdays 1. Select 2. Tap the clock >

3. Tap the checkboxes next to the days you normally work. 4. Select First day of week > choose a day. 5. Select Done. right arrow key icon twice. 110 To set the locations 1. Select

. 2. Select Time > Set location. 3. Tap the Current country box > the country you are in at the

moment. P800_UM.book Page 111 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 4. Tap the Current city box > the city you are in at the moment. If the city you are in is not listed, select the city closest to you. 5. Tap the Other country box > choose a country. 6. Tap the Other city box > choose a city. 7. Select Done. Numbers You can choose how you want the measurements and numbers in your smartphone to be displayed in all your applications. Distances can be displayed using the imperial or the metric system and different punctuation marks can be used as separators.

To set the number details 1. Select 2. Select Time > Set location. 3. Select Numbers. 4. Tap the distance boxes > choose imperial or metric. 5. Choose separators and Symbol position in the same way as in 4. Preliminary Alarms You have the possibility to set up to three different alarms in your smartphone. You can choose to activate one of the preset alarms, or set a new alarm with your own definitions. You can choose to set a silent alarm, where only a message is displayed when it goes off, or you can set a sound alert. If you are on the phone when an alarm is set to go off, the alarm will not go off until you hang up. To activate an existing alarm Tap the checkbox in the alarm slot. status bar on the screen. is displayed on the To set a new alarm

. 1. Select 2. Tap one of the alarm slots.

k c o c l d l r o W k c o c l d l r o W l k c o c d l r o W 6. Select Done. 111 k c o c l d l r o W P800_UM.book Page 112 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 3. Select Time > choose at what time you want the alarm to go off. 4. Select When > choose how often you want the alarm to go off:

Once The alarm will go off at a time more than 24 hours from now but within the next eight days. Next 24 hours Within the next 24 hours. Daily Every day at the specified time. Weekly Every week at the specified time. Workdays Every workday at the specified time. 5. Select Alarm sound > choose a sound. 6. Select Message > choose a preset message or write a new one. 7. Select Done. 8. Make sure the checkbox next to the alarm is selected. When the alarm goes off, select Snooze to postpone the alarm for five minutes or Silence to turn off the alarm sound. To turn off the alarm completely, select Done. 112 P800_UM.book Page 113 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Calculator Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. QUARTS DFRD Calculator UI Specification Rev4 2001-03-09 R380 users guide The Calculator is a standard 10-digit calculator. You can add, subtract, multiply, divide, calculate square root and percentage. It also has a memory function. To use the calculator 1. Select

. 2. Enter the calculations by tapping the digits.

Preliminary r o t All calculations, except percentage calculations, are performed as they are entered, for example: 5+5x5=50, not 30. Percentage calculations are performed backwards. To calculate, for example, 10% of 50, enter 50x10%. The result is displayed when you tap the % key. l a u c a C l Key functions m+

Tap once to store an entered value in the memory. If you already have entered a value in the memory, tap once to add the value in the display to the value in the memory. Tap once to retrieve a value from the memory and enter it into the display. Tap twice to clear the memory. Tap once to subtract the entered value from the value in the memory. The memory is adjusted but not displayed. Tap once to delete the last digit you entered. Tap once to reset the display to 0. mr m-

C You can copy and paste values to and from other applications by selecting Calculator > Copy or Paste. Values stored in the memory are retained while using other programs. 113 l t r o a u c a C l l t r o a u c a C l r o t l a u c a C l P800_UM.book Page 114 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Personalizing your smartphone Editorial Comment: Illustrations to be redone in greyscale and linked in by reference. There are a number of ways you can give your smartphone a personal touch and change its settings to suit your requirements. Changing your Application Shortcuts The standby screen shown when the flip is closed shows five shortcuts to applications. From the Control panel you can change them, rearrange them as you prefer, or even hide them.if you wish. See Application shortcuts on page 25 Displaying the Area Code in the Standby Screen If your network operator provides CBS (Cell Broadcast Services) with cell information you can set your smartphone to display the area code below the network name in the standby view. See CBS tab on page 129. Control panel you can set a background picture Setting a background picture From the image for the standby screen. See Display on page 117 You can obtain suitable background picture files by downloading, beaming using transfer them from your PC. Background picture images are 208 x 320 pixels and divided into two parts: the upper part, 208 x 144 pixels, carries the image seen in standby screen, the lower part can be set to a colour or design to influence the light that shines through the keys. The images can be JPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP, MBM or PNG format. Bluetooth or Infrared or Setting a Screen Saver You can set a 'screen saver' image to be displayed after a period of inactivity. From the Control panel you can also switch this facility on and off and select the delay period before the screen saver is displayed. See Display on page 117. Key lock and device lock may be used in combination with the screen saver. When you press a button or touch the screen, you will be prompted to activate keys and/or enter the device lock code. r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P 114 P800_UM.book Page 115 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Image format is the same as for the background picture image. Adding images to your Contacts You can store a picture with each entry in Contacts. See Managing contacts on page 54. Pictures are easily taken using the CommuniCam (see CommuniCam on page 85, though of course other images can be used. Preliminary If your network operator provides a CLI (Calling Line Identity) service, your smartphone can display the contact's picture together with the other information when an incoming call is received with a CLI matching that contact (not all numbers can be displayed). The contact's picture is also displayed when making a call. To show the contacts picture when receiving an incoming call:

1. Select 2. Select the Show picture for incoming calls check box. 3. Tap Done. Phone > Edit >Preferences > Incoming call picture Ring signals Your smartphone can play both iMelody format and polyphonic ring signals (WAV, AU, AMR, and MIDI sound file formats). You can add as many ring signals as desired, subject only to available file space. A ring signal may be selected for an entry in that the caller can be identified by the ring signal that is played. You can set a voice note recording as a ring signal. See Using voice notes as ring signals on page 84. Choose between a recording you have made yourself, and a recording you may have downloaded, transferred from your PC, or received via e-mail, EMS or MMS. Contacts, so 115 r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P r u o y g n z i i l a n o s r e P P800_UM.book Page 116 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary The recommended format for WAV files is PCM, 22,050 Hz, 8 bit, Mono, often called 'radio quality'. This format requires approximately 22 kilobytes of space for each second duration. Many PC audio applications support WAV. Alarm tones and sound notification You can choose different sounds for alarms and notifications in these applications:

Master Reset In the smartphone to the way they were when you originally bought it. See Master reset on page 124 for more details. Control panel you can reset all the settings in your World clock SeeAlarms on page 8 Calendar Set a sound for reminder alerts, see Customize the calendar on page 78) Set a sound for reminder alarms. See Settings on page 82 Set a different sound for each type of message as notification of a new message:

SMS e-mail MMS Notice (BIO messages) Area information WAP Push See Messaging accounts on page 124 Tasks Messages 116 P800_UM.book Page 117 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Control panel The Control panel is the location for all the main settings on your smartphone that are system wide and affect more than one application. This is the main place to go to initially set up your smartphone, and to change settings at any point thereafter. To access it, select To make the settings easier to find, they have been grouped into three groups shown on separate tabs: Device, Connections and General:

Control Panel in Applications General tab International Time & date Connections tab Bluetooth Cable Infrared Internet accounts IP security manager Messaging accounts Secure tokens WAP accounts Device tab Certificate Manager Display Flip closed shortcuts Flip removed Format disk Language Master reset Storage manager System sounds Text input User greeting WIM management To see a list of all control panel settings and the groups to which they have been assigned, tap Control panel > Set groups. To sort the list of settings by group name: at the top of the list, tap Group. To change the group to which a setting is assigned: select the name of the setting in the list. The sections below, arranged in alphabetical order, describe the settings available for each of the default items in the Control panel. Bluetooth Bluetooth uses radio waves to enable wireless connections between your smartphone and other Bluetooth-enabled devices. This method of linking works well at a range of up to 10 metres, even if there is an obstruction between the two devices. 117 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 118 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Bluetooth settings are shown on two tabs:

Devices A list of all the Bluetooth-enabled devices that your smartphone is paired (bonded) with. To change the name of a device, select the name in the To remove a device from the list, select the name and list. tap Remove. Settings A friendly device name for your smartphone Security-related settings:

Its Bluetooth operation mode How it should act when receiving a beamed entry. Tip You will probably find that the preset name of your smartphone, and of devices you pair it with, are not very meaningful or easily recognizable. It is a good idea to change these names to something more useful. The name you choose for your smartphone appears on any devices you pair it with. To locate other Bluetooth-enabled devices in the vicinity:

1. Tap Add. The Available Bluetooth devices dialogue opens:

118 All enabled devices that are discoverable within range are shown with their name and icon. You can use Show: to restrict the list to one category (only PC, for example). Paired devices that are within range are shown with regular text. Non-paired devices that are within range are shown with their names in italics. Devices that are within range but unknown are shown with a preset name. If a device you want to pair with your smartphone does not appear in the list, check that:

It is on and within range Bluetooth on the device is on and discoverable. To pair a device to your smartphone:

1. Select the device in the Available Bluetooth devices list 2. If the device requires a passkey you will be asked to enter it. 3. Tap Done Note The other device (a PC, for example) may require that you enter the same passkey in its own dialogue. P800_UM.book Page 119 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Security On the Settings tab you can set your smartphone to different operation modes:

On Auto Off Discoverable All Bluetooth functionality from your smartphone works. Your smartphone is connectable, paired devices can access it. All Bluetooth functionality from your smartphone works. Your smartphone is not connectable. Bluetooth is turned off. Other Bluetooth-enabled devices can find and connect to your smartphone. To pair with another device, your smartphone must be Discoverable You can also set how your smartphone should act when receiving beamed items:

Always receive Ask first Receives the entry automatically. You will be shown a Connection request that you can accept or reject. Rejects the item automatically. Never receive Preliminary Choose the cable connection mode: When connecting via cable the smartphone must be set in PC connect mode or Modem mode, see table below. PC connect mode Synchronization Installation of software Backup and restore Modem mode Smartphone as a modem Phone Book Manager (PC software) Set the baud rate, parity, number of stop bits, character length and type of flow control required for the connection When connecting your smartphone via the desk stand to a USB port on your PC, use the following (default) settings:

l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C 460800 None 1 1 CTS/RTS Baud rate Parity Stop bits Character length Flow control Tip You can set the cable connection mode when the flip is closed by selecting Connections >

Applications>

IconCable. l e n a p l o r t n o C Cable Use Cable to set the cable connection mode and the connection parameters used when communicating through your smartphones cable port. Tap Control Panel > Connections and select Cable to:

Certificate manager Digital certificates ensure that the web or WAP pages you visit, or any software you install, really are created by the person you expect. 119 l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 120 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Certificates may be present on the pages that you view or the software that you download. Your smartphone compares these certificates with a set of certificates that is stored in Certificate manager to ensure the authenticity of the page or software. If the certificates do not match, your smartphone informs you, and gives you the following choices:

Prevent the page being loaded or the software being installed Continue at your own risk The certificates on your smartphone have been created and issued by an independent organisation to ensure their authenticity. Security information Security information is displayed when Certificate manager cannot be sure of the origin of the page or software. For example, security information will be displayed if:

The certificate on a page has expired The identity of a software manufacturer cannot be verified Security information is also displayed when a certificate on your smartphone has:

Been revoked by the independent organisation that issued it. Expired 120 Adding and removing certificates Your smartphone handles certificates automatically so, most of the time, you can browse the Internet securely without using Certificate manager. If you do need to add or remove a certificate, you will usually be informed by your network operator or system administrator. You should remove a certificate from Certificate manager if you are informed, or suspect, that:

The certificate does not belong to the person who supplied it The certificate was issued incorrectly by the independent organisation that created it Type of certificate The type can be either Certificate Authority or User. Certificate Authority certificates contains server details. This type of certificate is handled by your smartphone when the server only requires server authentication. This means that your identity remains anonymous. User certificates contain your identity. This type of certificate is used when the server asks for client authentication. The client application requests you to identity yourself by choosing a user certificate. P800_UM.book Page 121 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Display Use the Display settings to control the screen and power functions of your smartphone. Wallpaper You can set a picture to be the background for the standby screen. (SeeFlip closed - overview on page 22 for details on the standby view.) Select Browser from the drop-down list to see image files available on your smartphone. The picture you selected last by browsing is shown as default in the list. Read more about background picture images in Personalizing your smartphone on page 110 Screen saver You can set a screen saver image to be displayed after a period of inactivity. You can also switch this facility on and off and select a delay period of up to 15 minutes before the screen saver is displayed. Read more about screensaver images in Personalizing your smartphone on page 110 If you select the Phone lock protected check box the Device lock will activate when the delay runs out. Read more about locks and security in Phone locks on page 16. Preliminary Power save You can set a power saver to switch of the screen after a period of inactivity (2, 3, 5, 7, 10, 15, or 30 minutes). When the power saver activates, the screen will be switched off. If you set times for both screen saver and power saver the power save setting will automatically be set higher. Light You can set the screen light settings for car use and handheld use. Auto Light switches on when you tap the screen, press a key, or receive an incoming call Light is always on Light is always off On Off Lock Tap Lock to activate the Screen saver immediately.If the Phone lock protected check box has been selected this will also activate the Device lock. 121 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 122 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Calibrate Occasionally you may find that you tap one object (for example a button or menu option) but another is activated. Calibrating the screen ensures that the correct object is activate. To restore calibration to the factory settings, press the Jog Dial Flip closed shortcuts Use this dialogue to configure the application shortcuts shown in the Flip Closed Standby view, see Standby view on page 24. You can change the five shortcuts shown. If you feel that the shortcuts obscure your wallpaper you can choose to have them hidden when you dont need them. By default these shortcut icons are displayed:

Messages Contacts Call list Calendar Applications To change an application shortcut in the Standby view:

1. In the Flip closed shortcuts dialogue, select the icon you wish to change. The name of the application is shown in the Set Application pick list. 2. Choose the application you want to replace it with from the Your choices will remain, even after power is lost. On a master reset, the default settings will be re-applied. list. 122 To hide the application shortcuts when your smartphone is inactive:

1. Clear the Shortcuts always displayed check box. with the caption. Flip removed When you use your smartphone with the hardware flip removed, you can use the keys on the virtual flip instead. Use this setting to turn it on or off (see Virtual flip on page 27). Format disk When you format a disk, you delete all the information on it, including any applications that you've installed. Your smartphone comes with one Sony Memory Stick Duo which is displayed here. Any Sony Memory Stick Duo that you install in your smartphone is also displayed. You can rename a disk to give it a more meaningful name. Infrared Use this setting to control the state of the infrared communications port of your smartphone. You can set it On, Off or On for 10 minutes. Read more about connecting to other devices using infrared in Connection via infrared port on page 127 P800_UM.book Page 123 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM International Use these settings to set the locations shown in as well the units for distances, numerical separators, and how currency values should be shown.There are two tabs: Locations and Numbers World Clock, On the Locations tab:

Set Current country and Current city to your current location. Set Other country and Other city to an alternative location (for example your home location if you are abroad). If the city you want is not listed, select another city in the desired time zone. On the Numbers tab:

Set Long Distance and Short distance to Imperial or Metric Long distances are those that are displayed in and are measured in miles or kilometres. Short distances are those that are measured in metres or and centimetres, or feet and inches. Set the decimal separator and thousands separator you desire. For applications that use currency values you can set a currency symbol and choose how the symbol should be placed in relation to the symbol. Preliminary Internet accounts You access the Internet using an Internet Service Provider (ISP), who supplies you with account details including: a username, a password, and the phone number or web site address that your smartphone automatically uses to access the Internet. You need to set up an Internet account before you can:

Access web pages and download MMS messages Set up an e-mail account to send and receive e-mail messages. Tip A simple way of setting up an Internet account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your smartphone. There are three types of Internet account:

Dial-up account:

. With a dial-up account, you're charged for the length of time that you're connected to the Internet. 123 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 124 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary High -speed dial-up account:

GPRS account:

This is a special kind of dial-up account. With a high-speed dial-up account, you're charged for the length of time you're connected but you can increase the connection speed so that information is transferred faster. Billing rates from your Internet Service Provider (ISP) may increase as you increase the connection speed. With a GPRS account, you're charged for the amount of information you view, download, or send. The dialogue has two tabs: Accounts and Other. 2. Give the account a name. This will be the name shown in your list of accounts. (In dialogs that appear while a connection is being established the text -GPRS is automatically added to names of GPRS accounts). 3. Choose the Connection type. for the type of account that you want to create, GPRS or Dial-up. 4. Continue entering settings as required. These will differ depending on the type of account: GPRS, dial-up or high-

speed dial-up:

Accounts tab The Internet accounts dialogue lists all the Internet accounts that have been set up on your smartphone. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account If you want to select an Internet account every time you connect to the Internet select the Show connection dialogue check box. This may be useful if you use different Internet accounts for Internet and Messages. Whenever you connect to the Internet, your Preferred account is the account that your smartphone prompts you to use. To create a new Internet account:

1. On the Accounts tab, tap New. 124 P800_UM.book Page 125 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM GPRS account New For some accounts you may need to make advanced settings. Tap Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below:

GPRS Advanced settings tabs Server Log in User name and password Normally, you do not have to enter a user name and password when you connect to a GPRS account. However, some service providers may require you to enter these details. Address Enter the Internet address of your GPRS account. The address is supplied by your service provider. The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. IP and DNS addresses uniquely identify your Internet Service Provider (ISP)'s computers, which your smartphone uses to connect to the Internet. Your smartphone can normally fetch these addresses automatically from most ISPs. If, after setting up an Internet account, you cannot connect to the Internet and you suspect these addresses are incorrect, ask your ISP for their IP and DNS addresses. Preliminary GPRS Advanced settings tabs IP address types There are four different types of IP addresses:

IPv4: Consists of four 3-digit boxes and valid input is between 000 and 256 in each box, IPv6: Consists of eight hexadecimal boxes and valid input is between 0000 and FFFF. IPv4 compatible: Consists of six hexadecimal boxes and four 3-digit boxes. The last hexadecimal box is prefilled with 0:0:0:0. Only the four 3-digit boxes can be changed, and the valid input is between 000 and 256. IPv4 mapped: Consists of six hexadecimal boxes and four 3-digit boxes. The last hexadecimal box is prefilled with F:F:F:F. Only the four 3-digit boxes can be changed, and the valid input is between 000 and 256. Proxy A proxy server is a computer that stores copies of web pages so that they are retrieved faster than they would be from their original location. To use a proxy server: specify the proxy server address and port number, which are available from your Internet Service Provider (ISP). If you use a proxy server, you can still specify a list of web sites that are accessed from their original location. Enter the Internet address of each web site on a separate line in the list Proxy exceptions 125 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C Tip To avoid having to change the phone number when you travel abroad: enter the international dialling prefix (for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your ISP. For some accounts you may also need to make advanced settings. P800_UM.book Page 126 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary GPRS Advanced settings tabs Other If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your smartphone to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. QoS Your ISP may require Plain text authentication. If you select the Plain text authentication check box, the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection is restored. Check with your mobile operator before changing any of the QoS (Quality of Service) settings. If your operator supports the use of Header compression, tapping On can speed up your connection. The settings Delay, Reliability, Peak rate, and Mean Rate are all by default set to Subscribed, which means that your operators default QoS (Quality of Service) values will apply. dial-up or high-speed dial-up account New Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your User name, your Password, and their Phone number, which your smartphone dials to connect to the Internet. If you have a high-

speed dial-up account with your ISP you 126 P800_UM.book Page 127 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Tap Advanced and enter settings on the tabs as described below Dial-up and high-speed dial-up advanced settings tabs Log in Script The settings on this tab deal with IP and DNS addresses. For an explanation of these settings, see Log in in the table GPRS Advanced settings tabs. As an alternative to entering your user name and password to access the Internet you may need to use a login script stored on your smartphone. Although uncommon, scripts may be required by your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Select the Use login script check box and enter the script text in the Script editor If you select the check box Plain text authentication

(required by some ISPs), the security of your connection will decrease during the connection process. Once you are connected, the security of your connection is restored. Select the checkbox Post connect terminal if:

The login script of the account that you are setting up requires that you input certain information or you will need to respond to prompts from the Internet account. You are connecting to a dial-up account that uses Secure Access generated by a separate smart card or hard token. Proxy Speed For an explanation of these settings, see Proxy in the table GPRS Advanced settings tabs You can only increase the speed of your connection if you have a high-speed dial-up account with your Internet Service Provider (ISP). Other Preliminary Dial-up and high-speed dial-up advanced settings tabs Secure To enable secure access for this Internet account you must link it to a vendor-associated Secure Token in this dialogue:

1. Select the vendor and token names of the Secure Token that you want to link to this account from the drop lists. 2. Select the Enable secure access check box. To create or delete Secure Tokens on your smartphone, tap Control panel > Connections

>Secure tokens. If your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supports Point to Point Protocol (PPP) extensions, you can select the Enable PPP extensions check box. PPP extensions allow your smartphone to provide features such as encryption, which increases the security of your Internet connection. If the computer that you connect to supports call back, it can break the Internet connection after you have logged in and then call your smartphone back to re-establish the connection. Call back saves you money and increases security. To enable call back:

1. Select the Enable call back check box. 2. In the Call back type list, choose whether you want the ISP to call you back using the phone number stored on the provider's server (Use server number) or another phone number (Use number below). 127 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 128 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To Edit an Internet account:

1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Tap Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Tap Done. Note If you change the Connection type all account data for that account will be deleted. To Delete an account:

1. On the Accounts tab, select the account in the list. 2. Tap Delete. 3. Tap Done. Other tab You can use the Dial-up timeout and GPRS timeout settings to set up your smartphone to disconnect automatically from the Internet if you're not using it. The connection is broken after the period you specify has lapsed. Preferred Mode (bearer preference) Select GPRS only if you do not want to be disturbed by incoming phone calls while browsing the web. All incoming voice (and GSM data) calls are rejected. When you have selected GSM only no GPRS data connection is possible. 128 If you select Automatic your smartphone will let you answer incoming GSM calls while having normal GPRS functionality. A GPRS data connection will be interrupted by a voice call. IP security manager The IP security manager displays stored policies and only one policy can be activated at a time. There are two types of passwords needed:

IP security password: is to be set when activating the very first policy, that is, this password is only set once, but it is possibly to change it later at any time by tapping Password button. Activation password: is needed when a policy is activated for the first time and the supplier of the policy gives this. Language Use this list of all languages stored on your smartphone to change language. The highlighted entry is the language presently in use. Tip To conserve storage space only a limited set of languages is loaded on your smartphone at delivery. You can use the P800 Change Language utility on the PC suite for P800 CD to load and delete languages. P800_UM.book Page 129 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Master reset Use Master reset to return your smartphone to the state it was in when originally delivered. Warning! All user data will be deleted and all settings will be in your smartphone to the way they were when it was originally delivered. If you want to keep installed applications clear the Delete user installed applications check box. Messages application can handle many different types Messaging accounts The of messages, but you must first set up accounts and make settings as described below. The Messaging accounts dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging account:

Email You can have any number of e-mail accounts. To receive and send e-mail, you must first set up an Internet account

(if one isn't already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 123 You can only have one SMS (Short Message Service) account.These settings also apply to EMS (Extended Message Service) messages. SMS Preliminary You can only have one MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) account. To receive MMS WAP-based content you must first set up an Internet account (if one isn't already set up). SeeInternet accounts on page 123 You can only have one CBS (Cell Broadcast Services) account. The number of Area Information channels that you can subscribe to is limited by the space on your SIM. MMS CBS Tip A simple way of setting up an e-mail or MMS account is to ask your service provider to send you a message that contains the required information to create an account automatically on your smartphone. Read more about the different types of messages in Messages on page 57. Email tab The Email tab shows a list of the e-mail accounts on your smartphone.You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. You can choose one of your e-mail accounts as Preferred. This will be the e-mail account that your smartphone uses when you use Send as to send an entry as e-mail directly from one of your smartphone applications To create a new e-mail account:

1. On the Email tab, tap New 129 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 130 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 2. On the Basic tab, enter the following settings:

Email account basic tab settings Account name Your name Email address This is the name you give to your email account. This name appears on your outgoing e-mails. Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your email address Connection type You probably won't need to change the connection type. Internet account Select one of your existing Internet accounts to access your e-mails. 3. On the Inbox tab, enter the following settings, as required:

Email account Inbox tab settings User name Incoming server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with your user name, your password, and its incoming server address, which identifies the computer where your incoming e-mails are stored. To prevent others reading your e-mail: enter a password. Password 130 Email account Inbox tab settings Download If you do not have much time to download your e-

mails, you can choose to receive just Just headers

(the sender, subject, and date only) or set a size limit (if an email is larger than the Emails smaller than limit, only the headers are downloaded). You can download the complete email later. Tap Schedule to schedule an automatic download of your incoming e-mails. E-mails that are waiting in your Outbox will not be sent at the same time. Schedule 4. On the Outbox tab:

Email account Outbox tab settings Outgoing server address Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) supplies you with its Outgoing server address, which identifies the computer from which your outgoing e-mails are sent. Some SMTP servers might require authentication also when sending e-mail. In that case, select the check box Use SMTP authentication and enter your User name and Password. If the SMTP server accepts using your IMAP login information for authentication select the check box Use IMAP login information. Use SMTP authentication Use IMAP login information P800_UM.book Page 131 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM 5. On the Advanced tab:

Email account Advanced tab settings Secure connection Secure password authentication Your Internet Service Provider (ISP) will tell you whether you can use either a Secure connection or Secure password authentication. A secure connection means that all information

(including your username, password, and all messages) is encrypted to maximise security while you're connected to the Internet. In contrast, secure password authentication means that only your password is encrypted. You probably won't need to change the Outgoing mail port or Incoming mail port numbers. Outgoing mail port Incoming mail port Use MIME encoding MIME encoding is a standard that allows non-

textual information (for example graphics) and accented characters to be sent in emails.If you should not wish to Use MIME encoding, clear the check box. Character Set. Messages stored for Preliminary To delete an e-mail account:

1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Tap Delete. 3. Tap Done. SMS tab Use these settings to set up SMS and EMS messaging:

Messaging accounts SMS tab settings Service centre address The Service centre address is the phone number where your SMS messages are stored. It is normally imported from the SIM card but if that fails, your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Your network operator may also specify the Character Set. You can set a time limit after which SMS messages are deleted from the network by choosing a value in the Messages stored for list. l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C To edit an e-mail account:

1. On the Email tab, select the account in the list. 2. Tap Edit. 3. Change your settings as desired. 4. Tap Done. 131 l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 132 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Messaging accounts SMS tab settings Connection type You can set the Connection type to one of the bearer types in the list. If your network operator uses the GPRS network, you can choose whether to send and receive your SMS messages using this network. GPRS is generally cheaper than GSM, but in some locations GPRS may not be available. In this case, selecting GPRS preferred means that your smartphone will try to use GPRS but, if that fails, GSM will be used. Clear the check box Extended messaging when you do not want to use EMS functions when composing your messages. Clear the check box Smilies if you want to use only plain text smilies. Extended messaging Smilies Tip If you send and receive SMS messages in several countries, you can avoid having to change the service centre address when you travel abroad by entering the international dialling prefix

(for example '+') and the appropriate country code for your network operator. You can set the Connection type to one of the bearer types in the list. 132 MMS tab Use these settings to set up MMS messaging.:

Messaging accounts MMS tab settings Service centre address WAP account Download method Download size and Less than The Service centre address is the phone number where your MMS messages are stored and it's normally imported from the SIM card but if that fails, your network operator can provide you with the service centre address. Specify which of your configured WAP accounts you wish to use. WAP accounts are created in Control panel >

General (tab) > WAP Accounts Select between Manual or Auto:

Manual - only a notification will be sent to you smartphone and you can decide whether or not to download the full message. Auto - the full message is downloaded directly to your smartphone Set whether or not to have a size limit for incoming messages:

No restrictions - the size of the incoming messages doesn't matter, all messages will be received. Less than - messages smaller than the limit will be received, bigger messages will be deflected. P800_UM.book Page 133 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Advanced settings Tap Advanced to make settings about how your smartphone will send and receive MMS messages. MMS Advanced settings tabs Send The values you give these settings will be default for all MMS messages that you send. You can of course choose other values for an individual message in Messages You can set the Validity period for your messages, that is, how long they should be available to the receiver. Maximum is the default You can give your messages a Priority level of Low, Normal

(default) or High. You can set a level of Conformance for the MMS messages that you send to make sure that they will be played back correctly on different products. You can choose one of these levels:

Standard - a warning message is displayed whenever you add non-conformant objects to an MMS. You have the option to send anyway. Strict - non-conformant messages or messages above 30K are not sent. None - non-conformant messages are sent. MMS Advanced settings tabs Send

(cont.) Preliminary Select the check boxes to provide the function you want:

Hide number prevents the sent message from showing your number Read report requests a read notification from receivers of your messages. Delivery report requests a delivery notification from receivers of your messages. Reply with history includes the original with your reply. These settings apply to MMS messages that you receive. Select the check boxes to send a notification message to the sender when a message is:

Delivered to you: Allow delivery notification Read by you: Allow read notification You can filter reception of incoming messages by message class (Advertisements, Personal, Automatic, Information) as well messages from senders listed in Contacts. Selecting a check box will filter out messages of that category. To receive MMS messages only from senders listed in your Contacts, select all other check boxes and clear the check box for Contacts Receive l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C CBS tab On the CBS tab you make settings related to CBS (Cell Broadcast Services. CBS services include Area information and Cell information. The availability of Cell Broadcast Services

(Cell and Area Information) is operator dependent. 133 l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 134 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Cell information may be used to display the area code below the network name in the flip closed standby view. Area Information is a type of text message that is sent to all subscribers in a certain network area, for example a local traffic report. To enable Cell information:

1. Select the Cell information check box To turn Area Information on:

Check the Area Information check box. Received messages will be displayed and automatically stored in the Area Info Inbox when dismissed. The list shows all the channels that you have defined on your smartphone. The check box for each channel shows if it is on

(checked, ready to receive messages) or off (cleared, not active):

To add a new channel:

1. Tap New. 2. Enter the number of the new channel in the New Channel dialogue. Channel numbers can be from 0 to 999. If there are too many channels defined New is disabled and you will see a message: Maximum channels on SIM. Channel numbering is operator dependent. Please consult your network operator for information. 134 To turn a channel on or off:

1. Select the channel in the list and check the check box. To turn it off clear the check box. To delete a channel:

Tap Delete. Since deleting a channel cannot be undone you will be asked to confirm the delete. Deleting the channel will also delete any stored Area Information messages for that channel in your Area Info Inbox. Alerts Your smartphone can notify you when a new message arrives with a different sound for each type of message that it can receive. To set up notification, tap Alert. If you check the Display notification message check box it will also see a notification message. For each type of message you can either:

Select the Default Melody, or Select Find Melody to open the Select audio dialogue, where you can browse through your folders to pick a melody from those stored on your smartphone. P800_UM.book Page 135 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Secure tokens Your smartphone supports secure access systems from three vendors. You manage secure access by using Secure Tokens. Read more about secure access in Secure Access on page 19. Each token is associated with one system and with one Internet account (or none, when you use your smartphone as a Hard Token). You can configure as many tokens as needed. The Secure tokens dialogue shows a list of secure access providers. Secure tokens relating to the provider's name are listed under the name in an open tree structure. Tap Control panel > Connections > Secure tokens to:

To Edit, Delete, or Create a new token, or Generate a password These options are only displayed as available when a Secure token is highlighted, and greyed out when the vendors name is highlighted. The sequence of dialogues they generate will be vendor specific. A token is associated with an Internet account through the Internet settings for the account. SeeInternet accounts on page 123 Many dialogue details when using secure access are vendor, system and network specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to get the correct information. Preliminary Storage manager This dialogue helps you do housekeeping with the storage space on your smartphone The list shows the applications on your smartphone and the space they occupy. Removing information from applications To remove information from an application: tap on an application in the list. That application is displayed. Remove the old or unwanted entries or information. Here are some house cleaning tips for different applications:

Remove any unwanted voice notes as even short ones occupy Messages, remove any old messages from your Inbox a lot of space. In or Sent folders. In Tasks > Delete completed in your list of entries. In by tapping Calendar > Remove entries in your list of entries. Tasks, remove all completed entries by tapping Calendar, remove all entries in a specified time period l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C Throughout your smartphone, use folders as you create and receive information to speed up housekeeping later. 135 l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 136 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Removing unwanted general files Tap Files to see a list of all stored general file types on your smartphone. You can remove unwanted files and launch a viewer for each file. Uninstalling applications If you uninstall an application you will have to reinstall the application if you want to use it later. To uninstall an entire application, tap Uninstall. Note You cannot uninstall the applications that came with your smartphone. System sounds To set the sounds given when you press a button on the keypad or tap the screen in your smartphone tap System sounds. You can choose between the following sounds:

Keypad Touch screen Tone, Click or Silent Click or Silent Text input There are several standard ways of entering text in your smartphone. SeeEntering text - Flip open on page 15 and Entering text in flip closed mode on page 26. 136 Use the settings on the Primary, Alternative and Flip Closed tabs to set methods for entering text in your smartphone. Primary The method that you select here is activated automatically when you need to enter text into your smartphone. The method that you select here is activated if you tap at the bottom of the screen. Alternative If you load other text input software, select it and adjust its settings here. Time & date Adjusting the time and date here sets these throughout your smartphone. The dialogue has three tabs. You can set:

Time & date The current time and date. Here you can also switch daylight savings time on or off for your location. Specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen. Specify the days in your working week Format Workdays Note These settings are also available in the application. World Clock P800_UM.book Page 137 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Time & date tab To set the current date:

1. On the Time &date tab, tap the date. A calendar view opens. Tap the arrows to set the current year and month. 2. Tap the current date. To set the current time:

1. On the Time & date tab, tap the time. Tap the upper half of the hour or minute box to increase the number displayed, or the lower half to decrease the number. 2. Tap the am/pm box >

. This is only possible if you use the 12-hour time format. If the locations you have set under International are in a country that currently has summer time

(Daylight Savings Time), you can adjust the time and date. Control panel >

To switch daylight savings time on:

1. On the Time &date tab, tap Daylight saving, select the check boxes for the zones that currently have daylight savings time. 2. Tap Done. Format tab You can specify how you want the time and date to be displayed on the screen, and if you want to use the 12-hour (am/pm) or 24-

hour time format. Preliminary To set the time and date display format:

1. Tap Date format and choose a format. 2. Tap Date separator > choose a separator. 3. Tap a Time format. 4. Tap Time separator choose a separator. 5. Tap Done. Workdays tab You can specify what days you work, if, for example, you want to set an alarm that sounds only on workdays. You can also specify the first day of your week to customise the display of both Week and Month views in Calendar To specify your workdays 1. Select the check boxes next to the days you normally work. 2. Tap First day of week and choose a day. User greeting Your smartphone can show a user greeting on the standby screen when you turn it on. Use this dialogue to turn this function on or off. You can define your own user greeting text (up to 32 characters). The default is Sony Ericsson. 137 l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C P800_UM.book Page 138 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary WAP accounts Use these settings to set up and manage WAP accounts

(sometimes called WAP profiles) on your smartphone. WAP accounts are intended for MMS and for accessing the Internet through a WAP gateway. (Such gateways make use of proxy port 9200-9203.) All other proxy settings should be included in your Internet accounts!

For security reasons, some WAP pages and services, for example online banking, can only be accessed from a particular WAP account. The dialogue has two tabs: Basic and Preferred. Basic tab The dialogue shows a list of all the WAP accounts on your smartphone. You can add a New account to the list and Edit or Delete an existing account. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. To create a new WAP account:

1. Enter the name of the WAP account. 2. Select the Internet account you want to use. 138 3. If you are going to use a WAP gateway or a proxy, select the Use proxy check box. 4. Enter the IP Address of the gateway or proxy 5. Enter the Port address of the gateway or proxy. For a WAP gateway use:

9201 for a normal connection 9203 for an encrypted secure connection. If the gateway/proxy requires User name and Password, which is very unusual, fill in the last two fields in the dialogue. Preferred tab Select the check box to set a preferred WAP account. It will be used when you use the Open page command in the Internet application and when a page is opened from another smartphone application. If you do not set a preferred WAP account, the preferred Internet account will be used when connecting to the Internet. WIM management WIM (WAP Identity Module) is used for performing security functions, especially to store and process information needed for user identification and authentication. It is a tamper-resistant store for private keys, certificates and other objects that may require a PIN for access or modification. P800_UM.book Page 139 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM The WIM management dialogue consists of PIN choice list and a WIM objects list. You can select a PIN from the PIN choice list. The WIM objects list changes content dynamically, displaying only the keys that are protected by the selected PIN and also have an associated certificate. Other keys that are protected by the selected PIN but do not have an associated certificate are not shown in the WIM object list. This is the case when WIM PIN (PIN-G) is selected. Note This is the PIN to access the WIM. The PIN-G applies to the whole WIM and any objects that do not have a different PIN, that is, no specific objects on the WIM are linked to PIN-G. You can change status of a PIN:

Enable PIN: A PIN code that is enabled is requested for authorisation of an operation. To proceed with the operation you must enter the PIN code. Disable PIN: A PIN code that is disabled is not requested to authorise an operation to proceed. To change the PIN code:

1. Select the PIN you want to change from the choice list 2. Tap Change PIN. If a PIN code has been blocked, you must unblock it before it can be used again. Select the PIN and tap Change PIN. Preliminary l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C l e n a p l o r t n o C 139 P800_UM.book Page 140 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Installing programs Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Quartz Application Installer/Remover UI Spec, 2001-03-27 Use Case Report for 3rd Party Installation, NKX/R-01:0256, Rev A Linnea White Paper R1B, PA3 It is possible to install new programs, applications, in your smartphone either from the PC or directly from the smartphone.These applications can be obtained in several ways:

Programs can also be downloaded directly to your smartphone from other devices, the internet or via email. There are two types of installation files for programs:

from the Internet from a CD email attachment etc. SIS (Symbian Standard Installation) MIDP JAR (Mobile Information Device Profile Java Archive) Note SIS and JAR files are install packages containing several files. This chapter also applies to other types of software to install, for example, system components and add-ons. PC Suite for P800 The PC Suite for P800 CD delivered with your smartphone contains a set of useful programs to install programs and manage your smartphone:

Backup and Restore - Make safety copies of your data. File Manager - Transfer files (images, documents, music etc.) between your smartphone and PC. Change Language - Change the system language in the smartphone. Download Station - Install programs in the smartphone. Smartphone Monitor - Monitors the connection, runs automatically. 140 s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I P800_UM.book Page 141 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Sync Station - Synchronizes data in PC and smartphone. Phone Book Manager - Edit SIM card from PC. Refer to the online help for each specific program. Installation When inserting the CD in the PC a start menu is automatically shown. Select language and then start the PC Suite for P800 Setup. Follow the instructions in the installation wizard. By default the PC Suite for P800 is accessed from Start menu >

Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 The Setup program also can be used later to add or delete components. Preliminary Installing programs in your smartphone Install file security Installation files in SIS format are typically used for installation of C++ or PersonalJava applications or other content into the smartphones file system.The vendor who prepared the SIS file decides where in the file system the various content of the SIS file will be installed. This means that you need to decide if you trust that the SIS file does not contain harmful content. If you know for sure who produced the SIS file then you can take an install decision based on what you know about that vendor. Your smartphone supports cryptographic verification of vendor identity. During installation the smartphone verifies a digital signature and certificate in the SIS file against a root certificate on the phone. Successful verification means that you can trust who produced the SIS file and that the content has not been modified after it was created. If the SIS file does not contain a digital signature you will be given a warning about the problem but you can still decide to proceed with installation at own risk. In general it is recommended that you install only from SIS files where the vendor identity and file integrity can be verified. 141 s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I P800_UM.book Page 142 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary MIDP applications run in a protected environment with no access to sensitive information so no signatures are required for MIDP JAR files. From a PC PC Suite for P800 must be installed in your PC and the smartphone must be connected to the PC via cable, IR or Bluetooth in order to install programs from PC. Installing programs from PC 1. Connect your smartphone to the PC via cable, infrared or Bluetooth. When connected, an icon is shown in the taskbar on the PC. 2. Start the PC software P800 Download Station and select application (.sis or .jar file) to install. It is also possible to double-click a file in the file manager and make the P800 Download Station start automatically. 3. Confirm to install the application in the smartphone. 4. Select target drive (phone memory or Memory Stick). Download to the smartphone begins. 5. Installation starts when download is complete. 6. Installation is complete. 142 From the smartphone Program packages can also be downloaded to your smartphone from the Internet or from Memory Stick. When downloading a file from the Internet, the installation will start automatically when the file is completely downloaded to your smartphone. The procedure below describes installation of program packages already in the smartphone but not yet installed..

> Applications > Install. Installing programs in the smartphone 1. Tap 2. Select software in the list. 3. Tap Install. If the software is certified, an information dialog is shown with the name of the software, version and supplier. Tap Install again. 4. Now, depending on the software, you can be prompted to replace a previous installation, select language, memory location and select other installation options. 5. Installation is complete. Tap Done. Removing programs in your smartphone It is sometimes necessary to remove installed programs and user data to free up memory. P800_UM.book Page 143 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Removing programs in the smartphone 1. Tap

> Applications > Uninstall and then select software to remove. 2. Confirm selection. 3. Tap Done. Warning! If you delete an application from your smartphone, any copy on your PC (including backups) will be deleted the next time you synchronize with your PC. Tip See also Master Reset and Storage Manager in Control Panel for more options regarding removal of programs and user data. Preliminary s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I s m a r g o r p g n i l l a t s n I 143 P800_UM.book Page 144 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Connecting to other devices Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Linnea White Paper R1B, PA3 Quartz Platform 6.2 UI Specification, 2001-10-01 Use Case Report for 3rd Party Installation, NKX/R-01:0256, Rev A UI Func Spec, Local Communication - Cable, IrDA, 20/155 17-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Func Spec, Local Communication Bluetooth, 21/155 17-CRH 162 02, Rev A Your smartphone can be connected to other devices with similar interfaces, such as PCs, other smartphones and PDAs. The connection can be made via:

Cable Bluetooth Infrared (IrDA) r e h t o o t g n Once it has been connected, you can perform various tasks, depending on what type of connection you have choosen, such as:

Using a cordless headset (Bluetooth) Sending and receiving files via ( Infrared , Bluetooth) beaming Making Backup/Restore and Synchronisation of your data and file transfer. (Cable, Infrared and Bluetooth) Using the smartphone as a modem for Dial-Up Networking

(Cable, Infrared and Bluetooth) i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h o t o t g n i t c e n n o C 144 P800_UM.book Page 145 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Connection via cable Put your smartphone in the desk stand and connect the cable to an empty USB port on the PC. When connecting via cable the smartphone must be set in PC connect mode or Modem mode, see table below. The setting is made in Control panel > Connections

> Cable. PC connect mode Synchronization Installation of software Backup and restore Modem mode Smartphone as a modem Phone Book Manager (PC software) Serial settings The default settings for normal use:

460800 Baud rate:

None Parity:

Stop bits:

1 8 Character length:

Flow control:

CTSRTS PC connectivity software Your smartphone is delivered with a CD, PC Suite for P800. This software must be installed in the PC you want to connect to. See the chapter Installing programs on page 123 for more information. You do not need to install the PC Suite for P800 if you only want to perform beaming with the PC or use a cordless headset. Connection via infrared port When connecting via the infrared port, make sure that both devices are placed within one metre from each other and that the infrared ports have a free line of sight between them. The infrared port on your smartphone is located on the left hand side, next to the On/Off button. 145 r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h o t o t g n i t c e n n o C P800_UM.book Page 146 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Activating the infrared port The infrared port must be activated before communication can begin, go to Control panel > Connections > Infrared port and set the port state to On or On for 10 minutes. See the chapter Control panel on page 5 for more information on infrared settings. Connection via Bluetooth You can connect your smartphone to other products equipped with Bluetooth, for example PCs or other mobile phones, and exchange data. Since Bluetooth is radio-based, transmitting and receiving devices does not have to be in a free line of sight. This means that your smartphone can stay in your pocket while communicating. However, objects between transmitting and receiving units might weaken the signal. Connection to another device be made within a range of up to 10 metres. For all tasks, except beaming, it is necessary that you first set up a permanent and trusted relationship between your smartphone and the other device. This process is called pairing

(other documentation refer to it as bonding). The paired devices are remembered by your smartphone also after you have turned it off so you do not need to repeat the process for every connection with those devices. The reason for pairing is to simplify future connections and to make them secure only paired devices can connect to your smartphone. 146 Activating Bluetooth Activate Bluetooth on your smartphone in Control panel >

Connections > Bluetooth > Settings. Set Operation mode to Auto, On or Discoverable and set Receiving items to Ask first or Always receive. See the chapter Control panel on page 5 for more information on Bluetooth settings. Pairing To let your smartphone initiate pairing with another device 1. In Control panel > Connections> Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to Discoverable 2. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Add. Your smartphone searches for all devices in the vicinity and lists them. 3. Select the device you want your smartphone to pair with and, enter a passkey when asked for it. When the passkey is accepted, the pairing process is complete, refer to the section Passkeys below. 4. If you in the future want to allow a paired device connect to your smartphone without you explicitly approving each connection you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices, then select a device and set the checkbox Allow to connect without confirmation. P800_UM.book Page 147 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To let another device initiate pairing with your smartphone 1. In Control panel > Connections > Bluetooth > Settings, set Operation mode to Discoverable. 2. Follow the other devices manual to initiate pairing. 3. When asked for a passkey, enter the same on both devices. 4. If you in the future want to allow a paired device connect to your smartphone without you explicitly approving each connection you should select Control panel > Connections >

Bluetooth > Devices select a device and set the checkbox Allow to connect without confirmation. To remove a paired device from your smartphone Select a device in the list and tap Remove. Passkeys Passkeys ensure that the device you pair with really is the device you think it is. A passkey is a set of numbers and/or letters (at least four characters) that you agree to exchange with the owner of the other device. Accessories like headsets often have a default passkey, usually 0000, see the specific users guide. Transfer items with Send As From many applications it is possible to transfer (and receive) items like appointments, contacts and images to other users. The transfer starts by entering the Send as menu in the specific application. Preliminary Infrared Depending on the application and object you can choose between the following transfer methods:

Bluetooth SMS MMS Email Note To be able to send or receive an item over infrared or Bluetooth, these functions must be activated. SeeActivating the infrared port on page 128 and Activating Bluetooth on page 146 r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h t o o t g n i t c e n n o C r e h o t o t g n i t c e n n o C 147 P800_UM.book Page 148 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Synchronization Sources (this section will be removed) The following documents and resources have been used when writing this chapter. Linnea prototype 6.2, SW incr. 5, PA9 Linnea White Paper R1B, PA3 Users manual R380s UI Func Spec, Local Communication - Cable, IrDA, 20/155 17-CRH 162 02, Rev A UI Func Spec, Local Communication Bluetooth, 21/155 17-CRH 162 02, Rev A FS Synchronisation, 35/155 17-CRH 162 02 Uen, Rev A UI Design Spec. Local Communication, 38/196 05-CRH 162 02 Uen, Rev A Quartz DFRD Connectivity Specification, rev 4.00 Use Case Report for Synchronise Data, NKX/R-01:0200, Rev A Use Case Report for Backup, NKX/R-01:0278, Rev A Use Case Report for Restore, NKX/R-01:0279, Rev A With PC Suite for P800 installed in your PC, your smartphone can synchronize with the following PC applications, also called Personal Information Managers (PIMs):

Lotus Organizer 5 & 6 Lotus Notes 4.6, 5.0 Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002 Synchronization is divided into local and remote. Local synchronization is performed directly to a connected PC while remote synchronization is done over the air with a remote server in, for example, a corporate network. Local synchronization n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S 148 Preliminary Performing a local synchronization Making an automatic synchronization 1. Connect your smartphone via cable, infrared or Bluetooth. 2. Synchronization starts automatically. Making a manual synchronization 1. Connect your smartphone via cable, infrared or Bluetooth. 2. In the PC, go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

SyncStation and start the synchronization. Alternatively, right click on the SyncStation Monitor and select Synchronize. P800_UM.book Page 149 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Local synchronization is done with either cable, infrared or Bluetooth, the functionality is the same. The following items can be sychronized locally:

Email Contacts Calendar Tasks Jotter notes Configuration of PC software Local synchronization is initiated from the PC and all settings are made in the P800 SyncStation PC software. The easiest way is to configure the PC software to automatically make a synchronization every time your smartphone is connected. An icon, Smartphone Monitor, is shown on the PC taskbar when connected. In the PC go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

SyncStation and select the items to synchronize and select manual or automatic method. Refer the online help in P800 SyncStation PC software for more information. n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S 149 P800_UM.book Page 150 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Remote synchronization Remote synchronization takes place over the air using the Internet and is the ideal way to keep the smartphone up to date. Using GPRS, the smartphone can be continuously connected to the remote synchronization server. Email Contacts Calendar Tasks Remote Sync in Applications, tap Edit > Settings and fill in Remote sync configuration Enter the following parameters:

Server address Username Password You might also need to fill in whether to use transport login under the Protocol tab. Contact your corporate IT help desk or your service provider for information on these parametres. Performing a remote synchronization Selecting items to synchronize 1. In Remote Sync, tap one item in the list you want to be synchronized. Synchronization services will be offered by mobile operators, third-party service providers and as added capability to corporate PIM applications. The following items can be synchronized remotely:

150 P800_UM.book Page 151 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Editorial Comment:Picture not correct 2. Select Enable task checkbox. 3. Fill in Task name or leave default. 4. Fill in Server database (Contact your corporate IT help desk or your service provider). 5. The item you selected to be synchronized is now above the divider in the list. (Disabled items are below the divider). 6. Repeat for other items. Making a remote synchronization 1. Open Applications > Remote Sync , tap the Sync button. Preliminary When ready, the Task status column show todays date for all successfully synchronized items. Backing up data You can use the P800 Backup and Restore PC software to back up the contents stored in your smartphone to your computer. Keeping backups of your smartphones contents on your computer means that you have a separate copy of the contents of the smartphone, which can be restored into the smartphone. Backups should be done on a regular basis, a backup reminder can be set. See the online help for P800 Backup and Restore for more information on how to use the program. Preconditions The PC Suite for P800 must be installed in the PC and the smartphone must be connected to the PC via cable. Note Backup and restore does not work via IR or Bluetooth Performing a backup n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S To make a backup 1. Connect your smartphone to the PC via cable. 2. In the PC, go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 >

P800 Backup and Restore. n o i t i a z n o r h c n y S 151 Warning! Everything in your smartphone will be overwritten by the chosen backup. Once you have clicked Yes to start the restore, you cannot cancel the procedure. P800_UM.book Page 152 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 3. Select smartphone, several can be registered. 4. Start Backup and select media: smartphone and/or Memory Stick. Backup begins, the progress is shown in the smartphone. 5. Follow the instructions in the smartphone. 6. Backup is complete. Restoring data If you have lost data or accidentally deleted information in your smartphone you can restore an earlier backup. A backup from a certain memory type (phone memory or Memory Stick) can only be restored to the same type. To restore a backup 1. Connect your smartphone to the PC via cable. 2. Go to Start menu > Programs > Sony Ericsson > P800 > P800 Backup and Restore in the PC. 3. Select smartphone, several can be registered. 4. Select one of the backups in the list of previously saved backups and click Restore. Restore begins, the progress is shown in the smartphone. 5. Follow the instructions in the smartphone. 6. Restore is complete. 152 P800_UM.book Page 153 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Getting started with Internet and Messages Introduction Before you can use Messages to access the Internet and send or receive messages you will need to make some user-specific settings in the Control panel. Internet and Service provider You will need a service provider to connect your smartphone to the network.The service provider could be:

An internet service provider (ISP) which connects you to the internet. An access point provided by your network operator. A private service provider such as your company or your bank. You will need to enter specific service provider details into your smartphone to set up an Internet account. It can hold the details of multiple service providers, for example, you may have separate internet and corporate accounts. Your network operator or retailer may have pre-installed services, check with them. Connection type When your smartphone connects to a service provider, it will use a GSM or GPRS network provided by a network operator. Many network operators offer both GPRS and GSM services. The connection type defines which network your account uses to connect to the Internet. GPRS Internet accounts use the GPRS network, and dial-up Internet accounts use the GSM network. GPRS If your network operator supports GPRS, a GPRS Internet account allows you to:

Remain permanently connected to the Internet without being charged for connection time. With a GPRS account, you are charged for the amount of information you view, download or send when your are connected to the Internet.Check your operator for details of your subscription. Avoid having to reconnect to the Internet if the connection is broken. Dial-up For both dial-up and high-speed dial-up accounts, you are charged for the length of time you are connected. If your network operator supports them, you can increase your connection speed (at a cost) by setting up a high-speed account. 153 h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G P800_UM.book Page 154 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Automatically set up service provider and Messaging The easiest way to set up your smartphone is automatically, through your service provider. For setup of:

MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service) settings. Messages settings your smartphone supports automatic e-mail accounts Check your service providers web site for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic remote configuration of ISP (Internet Service Provider) settings, e-mail and MMS settings. If remote configuration is possible, they will send you the auto configuration messages required by SMS. Settings valid for your network operator and one or more of these services may also be available through the phone configurator utility at www.sonyericsson.com To check that your SMS messaging settings are correct:

1. Select Control panel > Connections > Messaging accounts >

SMS 154 Messages (Configuration messages for e-

Accepting new Internet or Messages settings New configuration messages will appear in the Auto setup account inbox of mail accounts will, however, be found in yourSMS inbox.) When an auto setup message appears, select it. A dialogue with a brief text and operator message appears on the display. You can accept the new settings or leave the message in the inbox. If the name of the new account is the same as that of an existing account you can choose to create a new account with the same name or replace the existing account. Warning! Never accept remote configuration messages if you are not expecting them or are unsure where they have come from. Manually set up service provider Alternatively to setting up an Internet account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from Internet accounts on the Connections tab of the First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from your ISP (Internet Service Provider), or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your IT Manager. Control panel. P800_UM.book Page 155 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM All settings are described in Internet accounts on page 119. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new Internet account: on page 120 Manually set up Messages Alternatively to setting up Messages automatically, you can enter the settings for the messaging services you want to use yourself from Messaging accounts on the Connections tab of the Control panel. First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the following sources:

If your mobile operator offers an e-mail service you can get the necessary details from them. Your internet service provider. Your IT Manager in the case of connecting to the corporate network to access your work e-mail account. Your network operator in the case of SMS and CBS services. Preliminary The dialogue has four tabs, one for each type of messaging service:

E-mail The provider of your e-mail service, or for a corporate account, your IT Manager. can provide you with the necessary details. All settings are described in Email tab on page 125. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new e-mail account: on page 125. Short Message Service The necessary settings are usually provided on your SIM card. All settings are described in SMS tab on page 126. Multimedia Messaging Service your MMS messaging provider will be able to provide you with the necessary information. Before you set up MMS messaging you need to set up an Internet account in Control panel > Internet accounts and a WAP account in Control panel > WAP Accounts All settings are described in MMS tab on page 127 Cell Broadcast Service: Area and Cell information Your network operator will be able to inform you if these services are available. All settings are described in CBS tab on page 129 SMS MMS CBS h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G 155 First collect all the information you will need. You can obtain this information from the WAP service provider, or if you are connecting to a corporate network, your IT Manager. All settings are described in WAP accounts on page 133. To set up a new account follow the steps under To create a new WAP account: on page 133 Using your smartphone as a modem Your smartphone contains a complete GSM/GPRS modem, so you can use it to connect your PC to the internet or corporate intranet.Your smartphone appears to the laptop like a normal modem. P800_UM.book Page 156 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Setting up WAP accounts A WAP account defines a service provider and gateway that should be used when making a connection to WAP services. You also need a WAP account when you use MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service). The WAP gateway sits between your smartphone and the WAP site coding and decoding information. You can set up details of more than one gateway if necessary, for example one for your MMS messaging, one to access corporate data over WAP, and another to access your bank's WAP service. The easiest way to set up a WAP account on your smartphone is automatically, through your service provider. Check your service providers web site for information or contact their support desk and ask about automatic setup. Note You access WAP pages through an Internet Service Provider (ISP) so, when you create a WAP account, you must choose one of your existing Internet accounts or first create a new one. Manually set up a WAP account Alternatively to setting up a WAP account automatically, you can enter the settings manually from WAP Accounts on the Connections tab of the Control panel. 156 P800_UM.book Page 157 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM P 8 0 0 Bluetooth IrDA Cable GPRS, HSCSD or CSD Personal Computer You link the laptop to your smartphone using Bluetooth infrared, or cable (USB or serial).The connection over the air can be by any of the bearers that your smartphone supports:

GPRS HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data CSD (Circuit Switched Data). A Windows modem driver file and a PC utility, the Dial-Up Networking Wizard is provided on your PC suite for P800 CD. The wizard will help you configure DUN (Dial-Up Networking) entries on your PC for GPRS and HSCSD connections. Preliminary Once paired with a Bluetooth-enabled laptop, your smartphone is ready to make a connection to the Internet or corporate network. Because Bluetooth is wire-free and requires no line-of-

sight alignment, you can place the laptop in a comfortable position and let your smartphone remain in your pocket, briefcase, or even be placed up to 10 metres away. If you wish to use an infrared link the range is typically up to 1 metre. The two infrared 'eyes' must be kept in line of sight, at an angle of no more than approximately 30 degrees. The Dial-Up Networking Wizard The wizard simplifies creating GPRS DUN connections by setting the proper values in the PC DUN entry and linking the entry to one of the GPRS configurations in your smartphone. You can also view and modify the GPRS settings in the smartphone. For HSCSD DUN entries, it updates the modem settings such that the specified data rate and type of bearer (ISDN / Analogue) will be used when you make a DUN connection. You can view or change the DUN entries created with the wizard using the standard Windows DUN user interface. The Dial-Up Networking Wizard software included in the PC suite for P800 must be installed in your PC and your smartphone must be connected to the PC via cable, Infrared or Bluetooth. h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G 157 P800_UM.book Page 158 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary You should have any information on for example phone numbers, name servers or domains that the server you wish to connect to may require available. To set up a GPRS or HSCSD (High-speed Circuit Switched Data) connection using the Dial-Up Networking Wizard:

1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Choose Create a new dial-up connection 3. Follow the instructions in the Wizard. To edit a previously created DUN entry:

1. Start the Dial-Up Networking Wizard from the Sony Ericsson folder of the Start menu on your PC. 2. Modify a dial-up connection. 3. Select the desired connection from the list. 4. Follow the instructions in the Wizard. CSD connections To set up a CSD (GSM Data) connection you will need to install your smartphone as a modem manually. To set up a Dial-Up entry for CSD:

1. On the PC, open the Control Panel 2. Choose to install a new modem. 158 3. Choose your smartphone as the modem. 4. Select the port where the smartphone is connected. 5. Confirm the selection. A new DUN connection has been created. Connecting To connect using a DUN entry created by the wizard:

1. If you are connecting by cable, set your smartphone to Modem cable connection mode. 2. Use any conventional method to make a connection:

Click the Desktop shortcut created by the wizard Select the entry from within the system DUN folder Run an application that has built-in support for using DUN entries (for example a browser or e-mail client). Secure Access If you need access to a network that requires secure access

(often known as strong authentication), for example a corporate intranet, your can set up the Internet account you use to log in to that network to use secure access and generate the required one-time password when you make the connection. Your smartphone supports the following secure access systems:

P800_UM.book Page 159 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM SecureID from RSA DigiPass from Vasco SafeWord from Security Computing If you have a separate device or application that requires one-

time passwords according to one of these systems you do not need a separate hardware token generator. Your smartphone can generate passwords that are not associated with an Internet account. You manage secure access in your smartphone using Secure Tokens:

Each token is associated with one vendor/system and with one Internet account (or none, when you use your smartphone as a Hard Token). You can configure as many tokens as needed. To edit, delete, create a new token, or generate a password, tap:

Control panel > Connections > Secure tokens Internet Account Settings A token is associated with an Internet account through the Internet settings for the account:

To set up a Dial-up (CSD or High-speed CSD) account for Secure access:

1. Tap Control panel > Connections > Internet Accounts 2. Create a New or Edit an existing 3. Tap Advanced. Dial-up account. Preliminary 4. On the Secure tab for the account select the Enable secure access check box. 5. Select the appropriate Vendor and Token To set up a GPRS account for Secure access:

1. Tap Control panel > Connections > Internet Accounts 2. Create a New or Edit an existing 3. Tap Advanced 4. On the Server tab for the account select the User name and GPRS account. password required check box. 5. Enter your User name if desired.If you leave it empty, you will be asked to fill it in at connection time 6. Leave the Password box empty. Connecting to an Internet account For Dial-up accounts there are two possible ways to connect to a secure access account, depending on if the login procedure uses a script and the PCT (Post Connect Terminal) or not. To connect to a dial-up account that does not require the PCT:

1. In the Login dialogue, enter your vendor specific login information in the PIN box. 2. Tap Done, the one-time password is generated and passed to the network invisibly. h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G h t i w d e t r a t s g n i t t e G 159 P800_UM.book Page 160 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To connect to a dial-up account using the PCT:

1. In the PCT tap Generate. 2. In the vendor-specific Generate Passcode dialogue, generate the one-time password 3. Tap Copy. 4. Return to the PCT, tap Paste to enter the one-time password in the script. 5. Tap Done To connect to a GPRS account:

1. In the Login dialogue, tap Generate. 2. Select the appropriate Vendor and Token 3. In the vendor-specific Generate Passcode dialogue, generate the one-time password 4. Tap Copy. 5. Return to the Login dialogue, enter your user name if required and tap Paste to enter the one-time password in the Pin box. 6. Tap Done Tip Many dialogue details when using secure access are vendor, system and network specific. You should contact the administrator of the network you wish to access to get the correct information. 160 P800_UM.book Page 161 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Trouble shooting This chapter consists of an alphabetical selection of suggestions for solving possible problems with your smartphone. Blocked contact card provider The SIM card is permanently blocked after the unblocking code has been entered incorrectly ten times in a row. Contact your network operator. Card blocked unblock?

This message appears if the PIN code has been entered incorrectly three times in a row. To unblock the SIM card:

1. Press YES. 2. Enter your personal unblocking key (PUK) and press #. Note Your PUK is provided by your network operator when you purchase your SIM card. Enter new PIN appears in the display. 3. Enter your PIN code and press #. You can enter either your current PIN code or a new one. Repeat new PIN appears in the display. 4. Enter your PIN code again for confirmation and press #. If you entered both your unblocking key and PIN code correctly, the message New PIN appears in the display. Alternative method for unblocking the SIM card To unblock the SIM card, enter the following sequence:

* 0 5 * unblock key * new PIN * new PIN #

Display limitations In all cases where numbers or characters exceed the available display space, truncation or dots are used to compensate for this. Numbers are truncated at the beginning, for example

...555666777. Characters are truncated at the end, for example Methusel.... Emergency calls only A network is within range but you are not allowed to use this network. You may, however, call the emergency number 112. 161 g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l g n i t o o h s l e b u o r T g n i t o o h s l e b u o r T P800_UM.book Page 162 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Fax calls Your smartphone does not support fax transmission. Even if your operator subscription supports fax transmission, fax calls are rejected. However they can be forwarded to another number such as the office fax number, see Divert calls on page 74 for more information. Note Make sure potential fax callers do not try to send a fax to your smartphone as they can experience a number of retries before the fax transmission is stopped. Indicator light Blinks red This indicates that the battery is running low and soon needs recharging or replacing with a spare. Note With Vehicle Hands Free (VHF) equipment, make sure that the following are inserted or connected: your smartphone and its holder, the fuse in the fuse holder, and/or the external antenna. Does not blink If the indicator light at the top of your smartphone does not blink and no network is displayed then there is not a network within range. See No network is displayed. 162 Insert card A SIM card has not been inserted into your smartphone. See The SIM card on page 11 for instructions on inserting the SIM card. Key symbol The keypad is locked to prevent unintentional key action. Press followed by to unlock the keys. Memory/Disk full Due to memory limitations, your smartphone has no more space available to save or store information. Warning! Make sure regular backups are made with Communications Suite to reduce the risk of lost or corrupted information. To free up memory, erase unused or old:

Call logs. Contacts. Messages. Calendar To-dos or appointments. WAP history or bookmarks. Notepad notes. P800_UM.book Page 163 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM No network This indicates that no network is within range. The reason for this is either:

1. You are in an area that is not covered by a network. 2. The received signal is too weak, possibly because you are being shielded from the signal. Move to obtain a sufficiently strong signal. Check your display Signal strength indicator. Phone locked Phone locked is displayed followed by the prompt Enter lock code. Your smartphone is locked to prevent unauthorized use. To unlock the smartphone:

Enter your personal security code then press # (or YES). PIN & unblocking PUK code Contact your dealer if you have forgotten your PIN or unblocking PUK code. The only way to unlock your smartphone is by using your PIN or unblocking PUK code. Tip Store PIN and unblocking PUK code information in a safe place. For security reasons, it may take some time to unlock the smartphone if this information is lost or misplaced. Preliminary Start problems Hand-held phone: Recharge or replace the battery. Vehicle hands free: Check that the smartphone is properly inserted into the holder and check the fuse in the fuse holder:

which is connected to the battery cable. g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l Wrong PIN The PIN code has been entered incorrectly. The message is followed by the prompt Enter PIN. Enter the PIN code correctly and press # (or YES). Note If your PIN is entered incorrectly three times in a row, the SIM card is blocked. You can unblock it by using your PUK. 163 g n i t o o h s e b u o r T l g n i t o o h s l e b u o r T g n i t o o h s l e b u o r T P800_UM.book Page 164 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Guidelines for safe and efficient use Please read this information before using your mobile phone. Recommendations Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place. Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity. Do not expose your product to extreme high or low temperatures. Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products. Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product. Do not paint your product. Turn your product off in places where posted notices instruct you to do so and in places where mobile phones are prohibited including aircraft and hospitals. Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above your car's air bag. 164 Do not attempt to disassemble your product. Only Sony Ericsson authorised personnel should perform service. If your mobile phone is equipped with infrared, never direct the infrared ray at anyone's eye and make sure that it does not disturb any other infrared units. P800_UM.book Page 165 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Antenna Only use an antenna that has been specifically designed by Sony Ericsson for your mobile phone. Use of unauthorised or modified antennas could damage your mobile phone and may violate regulations, causing loss of performance and SAR levels above the recommended limits (see below). Efficient Use Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the top of the phone when in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times. Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver. When it is turned on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or radio frequency fields). Preliminary Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety guidelines, developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-

Ionizing Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels of radio wave exposure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any variations in measurements. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio frequency energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR value is determined at the highest certified power level in laboratory conditions, but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone while operating can be well below this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use the minimum power required to reach the network. Therefore, the closer you are to a base station, the more likely it is that the actual SAR level will decrease. Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that there are variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among various mobile phones, all Sony Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet the relevant guidelines for radio frequency exposure. 165 d n a f e a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G P800_UM.book Page 166 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary A separate leaflet with SAR information for this mobile phone model is included with the material that comes with this mobile phone. This information can also be found, together with more information on radio frequency exposure and SAR, on www.SonyEricsson.com/. Driving Please check if local laws/regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while driving or require drivers to use handsfree solutions. We recommend that you use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson handsfree solutions intended for use with your product. Always give full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Please note that because of possible interference to electronic equipment, some vehicle manufacturers forbid the use of mobile phones in their vehicles unless a handsfree kit with an external antenna supports the installation. 166 Personal Medical Devices Mobile phones may affect the operation of cardiac pacemakers and other implanted equipment. Please avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker, e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the mobile phone, place it at the ear opposite the pacemaker. If a minimum distance of 15 cm (6 inches) is kept between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk of interference is limited. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place, immediately turn off your mobile phone. Contact your cardiologist for more information. For other medical devices, please consult the manufacturer of the device. Children DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSORY. YOUR MOBILE PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORY MAY CONTAIN SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BE DETACHED AND CREATE A CHOKING HAZARD. P800_UM.book Page 167 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Disposing of the Product Your mobile phone should not be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of electronic products. Power Supply Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the product. Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage or stress. To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC power adapter must not be used outdoors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug. If the plug will not fit into the outlet, have a proper outlet installed by a qualified electrician. Emergency Calls Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection under all conditions. Therefore you should never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential communications (e.g. medical emergencies). Emergency calls may not be possible on all cellular networks or when certain network services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local service provider. Preliminary Battery Information We recommend that you charge the battery for 4 hours before you use your mobile phone for the first time. The battery can only be charged in temperatures between +5C (+41F) and

+45C (+113F). A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced capacity the first few times it is used. The talk and standby times depend on usage conditions and network configurations when using the mobile phone. If the mobile phone is used near a base station, less power is required and talk and standby times are prolonged. 167 d n a f e a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G P800_UM.book Page 168 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire. Use only Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original batteries and chargers intended for use with your mobile phone. Other chargers may not charge sufficiently or may produce excessive heat. Using other batteries and chargers could be dangerous. Do not expose the battery to extreme temperatures, never above +60C (+140F). For maximum battery capacity, use the battery in room temperature. Do not expose the battery to liquid. Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch another metal object. This could short-circuit and damage the battery. Do not disassemble or modify the battery. Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery. Use the battery for the intended purpose only. Keep out of children's reach. Do not allow the battery to be put into the mouth. Battery electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed. 168 Disposing of the battery The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Center for information. Limited warranty Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB, S-221 88 Lund, Sweden, (Sony Ericsson), provides this Limited Warranty for your mobile phone and original accessory delivered with your mobile phone (hereinafter referred to as "Product"). Should your Product need warranty service, please return it to the dealer from whom it was purchased, or contact your local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre (national rates may apply) or visit www.SonyEricsson.com/ to get further information. Our warranty Subject to the conditions of this Limited Warranty, Sony Ericsson warrants this Product to be free from defects in design, material and workmanship at the time of its original purchase by a consumer, and for a subsequent period of one (1) year. P800_UM.book Page 169 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM What we will do If, during the warranty period, this Product fails to operate under normal use and service, due to defects in design, materials or workmanship, Sony Ericsson authorised distributors or service partners, in the country/region* where you purchased the Product, will, at their option, either repair or replace the Product in accordance with the terms and conditions stipulated herein. Sony Ericsson and its service partners reserve the right to charge a handling fee if a returned Product is found not to be under warranty according to the conditions below. Conditions 1. The warranty is valid only if the original proof of purchase issued to the original purchaser by the dealer, specifying the date of purchase and serial number**, is presented with the Product to be repaired or replaced. Sony Ericsson reserves the right to refuse warranty service if this information has been removed or changed after the original purchase of the Product from the dealer. 2. If Sony Ericsson repairs or replaces the Product, the repaired or replaced Product shall be warranted for the remaining time of the original warranty period or for ninety (90) days from the date of repair, whichever is longer. Repair or replacement may involve the use of functionally equivalent reconditioned units. Replaced parts or components will become the property of Sony Ericsson. Preliminary 3. This warranty does not cover any failure of the Product due to normal wear and tear, or due to misuse, including but not limited to use in other than the normal and customary manner, in accordance with the Sony Ericsson instructions for use and maintenance of the Product. Nor does this warranty cover any failure of the Product due to accident, modification or adjustment, acts of God or damage resulting from liquid. 4. Since the cellular system on which the Product is to operate is provided by a carrier independent from Sony Ericsson, Sony Ericsson will not be responsible for the operation, availability, coverage, services or range of that system. 5. This warranty does not cover Product failures caused by installations, modifications, or repair or opening of the Product performed by a non-Sony Ericsson authorised person. 6. The warranty does not cover Product failures which have been caused by use of accessories or other peripheral devices which are not Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the Product. 7. Tampering with any of the seals on the Product will void the warranty. 169 d n a f e a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G If you have purchased your Product in an EU country you can have your Product serviced, under the conditions set out above, within the warranty period in any EU country where an identical Product is sold by an authorised Sony Ericsson distributor. To find out if your Product is sold in the EU country you are in, please call the local Sony Ericsson Customer Care Centre. Please observe that certain services may not be possible elsewhere than in the country of original purchase, for example due to the fact that your Product may have an interior or exterior which is different from equivalent models sold in other EU countries. It may not be possible to repair SIM-locked Products.

** In some countries/regions additional information is requested. If so, this is clearly shown on the valid proof of purchase. P800_UM.book Page 170 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 8. THERE ARE NO EXPRESS WARRANTIES, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, OTHER THAN THIS PRINTED LIMITED WARRANTY. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY. IN NO EVENT SHALL SONY ERICSSON OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOST PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS, TO THE FULL EXTENT THOSE DAMAGES CAN BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some countries/states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation of the duration of implied warranties, so the preceding limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. The warranty provided does not affect the consumer's statutory rights under applicable legislation in force, nor the consumer's rights against the dealer arising from their sales/ purchase contract.

* European Union (EU) 170 P800_UM.book Page 171 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM FCC Statement Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (i.e. at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. Body worm measurements are made while the phone is in use and worn on the body with an Ericsson or Sony Ericsson branded original accessory intended for use with the phone. The design and composition of an accessory can affect the body worn SAR (Specific Absorption Rate) levels for the phone. Sony Ericsson has not measured, and make no representation about, the body worn SAR levels when the phone is used with non-Ericsson or non-Sony Ericsson branded original accessories intended for use with the phone. This device compiles with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interface that may cause undesired operation. Preliminary 171 d n a f e a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G d n a e f a s r o f s e n i l i e d u G P800_UM.book Page 172 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Terms and definitions GPRS General Packet Radio Services (GPRS) is a packet-based wireless communication service that promises data rates from 56 up to 114 Kbps and continuous connection to the Internet for mobile phone and computer users. The higher data rates will allow users to take part in video conferences and interact with multimedia Web sites and similar applications using mobile handheld devices as well as notebook computers. HSCSD High-Speed Circuit-Switched Data (HSCSD) is circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users at data rates up to 38.4 Kbps, four times faster than the standard data rates of the Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication standard in 1999. Bluetooth Bluetooth is a computing and telecommunications industry specification that describes how mobile phones, computers, and personal digital assistants (PDAs) can easily interconnect with each other and with home and business phones and computers using a short-range wireless connection. IrDA 172 IrDA (Infrared Data Association) is an industry-sponsored organization set up in 1993 to create international standards for the hardware and software used in infrared communication links. In this special form of radio transmission, a focused ray of light in the infrared frequency spectrum, measured in terahertz, or trillions of hertz (cycles per second), is modulated with information and sent from a transmitter to a receiver over a relatively short distance. Infrared radiation (IR) is the same technology used to control a TV set with a remote control USB USB (Universal Serial Bus) is a plug-and-play interface between a computer and add-on devices (such as audio players, joysticks, keyboards, telephones, scanners, and printers). With USB, a new device can be added to your computer without having to add an adapter card or even having to turn the computer off. RS232 A communication port contact/port. SMS Short Message Service P800_UM.book Page 173 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM SMS (Short Message Service) is a service for sending messages of up to 160 characters (224 characters if using a 5-bit mode) to mobile phones that use Global System for Mobile (GSM) communication. EMS Enhanced Message Service is like SMS only it supports pictures, melodies and formated text. MMS Multimedia Message Service supports photo quality pictures, videos in MPEG format and sonds in WAV or MIDI format. WAP

(Wireless Application Protocol) is a specification for a set of communication protocols to standardize the way that wireless devices, such as cellular telephones and radio transceivers, can be used for Internet access, including e-mail, the World Wide Web, newsgroups, and Internet Relay Chat (IRC). SyncML SyncML is a protocol for universal synchronization of remote and local data. The protocol is sponsored by the SyncML initiative, a group supported by Lotus, IBM and others, which working to create a common protocol for synchronizing data among workstations, network application servers and mobile devices. Preliminary RSA RSA is an Internet encryption and authentication system that uses an algorithm. The RSA algorithm is the most commonly used encryption and authentication algorithm and is included as part of the Web browsers from Microsoft and Netscape. The encryption system is owned by RSA Security. The company licenses the algorithm technologies and also sells development kits. The technologies are part of existing or proposed Web, Internet, and computing standards. Wav A Wave file is an audio file format, created by Microsoft, that has become a standard PC audio file format for everything from system and game sounds to CD-quality audio. A Wave file is identified by a file name extension of WAV (.wav). CLI A CLI is a Certified Lotus Instructor???

PIM The SyncML specification is designed to ensure that any device can synchronize PIM data with any other device. Microsoft said SyncML support will be made available through third parties. FC Flip Closed FO 173 s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T P800_UM.book Page 174 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Flip Open MML POP3 POP3 (Post Office Protocol 3) is a standard client/server protocol for receiving e-mail. The e-mail is received and held for you by your Internet server. Periodically, you (or your client e-mail receiver) check your mail-box on the server and download any mail. IMAP4 Internet Message Access Protocol (the latest version is IMAP4) is a standard client/server protocol for accessing e-mail from your local server. The e-mail is received and held for you by your Internet server. You (or your e-mail client) can view just the heading and the sender of the letter and then decide whether to download the mail. MPEG4 The Moving Picture Experts Group, develops standards for digital video and digital audio compression. It operates under the auspices of the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). 174 JPGis a graphic image file created by choosing from a range of compression qualities (actually, from one of a suite of compression algorithms). When you create a JPEG or convert an image from another format to a JPEG, you are asked to specify the quality of image you want. Since the highest quality results in the largest file, you can make a trade-off between image quality and file size. JPEG is an acronym for Joint Photographic Experts Group, the committee that established the baseline algorithms. GIFThe GIF (it stands for Graphics Interchange Format) is one of the two most common file formats for graphic images on the World Wide Web. The other is the JPEG. MP3(MPEG-1 Audio Layer-3) is a standard technology and format for compression a sound sequence into a very small file

(about one-twelfth the size of the original file) while almost preserving the original level of sound quality when it is played. MIDIMIDI (Musical Instrument Digital Interface) is a protocol designed for recording and playing back music on digital synthesizers that is supported by many makes of personal computer sound cards. P800_UM.book Page 175 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM SMILSMIL (Synchronized Multimedia Integration Language), is a language that allows Web site creators to be able to easily define and synchronize multimedia elements (video, sound, still images) for Web presentation and interaction. SMIL also lets the

"producer" store a media object in multiple versions, each with a different bandwidth so that a lower-bandwidth version of a Web page can be sent to users who need it. URL(Uniform Resource Locator) is the address of a file accessible on the Internet. The type of resource depends on the Internet application protocol. Using the World Wide Web's protocol, the Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) , the resource can be an HTML page (like the one you're reading), an image file, or a Java applet. The URL contains the name of the protocol required to access the resource, a domain name that identifies a specific computer, and a hierarchical description of a file location on the computer. (e g http://www.mhrcc.org/kingston) OTAOver The Air (OTA) (or Over-The-Air) is a standard for the transmission and reception of application-related information in a wireless communications system. SIM-ATA SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card will assist operators in providing mobile commerce applications. GSM Preliminary Global System for Mobile communication) is a digital mobile telephone system. GSM uses a variation of time division multiple access (TDMA) and is the most widely used of the digital wireless telephone technologies. GSM digitizes and compresses data, then sends it down a channel with two other streams of user data, each in its own time slot. It operates at either the 900 MHz or 1800 MHz frequency band. PTD MeT HTML Hypertext Markup Language is the set of markup symbols or codes inserted in a file intended for display on a World Wide Web browser page. The markup tells the Web browser how to display a Web page's words and images for the user. Each individual markup code is referred to as a tag. Some tags come in pairs that indicate when some display effect is to begin and when it is to end. XML XML (Extensible Markup Language) is a flexible way to create common information formats and share both the format and the data on the World Wide Web, intranets, and elsewhere. For example, computer makers might agree on a standard or common way to describe the information about a computer product (processor speed, memory size, and so forth) and then describe the product information format with XML. 175 s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T s n o i t i n i f e d d n a s m r e T P800_UM.book Page 176 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary XHTML XHTML (Extensible Hypertext Markup Language) is "a reformulation of HTML 4.0 as an application of the Extensible Markup Language (XML)." For readers unacquainted with either term, HTML is the set of codes (that's the "markup language") that a writer puts into a document to make it displayable on the World Wide Web. WTLS Wireless Transport Layer Security (WTLS) is the security level for Wireless Application Protocol (WAP) applications. WTLS was developed to address the problematic issues surrounding mobile network devices - such as limited processing power and memory capacity, and low bandwidth - and to provide adequate authentication, data integrity, and privacy protection mechanisms. WIM SWIM PIN) A PIN is a personal identification number. PINs are commonly assigned to bank customers for use with automatic cash dispensers. They are also used, sometimes with a security token, for individual access to computer networks or other secure systems. 176 SIThe International System of Units (abbreviated "SI" from the French version of the name) is a scientific method of expressing the magnitudes or quantities of seven important natural phenomena. This system was formerly called the meter-

kilogram-second (MKS) system. SL OTA Over The Air (OTA) (or Over-The-Air) is a standard for the transmission and reception of application-related information in a wireless communications system. BMP Bitmap. A grahic picture where the are of the picture is divided in a number of pixels. Each pixel represent a color. PIM CSD P 8 0 0 _ U M

. b o o k P a g e 1 7 7 T h u r s d a y

, J u l y 1 1

, 2 0 0 2 1 0

5 8 A M P r e l i i m n a r y 1 7 7 Terms and definitions Terms and definitions Terms and definitions Terms and definitions P800_UM.book Page 178 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 178 P800_UM.book Page 179 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Quick guide for common tasks

[A table with simplified descriptions of the most common actions]

179 n o m m o c r o f i e d u g k c u Q i n o m m o c r o f i e d u g k c u Q i n o m m o c r o f e d u g i i k c u Q n o m m o c r o f i e d u g i k c u Q P800_UM.book Page 180 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Technical Specifications General Product nameP800 Size Weight System and power class Antenna Speech Coding SIM Card Operating System Processor User storage Standard version, latin characterset) / P802

(Chinese version) 117 x 59 x 27 mm 158 grams with battery and flip148 grams with battery, flip removed. E-GSM 900 Class 4GSM 1800 Class 1GSM 1900 Class 1 Built inv HR, FR, EFR supported where available, for high speech quality. Small plug-in card, 3V or 5V type Symbian OS v7.0 Based on the 'UIQ'

design. ARM 9 For settings, user data (e.g. images, contacts, messages) and third party applications:P800:12MbyteP802: 9Mbyte

(dictionary not activated) Battery Life Standard battery Talk Time:up to 13 hoursStandby time:

up to 400 hours GPRS Maximum Data Rates (kbps) CS-1 9.05kbps Rx 36.2 4

1 Tx 9.05 CS-2 13.4kbps 53.6 CS-3 15.6kbps 62.4 CS-4 21.4kbps 85.6 13.4 15.6 21.4 Speed achieved depends on the Coding Scheme supported by the GSM Network. 180 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T P800_UM.book Page 181 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM HSCSD Maximum Data Rates (kbps) 9.6 kbps per timeslot 2 +

1 Rx Tx 19.2 9.6 14.4kbps per timeslot 28.8 14.4 Screen Display type Display size Pixel size Colour resolution Screen surface Illumination TFT Flip closed: 208 x 144 pixels, 40 x 28 mmFlip open: 208 x 320 pixels, 40 x 61 mm 0.192 mm 12-bit (4096 colours) Touch-sensitive, anti-reflective Front-light Keypad 16 hard plastic keys on hinged/removable flip Jog Dial, 4-way (up, down, towards, away) + select. Browser button to switch to integrated browser CommuniCam button - switches to camera viewfinder and acts as shutter. On-Off button Preliminary 181 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T P800_UM.book Page 182 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Input Flip Closed P800 (Standard version) Numeric keypad on flip Latin characters on number keys Flip Open Touch-screen Natural character recognition On-screen virtual keyboard P802 (Chinese version) Numeric keypad on flip Stroke Pinyin Bopomofo Touch-screen Chinese character recognition English character recognition Numeric character recognition Stroke Pinyin Bopomofo 182 MMI Languages Languages loaded;

unwanted languages are deleted upon initialisation to free user storage space. P802 (Chinese version) Chinese (Simplified, ZS) Chinese (Traditional, ZT) Chinese (Hong Kong, ZH) English UK P800 (Standard version) Danish (DA), Dutch (NL), English UK, English US, Finnish (FI), French (FR), German (DE), Greek (EL), Italian (IT), Latin American English (R1), Norwegian

(NO), Portuguese (PT), Spanish (ES), Swedish (SV), Turkish (TR) Third Party Application Support SDKs C++

PersonalJavaTM J2ME CLDC 1.0/MIDP P800_UM.book Page 183 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Load formats Security C++ or JavaTM applications in Symbian SIS format.MIDP installation (JAR/

JAD) from Browser or connected PC Support for signed applications Preliminary 183 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T P800_UM.book Page 184 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Telephony Handsfree options:

Built-in Office Speakerphone Portable Handsfree Bluetooth Headset (optional accessory) Stereo Headset (optional accessory) Picture of contact displayed when making outgoing call Picture of caller displayed when incoming call CLI matches entry in Contacts. Sound clips as personal ringtones. Voice Dialling Voice Answering Magic Word activation Up to 100 voice commands. Support for calling cards Access most applications whilst on a phone call Flight mode, enabling P800 to be used as a PDA in locations where radio transmitters must be switched off. GSM and Bluetooth are switched off when in flight mode. SIM Application Toolkit according to GSM 11.14 Incoming and outgoing Picture Phone Book Personal ringtones Voice control Other features:

SIM-AT USSD 184 Personal Organiser Applications Contacts (Address Book) Calendar (Diary) Tasks ('To-Do' list) Jotter (Text and 'ink' notes) Voice Memo (Dictaphone) World Clock Calculator

(P802 only) English-Chinese-English Dictionary

(P802 only) Lunar Calendar Integrated CommuniCam Image Size Colour depth Storage format Other features 640 x 480 pixels (VGA) 320 x 240 pixels (QVGA) 160 x 120 pixels (QQVGA) 24 bit (16.78 million colours) JPEG/JFIF, 3 quality (compression) levels, user-

selectable. Delay timer Brightness and Contrast settings White Balance (4 pre-set values plus automatic) Flicker-free setting (for fluorescent lighting) Backlight mode (when there is light behind the subject) CommuniCam button switches to viewfinder and acts as the shutter. P800_UM.book Page 185 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Image Viewer Formats Sharing via JPEG, BMP, GIF, MBM, PNG, WBMP IR, Bluetooth, MMS, E-Mail, PC file transfer Image Editor Usage Functions Electronic ink

(draw on picture) Video Player File Format Streaming transport Video coding Audio coding Audio Player File Format The Image Editor is available when composing MMS messages. Crop, Rotate, Rescale Colour, pen size, eraser function

.MP4 (MPEG4) RTSP according to 3GPP MPEG-4 Simple Visual Profile Level 0H263 Profile 0 Level 10H263 Profile 3 Level 10 AMR; AAC

.MP3, WAV, AU, G-MIDI and AMR Preliminary Messaging: SMS Classes Bearer Broadcast Concatenated 0, 1 and 2 GSM and GPRS Basic & Extended channel up to 255 messages Messaging: EMS Standards compliance 3GPP 23.040 Version 4 Supported objects Image editor Sounds, Melodies, Pictures, Animations User may create and edit icons (16x16 and 32x32 pixels) Messaging: MMS Image formats GIF, JPG, BMP, WBMP, PNG Audio format Presentation Conformance AMR, WAV, iMelody SMIL 3GPP 23.140 V5.0 Nokia/Ericsson 'MMS Conformance Document V2.0.0'

185 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T P800_UM.book Page 186 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Messaging: E-Mail Incoming mail server support Outgoing mail server support Content coding Attachment Viewers Other features POP3, IMAP4 SMTP MIME compliant VCard, vCal, Document viewers as below Automatic download of messages over GPRS 'always on' connection Document Viewers On-board Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel Microsoft Powerpoint Adobe Acrobat (PDF) Over 20 further formats Supplied on CD-ROM Integrated browser technical data Markup Languages HTML 3.2 (excluding features not relevant to a small screen device)WML 1.2.1WBXMLxHTML BasicxHTML Mobile ProfilecHTML 2.0 Compiled WML scripts WCSS WAP version Scripting Style sheets 186 Images Bearer Security Certificates WIM Bookmark Bookmarks Home Page Cache Clear cache function Hyperlinks WAP Accounts

(WAP Profiles) OTA Support WBMP, GIF (including animated), JPEG GPRS, HSCSD, CSD WTLS Class 1, 2, 3 TLS/SSL Pre-install & downloadWTLS, X509 WIM interface including SIM-WIM

(SWIM) import/exportIrDA, Bluetooth, SMS, MMS, E-Mail Yes, number only limited by available user storage Yes 15 - 120kbyte user-configurable; 30kbyte default. Yes Underlined in text Image according to Style Sheet. Yes. Integrated with bookmarks. Quantity only limited by available user storage. Ericsson/Nokia OTAWAP Forum Provisioning M-Services Compliant with M-Services specification, Phase 1 P800_UM.book Page 187 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM MeT Compliant with MeT specification, version 1.0 Preliminary 187 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T Coverage area Bluetooth functions Up to 10 metres (33 feet) Generic Access Profile Serial Port Profile Generic Object Exchange Profile Dialup Networking Profile Object Push Profile Headset Profile P800_UM.book Page 188 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary User Customisation Wallpaper FC only Screen saver Ring tones Alarm tones Application selection JPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP 208 x 320 pixels wallpaper image size. 208 x 144 pixels visible area with flip closed. FC and FOJPEG, GIF, BMP, WBMP Animated GIF supported; note that animation uses more power. 208 x 320 pixels FO image size 208 x 144 pixels visible area with flip closed (same image as FO) iMelody WAV, AU, AMR. Recommended format for WAV files is PCM, 22,050Hz, 8 bit, Mono, often called 'radio quality'

Application available via FC on-screen icons. Applications available from Application Picker in FO mode. Bluetooth Wireless Technology Bluetooth compatibility statement This product is manufactured to comply with the Bluetooth spec. 1.1. 188 P800_UM.book Page 189 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Infrared Transceiver Data transmission rate Max speed between phone and IrDA device (e.g. PC, another phone) SIR: up to 115,200 bps Remote Synchronisation Data Bearer Protocol Contacts Calendar Tasks HTTP SyncML Local Synchronisation Contacts Data Calendar Tasks Jotter text notes E-Mail Bluetooth IrDA USB SyncML Lotus Organizer 5 & 6 Lotus Notes 4.6 & 5.0 Microsoft Outlook 98, 2000, 2002 Protocol PC Applications supported Bearer Preliminary PC Connectivity Solutions Drag-and-drop file transfer between the P800 and the PC. ^

(e.g. Word documents, JPEG images) Backup and Restore of user data and settings Load new application Change MMI Language Use P800 as wireless modem. Security Data protection Browser Third party applications Intranet Access SIM PIN (at power on)Device Lock (at power on and/or activated by screensaver) TLS, SSL, WTLS, Certificate handling Support for signed applications SecureID from RSA SecuritySafeWord from Secure ComputingDigiPass from Vasco 189 s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T s n o i t a c i f i c e p S l i a c n h c e T P800_UM.book Page 190 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Remote Configuration Ericsson/Nokia OTA Settings specification WAP Account (Account name and WAP Gateway information) ISP Settings (Bearer information, username, password) Bookmark (name and URL)SyncML settingsMMS Settings WAP Account ISP Settings Bookmarks ISP Settings E-Mail account WAP Forum specifications Smart Messaging Specification Location Based Services Mobile-assisted E-OTD positioning according to FCC E-911 Phase 2 190 P 8 0 0 _ U M

. b o o k P a g e 1 9 1 T h u r s d a y

, J u l y 1 1

, 2 0 0 2 1 0

5 8 A M P r e l i i m n a r y 1 9 1 Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Technical Specifications Technical Specifications P800_UM.book Page 192 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Demo Application The Demo application shows a slide show of some functions of the smartphone:

How to send and receive messages How to find a contact and make a call How to take a picture and send it How to personalize the phone and handle short-cuts To start the Demo 1. Select the Applications icon 2. Select the demo icon 3. The demo is started To stop the Demo 1. Any input will stop the demo. The demo is also stopped at:

An incoming call An incoming SMS/EMS/MMS message 192 n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D P800_UM.book Page 193 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D n o i t a c i l p p A o m e D 193 P800_UM.book Page 194 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Document Viewer Document viewer is an application used to view various types of documents:

Word processing documents Spreadsheets Drawings PDF documents Presentations Archives Document viewer has two views in open mode:

List view An alphabetical list of files, for selecting a file to view. The contents of a file, for viewing and manipulating the file. File view Except from the list view, a document can also be opened from another application, e.g. by selecting a appended document in an e-mail. The functions available differ depending on the document type. General functions are similar between the document types and are therefore described separately. General functions In all views there is a menu bar from where you can access some of the functions. This section describes the functions that are common for all document types. r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D 194 P800_UM.book Page 195 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM List view Menus Viewer Option Find file Edit Folders Sort by name Sort by size Zoom All Unfiled Edit folders Detail view Menus Option Document Rename Send as Save (if opened from another application) Delete Properties Description Search files with a name conatining a specific text. Sort the file list by name. Sort the file list by file size. Set zoom level, small, medium or large. Show all files in the list. Show the files that is not in a folder. Categorize your files in folders (for example business or personal). Description Rename the document. Send a document as e-mail, MMS, IR or Bluetooth. Save the document in the smartphone. Delete the active document. Show information on the active document. Menus Edit Folders Option Copy to (if opened from the Document viewer only) Zoom in Zoom out Restore Unfiled Edit folders Preliminary Description Copy the document to another location, for example memory stick in the smartphone. Increase the view of the file. Decrease the view of the file. Restore to the original size. Show the contacts that is not in a folder. Categorize your documents in folders

(for example business, personal etc.). To open a document from an e-mail 1. Select the document link. 2. The document viewer is started, showing the file view of the document. To save the docuent in the smartphone 1. Select Document > Save from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D To open a document from the list view 1. Select the Application launcher icon 2. Select the Document viewer icon 3. If required, change folder. r e w e V i t n e m u c o D 195 P800_UM.book Page 196 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary 4. Scroll to the desired file and select the file name. The document is shown in the File view. To save the document to a different location 1. Select Edit > Copy to from the menu. 2. Select where to save the document and select Save. Detail view - Document Menus Document Find Option Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurence of the search text. Functions specific for different document types When a document is opened, the type is indicated by the name of the first menu, for example Spreadsheet. Edit Spreadsheet Edit Unfiled Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Copy Select all Draft view Normal view Page view Copy the selected text or elements of the document. Select the contents of the entire document. Display the document as formatted text without graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document as formatted text including graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document in print preview, showing the complete layout. To copy text from the document 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. 3. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. 196 Preliminary P800_UM.book Page 197 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D 197 P800_UM.book Page 198 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Detail view - Spreadsheet Menus Spread-

sheet Option Find Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurence of the search text. Edit Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Copy Select all Draft view Normal view Page view Show gridlines Next sheet Previous sheet Copy the selected text or elements of the document. Select the contents of the entire document. Display the document as formatted text without graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document as formatted text including graphics, adapted to the screen. Display the document in print preview, showing the complete layout. Turn the gridlines on/off. Open the view of the next sheet in the workbook. Open the previous sheet in the workbook. To copy text from the document 198 1. Select the text to be copied. To select all text in the document, select Edit > Select all. 2. Select Edit > Copy. 3. The text is put into the clipboard and a message is displayed. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. To change the document view 1. To display the document as formatted text without pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Draft view. 2. To display the document as formatted text including pictures, wrapped to the screen size, select Edit > Normal view. 3. To display the complete layout of the document, select Edit >

Page view. To show/hide the spreadsheet grid lines 1. Select Edit > Show gridlines. P800_UM.book Page 199 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM To navigate in the workbook 1. To go to the next sheet in the workbook, select Edit > Next sheet. 2. To go to the previous sheet in the workbook, select Edit >

Previous sheet. Detail view - Drawing Menus Drawing Find Option Find next Description Search the document for a specific text. Search for the next occurence of the search text. Edit Clear search hits Remove the search hits. Next slide Previous slide Open the view of the next slide in multi page documents. Open the view of the previous slide in multi page documents. To search for a text in the document 1. Select Document > Find from the menu. 2. Enter the text to search for. 3. Select find. 4. If required, select Document > Find next. 5. To clear the highlighted search hits, select Document > Clear search hits. Preliminary To navigate in a multi page drawing 1. To go to the next slide in the drawing, select Edit > Next slide. 2. To go to the previous slide in the drawing, select Edit >

Previous slide. Detail view - Archive Menus Edit Option Open Extract Extract all Sort by Sort order Description Open the selected file for viewing in a Document viewer window. Extract the selected file to be saved in a selected folder. Extract all the archive files to be saved in a selected folder. Allow the user to view files in an archive by name, date, or size. Allow the user to view files in ascending or descending order. To extract documents from an archive 1. To open a file for viewing in the Document viewer, select the file and select Edit > Open. 2. To extract a file and save it in the selected folder, select Edit >

r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D Extract. 3. To extract all files in the archive and save them in the selected folder, select Edit > Extract all. r e w e V i t n e m u c o D 199 P800_UM.book Page 200 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary To change the archive sort order 1. To sort the documents by name, date or size, select Edit > Sort by and select as desired. 2. To change between ascending and descending order, select Edit > Sort order. 200 P800_UM.book Page 201 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D r e w e V i t n e m u c o D 201 P800_UM.book Page 202 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM Preliminary Video player You can view video clips that you have saved in your smartphone. The video clips can be downloaded in the smartphone from an Internet site or transferred from a computer via a cable. It is also possible to send these video clips to other phones or pcs, via infrared communication, Bluetooth wireless technology and MMS. The video player supports the MPEG4 file format. To download a video 1. To view a video clip 1. Select Applications > Video. 2. To send a video clip 1. To delete a video clip 1. To rename a video clip 1. 1. 202 P800_UM.book Page 203 Thursday, July 11, 2002 10:58 AM B Battery insertion 10 removal 11 P Problem card blocked 161 display 162 emergency calls only 161 fax calls 162 inset card displayed 162 memory/disk full 162 no indicator light 162 no network 163 phone locked 163 red indicator light 162 screen 162 security code 162 starting 163 wrong PIN displayed 163 S Security problems 162 Preliminary 203